93014.15.

07

80447204
Revision B
May 2014

Contact-Cooled Rotary Screw Air Compressor

R30, R37, R45, R55, R75, R90, R110, R132, R160

Product Information
EN Product Information
ZH 产品信息

PRINT LANGUAGE

ENGLISH
CHINESE

Save These Instructions

93014.15.07
EN
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
TRANSPORTATION/RECEIPT/HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Unpacking and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Long Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Location in Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Discharge and Condensate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
General Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Special Electrical Considerations for Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
Compressors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Primary Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
How to Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
How to Find Which System Is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
High Voltage Conditions and Secondary Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Power Factor Compensation Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Power Supplied By Dedicated Transformer or Generator . . . . . . . . . 7
Control Power Transformer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Water-cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Cooling Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Venting the water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Draining the water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Water quality recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Integrated Dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Environmental Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Integrated Dryer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
(VSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Prior to starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Initial check sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Start sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Stop sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Warm up mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Blower control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Emergency stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Restarting after emergency stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (XE-90M CONTROLLER). . . . . . . . 12
User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
LED status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Command keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Navigation keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Display layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Folder navigation and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Page navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Accessing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Dashboard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Folder Options (Fixed Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Home folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operator settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Events folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Trip history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Maintenance folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
General settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
EN-2
Status folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Factory settings folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Folder Options (Variable Speed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Home folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operator settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Events folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Trip history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Maintenance folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
General settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Status folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Factory settings folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (XE-70M CONTROLLER). . . . . . . . 33
User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Led Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Command Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Navigation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Display layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Folder navigation and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Page navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Accessing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Dashboard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Dashboard Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fixed Speed Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Home folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operator Settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Events folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Trip History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Maintenance folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
General Settings folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Integral Sequencing folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Status folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Factory Settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Variable Speed Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Home folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operator Settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Events folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Trip History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Maintenance folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
General Settings folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Integral Sequencing folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Status folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Factory settings folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
MODBUS CONNECTION AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connection to the Modbus Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
RS-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Modbus Address Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Modbus Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
R4 to 37 kW Fixed Speed Modbus Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
R5.5 to 37 kW Variable Speed Modbus Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
X-SERIES SYSTEM CONTROLS CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
RS-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
RS-485 Address Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Enabling System Control Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NOTICES AND DISCLAIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

The purpose of this manual is to provide site planning, installation and operation guidelines for the compressor.
For supporting documentation refer to Table 1.
Table 1 : Product Manuals
Part/Document Number by Region
Publication Product
Americas EMEIA * Asia Pacific
Product Safety Information Manual All 80446313 80446156 80446321
Product Maintenance Manual All 80447170 80447196 80447212
R30-37 24342156
R37-45 80448095
Product Parts Information Manual R55-75 80447592
R90-160 kW Single-Stage 80446057
R90-160 kW Two-Stage 80446065
* Europe, Middle East, India and Africa
Product specification sheets and reference drawings are also available.

SAFETY
• Locate, read, understand and follow all Danger, Warning, Caution, and • It is your responsibility to make this information available to others.
Operating Instructions on the product and in all Manuals. Failure to
• If you have any questions about safety or procedures not included in
comply with safety precautions described in the manuals supplied with
this manual, ask your supervisor or contact any Ingersoll Rand office or
the product, this manual or any of the labels and tags attached to the
qualified Ingersoll Rand distributor.
product may result in death, serious injury or property damage.
• Check that all labels, tags and data (name) plates are in place and legible.

TRANSPORTATION/RECEIPT/HANDLING

 Transportation  Unpacking and Handling

Ensure machine is secured against movement during transportation. The compressor will normally be delivered with a polyethylene or other
cover. If a knife has to be used to remove this cover, ensure that the exterior
 Receipt paintwork of the compressor is not damaged.

Before signing the delivery receipt, inspect for damage and missing parts. If Incorporated within the base of the compressor are slots to enable a fork lift
damage or missing parts are apparent, make the appropriate notation on the truck to move the compressor. Ensure truck forks are fully engaged on both
delivery receipt, then sign the receipt. Immediately contact the carrier for an sides. Alternatively a special lifting frame can be used to enable a crane or
inspection. hoist to move the compressor. Use only marked lifting points.

All material shall be held in the receiving location for the carrier’s inspection.
Delivery receipts that have been signed without a notation of damage or
missing parts are considered to be delivered “clear.” Subsequent claims are
then considered to be concealed damage claims. Settle damage claims
directly with the transportation company.
If you discover damage after receiving the compressor (concealed damage),
the carrier shall be notified within 15 days of receipt and an inspection shall
be requested by telephone with confirmation in writing. On concealed
damage claims, the burden of establishing that the compressor was
damaged in transit reverts back to the claimant.
Read the compressor nameplate to verify it is the model ordered, and read
the motor nameplate to verify it is compatible with your electrical conditions.
Make sure electrical enclosures and components are appropriate for the
installation environment.
Once the packaging and pallet are discarded and the compressor is in its
final position, remove the yellow painted transit brackets from the resilient
mounts and store for future use or discard.
For Variable Speed and Fixed Speed (R30-37 kW)
• (2) brackets from the Airend and separator tank support.
• (1) bracket from the motor mounting bracket.
For Variable Speed Drive (VSD) (R37e-160 kW)
• (3) brackets at the separator tank
• (1) bracket from the air end discharge elbow.
• (1) bracket from the air end support.
For Fixed Speed (FS) (R37e-160 kW)
• (3) brackets at the separator tank
• (1) bracket from the air end support.
• (1) bracket from the motor mounting bracket.

 Long Term Storage

If the product will not be commissioned within six months of receipt, it
should be prepared for long term storage. Please contact Ingersoll Rand for
details.

80447204 Rev B EN-3

93014.15.07
EN
INSTALLATION
 Location in Plant
Figure 1 : Typical Air System
7 2
4 4
8 3
6 5
Key
1. Compressor
2. Air Receiver Dry Tank
3. Air Dryer
4. Compressed Air Filters
5. System Demand Points
6. Vent/Drain Trap
7. Isolation Valve
8. Air Receiver (“Wet Tank”)
• Customer can install flexible element between machine and pressure
system to avoid vibration transmition.
• The compressor can be installed on any level floor capable of supporting
it. A dry, well ventilated area where the atmosphere is as clean as possible
is recommended.
• The area selected for the location of the compressor should be free of
dust, chemicals, metal filings, paint fumes and overspray.
• Hard surfaces may reflect noise with an apparent increase in the decibel level.
When sound transmission is important, a sheet of rubber or cork can be installed
beneath the compressor to reduce noise. Flexible piping may be required.
• See the general arrangement drawing for minimum space requirements
for normal operation and maintenance.
• Minimum space in front of the control panel door as required by national
or local codes shall be maintained.
• Ambient temperatures higher than 46 °C (115 °F) shall be avoided, as well
as areas of high humidity.
NOTICE
A minimum of 1 m (3.3 ft) all around the compressor is recommended.
If headroom is restricted, then the exhaust should be ducted or
deflected away from the compressor.
Screw type compressors should not be installed in air systems with
reciprocating compressors without means of isolation such as a common
receiver tank. It is recommended that both types of compressor be
piped to a common receiver tank using individual air lines.
The compressor is shipped with the shipping restraints in place.
Ensure that these are removed to allow free movement of the drive
assembly during operation. Each restraint is painted yellow.
 Discharge and Condensate Piping
See Figure 1.
It is essential when installing a new compressor (1) to review the total air
system. This is to ensure a safe and effective total system.
One item which should be considered is liquid carryover. Installation of air
dryers (3) is always good practice since, when properly selected and installed,
they can reduce any liquid carryover to zero.
An air receiver tank (2) is recommended to ensure that the total system
volume is sufficient.
EN-4
Discharge piping should be at least as large as the discharge connection
of the compressor. All piping and fittings should be suitably rated for the
discharge pressure. Discharge piping should not exert any unresolved
moments or force on the compressor.
It is good practice to install line filters (4).
Include a vent or drain trap (6) to vent the discharge pipework downstream
from the minimum pressure check valve located on the separator tank and
upstream of the first system isolation valve (7).
This compressor has an internal discharge check valve. An external check
valve is not required. An isolation valve (7) is required within 1 m (36 in) of the
compressor discharge.
NOTICE
There should be no plastic or PVC piping attached to this compressor
or used for any lines down stream with exception of condensate
removal lines.
NOTICE
The discharged air contains a very small percentage of compressor
coolant and care should be taken to ensure that downstream
equipment is compatible.
When two rotary compressors are operated in parallel, provide an isolation
vaIve (7) and drain trap (6) for each compressor before the common receiver.
Ensure the discharge piping is arranged to prevent water from being forced
into the non-operating compressor.
A wet tank (8) is recommended in cases where the air dryer is a regenerative
desiccant type to prevent short cycling the compressor during the purging
cycle when plant air demand is slow.
The built-in after-cooler reduces the discharge air temperature below the
dew point (for most ambient conditions). Therefore, considerable water vapor
is condensed. To remove this condensation, each compressor with a built-in
after-cooler is furnished with a combination condensate separator/trap.
A dripleg assembly and isolation valve should be mounted near the
compressor discharge. A drain line should be connected to the condensate
drain in the base.
NOTICE
The drain line shall slope downward from the base to work properly.
For ease of inspection of the automatic drain trap operation, the drain
piping should include an open funnel. The drain line must have a
minimum inside diameter of 8 mm (5/16 in)
NOTICE
For low volume systems that may not include an air receiver tank (2),
compressor response time may need adjusting. Contact your local
Ingersoll Rand service provider.
NOTICE
Do not use the compressor to support the discharge pipe.
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

 General Electrical  Special Electrical Considerations for Variable Speed

A qualified electrician shall perform all electrical installations and service.
The compressor shall be properly grounded / earthed in compliance with all
applicable standards and regulations (local, state, country, federal, etc.).
Installation of this compressor shall be in compliance with all applicable
standards and regulations (local, state, country, federal, etc.).
Drive (VSD) Compressors
 Primary Input Power Supply
The primary input power for the compressor can come from different
transformer sources and configurations. The most typical sources and
configurations are a wye secondary and a delta secondary.

The compressor shall have its own isolator situated adjacent to it. The fuse Figure 2 : Wye and Delta Configurations
protecting the circuit and the compressor shall be selected in accordance
with recognized code requirements on the basis of the data provided in the
specification sheet. Wye Delta

Feeder cables shall be sized to ensure that the circuit is balanced and not
overloaded by other electrical equipment. The length of wiring from a
suitable electrical feed point is critical as voltage drops may impair the
performance of the compressor.

NOTICE

For VSD, cable sizes may vary considerably so the line reactor is
equipped with copper bus connections. These connections can accept
bolts between 6 mm and 12 mm.
 How to Ground
Feeder cable connections to incoming terminals L1-L2-L3 shall be tight and
clean. In most conditions, you must ground a wye system. Refer to local electrical
codes. When you ground a wye system, the voltage to ground becomes
The applied voltage shall be compatible with the compressor data plate stable and controlled. This prevents a system from damage by conditions that
ratings. cause high voltage to ground. It is typical to ground the neutral (center) point
The control circuit transformer has different voltage tappings. Ensure that of a wye source.
these are set for the specific applied voltage prior to starting. It is not necessary to ground a delta system. If you ground a delta system,
Remove the blind plate to cut a hole for incoming power connection. If it ground it to one phase. You can also ground it to a center tap on one phase.
is necessary to make a hole in the control box in a different location, care
should be taken to not allow metal shavings to enter the starter and other Figure 3 : Wye and Delta Grounding
electrical components within the box. If another hole is used, the original
hole shall be blocked off. Grounded wye(typical) Corner grounded delta(not
typical)
The feeder cable shall be suitably glanded in to the starter box to maintain
proper ingress protection. Fixed speed starter boxes are rated for NEMA 4
/IP65, and variable speed drive starter boxes are rated for NEMA 12/IP54.
For variable speed drive starter boxes, the feeder cable shall be glanded to
ensure that dirty air does not by-pass the filters.
On completion of electrical installation, check that the blower or fan motor
rotation is correct.
Variable speed drive compressors are designed for use, where the electricity
supply is separated from nearby residential and commercial areas. If the
compressor is to be used in a light industrial, residential or commercial Ungrounded Center grounded delta(not
environment where the local supply network is shared, further Radio delta(typical) typical)
Frequency (RF) screening measures may be required. Consult your local
distributor/supplier for details of the optional RF filter.
Variable speed drive compressors have an anti-condensation heater
and thermostat in the electrical box. This circuit can be connected to
an independent electrical supply of either 110 V or 230 V single phase,
dependent on the country of installation. The supply shall be suitably fused
and an independent isolator installed adjacent to the compressor. Verify that
the thermostat is adjusted to 29 ˚C (85 ˚F). This shall be done in accordance
with recognized codes. It is good practice, and sometimes mandatory,
to display suitable signs warning that the compressor has two separate Refer to electrical codes to ground the compressor to a permanent protective
electrical supplies which both shall be isolated before any work is attempted. ground connection. The compressor electrical enclosure contains an
For Variable speed drive compressors, the heater circuit can also be supplied electrical power ground terminal that has the identification of “PE”. The
from the 110 V tapping of the control transformer and connected as shown typical primary input power is a four-wire connection with three power wires
on the schematic wiring diagram furnished separately from this manual. and a ground wire. Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal.

NOTICE NOTICE

Main and fan motor insulation shall be tested by a qualified electrician If there are only three power wires and no ground wire, connect the
prior to initial start-up or following an extended shutdown period in ground terminal to a correct building ground. Do not let the enclosure
cold and damp conditions. frame float without an electrical connection to a power ground source.

80447204 Rev B EN-5

93014.15.07
EN
 How to Find Which System Is Used
NOTICE
Use a multimeter to measure the voltage. All voltage indications can
change plus or minus 10%.
In a grounded wye connected 480-volt network:
• Each phase to ground (neutral) voltage is approximately 277 volts (480/
sqrt3).
• 277 volts is a nominal indication for 480 volt systems.
• Other voltage indications are possible for 380, 415, 440 and 575 volt
systems. See Table 2.
• The phase-to-phase voltage is the same as the primary supply voltage
(575, 480, 460, 440, 415, or 380 volts).
NOTICE
You must disconnect the two Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
filters in a wye network that has a high resistance neutral connection
more than 30 ohms. See “Disconnecting the Electro-Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Filters”.
In an ungrounded delta connected network:
• The network is capacitively grounded.
• Stray capacitances are connected between each phase conductor to
ground.
• All phase voltages to ground are approximately 277 volts for a 480-volt
network.
• There can be many different indications because of the capacitive ground.
• The phase-to-phase voltage is the same as the primary supply voltage
(575, 480, 440, or 380 volts).
The primary function of an ungrounded delta network is to let uninterrupted
power occur during a ground fault. At this time, the ungrounded network
is referenced to ground. The primary circuit breaker opens only when two
phases are connected to ground. Thus, it is possible to have one of the three
phases of an ungrounded delta network connected to ground or the network
be ungrounded at the time of compressor installation, but have a grounded
phase at a future time.
NOTICE
You must disconnect the two Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
filters in a delta network that is not grounded. If you do not do this,
damage will occur to the filter and to the VSD. This voids the factory
warranties. See “Disconnecting the Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) Filters”.
In a delta connected network:
• Only two phases to ground have a voltage, while the third phase has zero
volts. The phase with zero volts is grounded.
• The two ungrounded phase voltages are the same as the primary supply
(480 volts to ground for a 480-volt system).
• The phase-to-phase voltage is the same as the primary supply voltage
(480, 440, or 380 volts).
NOTICE
With all compressors that have a variable speed drive for the primary
drive, connect the ground to the L2 input of the compressor. If you do
not obey this procedure, the compressor does not operate.
NOTICE
If you find a grounded phase during installation, it is important to
know if the grounded phase is intentional (grounded) or accidental
(ungrounded with a ground fault condition present).
EN-6
Table 2 : Input Voltage Rating
Nominal Voltage Rating (VAC) 380-460
Phase 3
Hertz 50/60
Min./Max. Voltage Tolerance (%) 400-460 V ± 10
380 V +10, -6
Min. /Max. Voltage Imbalance Between Phases (%) 3
Min./Max. Frequency Tolerance (%) ±5
NOTICE
Ratings that do not fall in these limits can cause damage to the
compressor and make all factory warranties void.
 High Voltage Conditions and Secondary Protection
A compressor with a variable speed drive contains Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOV). The MOV prevent damage to the VSD from typical voltage conditions.
Very high voltage conditions can cause damage to the MOV and the VSD.
These are examples of very high voltage conditions:
• lightning storms
• switching of power factor capacitors
• welders
• thyristors
If there are very high voltage conditions, you must add secondary protection
to prevent damage to the compressor.
NOTICE
Damage to the MOV shows that the compressor was exposed to very
high voltage conditions.
Damage to the MOV because of very high voltage makes the factory
warranty and the extended contract warranty void.
 Power Factor Compensation Capacitors
Power factor compensation is not necessary for a compressor that contains a
variable speed drive. Nevertheless, if you connect the compressor to a system
that includes compensation capacitors, obey these instructions:
• Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the
compressor is connected to the primary power. High voltage conditions
can open the compressor protection circuits or they can cause damage to
the compressor.
• If you increase or decrease the capacitor load gradually when the
compressor is connected to the power line, make sure the connection
steps are sufficiently low not to cause voltage transients that can open
the compressor protection circuits or cause damage to the compressor.
• Check that the power factor compensation unit is correct for use in
systems with AC drives. The compensation unit must typically have a
blocking reactor or harmonic filter.
• Do not connect any devices to the output of the AC drive in the
compressor.
NOTICE
If you do not obey the electrical installation instructions, the factory
warranty and any extended contract warranty is void.
 Disconnecting the Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Filters
On some types of electrical power systems, you must disconnect the
internal Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) filters. If you do not do this,
the electrical power system is connected to ground potential through the
EMC filter capacitors. This can cause a dangerous situation and it can cause
damage to the variable speed drive.
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

Disconnect the two EMC filters if the electrical power system is:
• ungrounded (floating)
• a high-resistance ground system (greater than 30 ohms)
• a corner- grounded delta system.
WARNING
Do not try to install or remove the EMC filters and jumpers while
power is applied to the compressors input terminals.
NOTICE
If you disconnect the internal EMC filters, the variable speed drive
does not agree to the European requirements for Electro-Magnetic
Compatibility. If you operate the compressor without the EMC filters,
the compressor can cause unwanted interference with electronic
devices. You can continue to operate the compressor without the EMC
filters only if Electro-Magnetic Compatibility is not necessary in your
area.
NOTICE
You must remove the two jumpers (For R37e-160 kW only). One
jumper is in the MOV/EMC metal box at the bottom of the compressor.
The other jumper is on the Printed Circuit Board (PCB) found on the
input buss bars to the drive.
Figure 4 : Location of First Jumper
A – First jumper
 Power Supplied By Dedicated Transformer or Generator
High Impedance Power Source
The compressor can operate in industrial electrical networks that have
a short-circuit power 15 times greater than the rated power of the drive
(line impedance less than seven percent). Make sure that the network is
correct if you operate the compressor on a generator set or on a dedicated
transformer.
We recommend that you open the link that connects the Electro-Magnetic
Compatibility filter capacitors to the ground point if the installation has the
following characteristics:
• the distribution power network has no connection to ground and
• the short-circuit current at the drive connection point and its rated
current has a ratio lower than 30.
Low Impedance Power Source
The variable speed drive can experience low impedance if the installation has
the following characteristics:
• the compressor is installed near to the medium voltage/low voltage
(MV/LV) power supply transformer, and
• a bank of power factor correction capacitors are connected in parallel at
the secondary side of the transformer.
The risk of a high voltage surge at the equipment terminals is high in the
condition that the voltage decrease > at the primary side of the transformer.
Example of line impedance calculation in percent
For a compressor with a rated input current of 100 amps and a line power
supply with short-circuit current capacity of 5000 amps, the line impedance is
two percent (100 A/5000 A).

 Control Power Transformer Connections

The control circuit transformer has different voltage primary taps for different
power line voltage levels. Make sure that the taps are set for the correct
applied voltage before you start the compressor.

Figure 6 : Control Power Transformer Connections

Figure 5 : Location of Second Jumper

A – Power
interface board
(located
underneath)
B – DC Bus sensing
board
C – Control board
D – EMC board
E – Cooling fan
F – Second jumper

NOTICE

The machine may not meet EMC requirement for connecting to a

mains network that is shared with domestic premises. If connection to
mains that are shared by other buildings for domestic use is required,
an additional EMC filter may be required.

80447204 Rev B EN-7

93014.15.07
EN
 Water-cooled
 Cooling Water Piping
NOTICE
Water piping to and from the compressor package shall be at least
as large as the package connection size. Do not undersize the water
piping.
Isolation valves with side drains should be installed on both the inlet and
outlet lines. To maintain cooler cleanliness and reliability, it is important to
install a strainer of 2 mm mesh size on the inlet line. Strainers are available
from Ingersoll Rand.
For sea water applications (sea water option only) a zinc anode is not
recommended as it will deteriorate the copper oxide film on the 70/30
copper-nickel alloy tubes in contact with sea water. To minimize galvanic
corrosion and provide the greatest corrosion protection to the coolers, it
is strongly recommended that a section of iron pipe (>00 mm length) be
connected as close as possible to the air compressor package water inlet
connection. The iron pipe will act as the sacrificial anode for the copper-
nickel tubes and therefore shall be considered a regular maintenance and
replacement item. For this reason, the section of iron pipe should be installed
so that it can be easily replaced (e.g. with a union joint.).
The air compressor has a normally closed solenoid valve that is fitted to
the water outlet side within the package. The valve is wired into the air
compressor control circuit and closes when the compressor stops.
Carefully inspect the water system before installing the air compressor
package. Ensure that the piping is free of scale and deposits that may
restrict water flow to the air compressor package. If water cleanliness is poor,
filtration installed on the water inlet pipe line is recommended.
Proper operation of the compressor requires that the cooling water flow
be provided at a maximum supply temperature of 46 °C (115 °F). See the
compressor engineering data sheets for cooling water flow rates.
Water temperature and pressure gauges should be installed in the water
piping for use in any fault finding of the water system. Water pressure should
ideally be between and 5 bar (43 .5 and 72.5 psi) but shall not be above
10 bar (145 psi).
Water cleanliness is also extremely important. Cleaning of coolers as a result
of fouling is a customer responsibility. Therefore, it is highly recommended
that proper water quality shall meet the requirements listed in WATER
QUALITY RECOMMENDATIONS later in this section.
 Venting the water system
Air should be vented from the water side of the system to avoid poor
performance and water hammer. Since the air compressor uses different
type heat exchangers depending on your selection of “fresh water cooled”
or “harsh water cooled” system, the venting procedure is different. Be sure to
use the correct procedure below:
Fresh water coolers (brazed plate heat exchangers):
1. Disconnect the water stop valve in the water outlet line of the
compressor.
2. Open the inlet water valve(s) to allow the water to flow to the
compressor.
3. Allow all the air to escape from the system and observe water at the
water outlet port.
4. Connect the water stop valve.
Harsh water coolers (shell and tube heat exchangers):
1. Locate the water system vent cocks on top of the after-cooler and oil
cooler.
2. Open the water valve(s) allowing water to flow to the package.
3. Open the vent cocks and allow all air to escape from the system. When
water is observed at the vent cocks, close them.
EN-8
 Draining the water system
Should it become necessary to completely drain the water system, use the
following procedures specific to the water cooled option you have.
Fresh water coolers (brazed plate heat exchangers):
1. Disconnect the inlet water line from the connection located at the rear
of the compressor.
2. Disconnect the water stop valve in the water outlet line of the
compressor.
3. Allow the system to completely drain.
Harsh water coolers (shell & tube heat exchangers):
1. Disconnect the inlet and discharge water lines from the connections
located at the rear of the compressor.
2. Locate the after-cooler and oil cooler. Remove the drain plugs located
at the bottom of the coolers.
3. Open the vent ports in the top of the after-cooler and oil cooler.
4. Allow the system to completely drain.
Adjusting the after-cooler trim valve
See the piping and instrumentation diagram provided separately from this
manual. The coolers are piped in a “parallel” water flow arrangement with a
manual trim valve controlling the flow through the after-cooler. The after-
cooler trim valve is factory set and should not need adjusting but if disturbed
use following procedure.
1. Close valve fully clockwise and then open two full turns.
2. With the compressor running loaded observe the package discharge
temperature on the controller display. It should be approximately 8 °C
(15 °F) above the water inlet temperature.
3. If the temperature is too high, open the valve ¼ turn and wait one
minute. If the temperature is too low, close the valve ¼ turn and wait
one minute. Repeat the incremental movements until the desired
temperature is reached.
4. Put a “Warning − Do Not Adjust” label on the valve or fit a lock.
 Water quality recommendations
Water quality is often overlooked when the cooling system of a water-
cooled air compressor is examined. Water quality determines how effective
the heat transfer rate, as well as the flow rate, will remain during the life of
the compressor. It should be noted that the quality of water used in any
cooling system does not remain constant during the operation of the system.
Evaporation, corrosion, chemical and temperature changes, aeration, scale
and biological formations affect the water makeup. Most problems in a
cooling system first appear as a reduction in the heat transfer rate, then in a
reduced flow rate or increased pressure drop, and finally with damage to the
system.
Scale: Scale formation inhibits effective heat transfer, yet it does help
prevent corrosion. Therefore, a thin uniform coating of calcium carbonate
is acceptable on the inner surface. Perhaps the largest contributor to scale
formation is the precipitation of calcium carbonate out of the water. This is
dependent on temperature and pH level. The higher the pH value, the greater
the chance of scale formation. Scale can be controlled with water treatment.
Corrosion: In contrast to scale formation is the problem of corrosion.
Chlorides cause problems because of their size and conductivity. Low pH
levels promote corrosion, as well as high levels of dissolved oxygen.
Fouling: Biological and organic substances (slime) can also cause problems,
but in elevated temperature environments such as cooling processes they
are not a major concern. If they create problems with clogging, commercial
shock treatments are available.
To ensure good operation life and performance of the compressor cooling
system, the recommended acceptable ranges for different water constituents
are included below:
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

Table 3 : Acceptable Limits for Cooling Water Constituents

ACCEPTABLE MAXIMUM LIMITS

Substance Test Interval Fresh Water Dirty Water / Sea Water
(Brazed Plate Heat Exchanger) (Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger)
Langelier Index (LI) Monthly 0 to 1 -0.5 to 2.5
Ammonia [NH3 ], ppm Monthly <1 <2
Ammonium [NH4-1], ppm Monthly <2 <5
Chlorides [Cl-], ppm Monthly <80 <1000
Copper [Cu], ppm Weekly <0.01 <0.5
Dissolved Oxygen (DO) [O2], ppm Monthly <0.1 <3
Iron + Manganese [Fe + Mn], ppm Monthly <0.3 <2
Nitrate [NO3 -], ppm Monthly <100 <125
Oil & Grease, ppm Monthly <5 <5
Silicon Dioxide (silica) [SiO2], ppm Monthly <30 <100
Sulfates [SO4-2], ppm Monthly <70 <250

 Integrated Dryer  Environmental Limits

Do not connect condensate drains common to other pressurized drain The standard compressor package is designed for the following conditions:
lines in a closed circuit. Make sure the outflow from the condensate drains • Indoors only
is unimpeded. Connect the condensate piping in such a way to ensure that
sound levels are kept to a minimum during drainage. • Area not considered to be a high dust area.

Ensure that all condensate is disposed of in a responsible manner, in • Ambient temperature range 2 to 46 °C (5-115 °F)
compliance with all applicable standards and regulations (local, state, Ingersoll Rand offers the following options for fixed speed compressors that
country, federal, etc.). extend the environmental limits:
The ambient air around the dryer and compressor shall not contain solid • Outdoor modification
or gaseous contaminants. All compressed and condensed gases can
• Low ambient option (-23 to 46 °C / -15 to 115 °F) at sea level
generate acids or chemical products which may damage the compressor or
components inside the dryer. Take particular care with sulphur, ammonia, • High ambient option (2 to 55 °C / 5 to 13 1 °F) at sea level
chlorine and installations in marine environments. • High dust air filter
• High dust package filter

80447204 Rev B EN-9

93014.15.07

EN

GENERAL INFORMATION
The compressor is an electric motor driven, contact cooled screw compressor,
complete with all necessary components piped, wired and baseplate NOTICE
mounted. It is a totally self contained air compressor package.
Fixed speed compressors should not be connected to variable speed
The standard compressor is designed to operate in an ambient range of 2 °C drives. Please contact your local Ingersoll Rand representative before
to 46 °C (35 °F to 115 °F). The standard maximum temperature of 46 °C inverter duty conversion.
(115 °F) is applicable up to an elevation of 1000 m (3280 ft) above sea level.
Above this altitude, significant reductions in ambient temperature are
required if a standard motor is to be used. CAUTION
The compressor is managed by the onboard electronic controller. The For fixed speed models, the compressor may not reach its normal
controller and drive system operate together to vary the speed of the operating temperature during periods of low demand. Sustained
compressor to deliver compressed air at the target pressure. operation at low demand can result in the buildup of condensate in
For fixed speed (FS) models, the capacity is automatically controlled via the coolant. If this situation occurs, the lubricating characteristics
‘ON-OFF LINE’. The compressor will operate to maintain a set discharge line of the coolant can be impaired, which may lead to damage of the
pressure and is provided with an auto restart system for use in plants where compressor.
air demand varies widely. The compressor should be allowed ample loading time.
Panel instrumentation is provided to indicate the compressor operating
conditions and general status.
 Integrated Dryer Operation
The air/coolant mixture discharges from the compressor into the separation
system. This system removes all but a few ppm of the coolant from the In the default mode, the dryer is non-cycling. The stop button must be
discharge air. The coolant is returned to the cooling system and the air passes pressed to shut-off the dryer.
to the after-cooler and out of the compressor through the moisture separator. In the energy efficient mode, the dryer may run up to 6 minutes before
Air is pulled into the compressor by the cooling blower and through the it shuts off automatically during the Start/Stop mode of the compressor
coolant cooler and after-cooler. package. Note the dryer could be off for an extended period if the
compressor needs to come back on right away.
By cooling the discharge air, much of the water vapor naturally contained in
the air is condensed and is drained from the built-in moisture separator and NOTICE
drain.
If ISO Class 4 dew point standards are critical to your application,
The coolant system consists of a sump, cooler, thermostatic valve and a
run the compressor in unload mode (fixed speed) or idle mode
filter. When the compressor is operating, coolant is forced by air pressure
(variable speed) for one minute at startup to allow the dryer to reach
from the separator tank to the thermostatic element. The position of the
the required dew point before the compressor begins providing
element (a direct result of coolant temperature) will determine whether the
compressed air.
coolant circulates through the cooler, bypasses the cooler, or mixes the two
paths together to maintain an optimum compressor discharge temperature.
This temperature is controlled to preclude the possibility of water vapor
condensing. By injecting coolant at a sufficiently high temperature, the
discharge air coolant mixture temperature will be kept above the dew point.
For variable speed drive models, the system is enhanced by a control logic
that varies the cooling blower speed dependent on the intake and discharge
temperatures and hence controls the injection temperature even closer while
saving blower motor energy.
The compressor is provided with a temperature sensor which will shut the
compressor down in case of excessive temperature. This setting is typically
109 °C (228 °F).
Effective coolant filtration is provided by the use of a screw on, heavy duty
coolant filter.

EN-10 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD)
 Basic Operation
NOTICE
The language and compressors of measure displayed on the controller
will be preset before leaving the factory. If these are required to be
changed, contact your local Ingersoll Rand service provider.
 Prior to starting
Check that the coolant level is at least visible in the center of the sight glass
and add coolant if necessary. Refer to the maintenance procedures for setting
the correct level.
Ensure that the discharge air isolation valve is open. Switch ON the main
electrical isolation switch. The control panel will illuminate, indicating that
the line and control voltages are available.
The contrast of the SG controller display may be adjusted by turning the
small screw which is on the right hand side of the controller when accessed
through the starter cabinet door.
 Initial check sequence
The controller will perform an initial check sequence if the compressor
receives initial power to the controller or has experienced an trip reset. While
the initial check sequence occurs, the controller will display a “Checking
Machine” message.
During the initial check sequence, the controller will check the control system
for proper operation. During this time, if any items are found inoperative, a
trip will occur and the compressor will not start.
After completion of the initial check sequence, the controller will then display
“READY TO START’. This process should be completed within 10 seconds.
 Start sequence
The compressor will initially start by the operator pressing the local start
button or receiving a remote start command. The compressor will start
loaded and will ramp up the motor speed to its minimum speed. Once the
minimum speed has been achieved, the compressor will begin to control
pressure by using its speed regulation. When the system pressure reaches
the target pressure, the compressor will start to slow. If the system pressure
rises to the immediate stop pressure setpoint the compressor will stop. If
the system pressure rises to the auto stop setpoint and the compressor is at
minimum speed, the compressor will stop.
NOTICE
During the first startup of the compressor, check for the proper
direction of rotation of the dryer condenser fan. If the fan is not
rotating in the direction indicated by the rotation arrow decal, reverse
two of the wires at the main power supply or at the contactor in the
package starter box. Perform the proper stop sequence and lockout/
tagout the main electrical supply before making changes to the
wiring.
80447204 Rev B
EN
 Stop sequence
The compressor can be stopped by a local or remote stop, a shutdown due
to a trip, or an emergency stop. All of the above conditions will cause the
compressor to stop immediately, except the local or remote stop. A local or
remote stop will open the blowdown valve and the compressor will run for
up to 10 seconds or until the pressure in the separator tank falls to 2.4 bar
(35 psi) before stopping. The compressor will stop if the system pressure
reaches the automatic stop or immediate stop pressure setpoints. However,
if the compressor stops for this reason, it will automatically restart when the
system pressure falls below the target pressure.
NOTICE
If the compressor has to be stopped in an emergency depress the
emergency stop button located underneath the instrument panel.
 Warm up mode
A warm up cycle occurs when the compressor’s airend discharge temperature
doesn’t reach the required warm up temperature (82°C/180°F) for two
consecutive operational cycles. On a warm up cycle, instead of stopping,
the compressor will continue to run with the blowdown valve open.
The compressor will run in a fixed speed mode, at minimum speed. The
blower will operate at minimum speed. The compressor will run like this
for approximately five minutes. During a warm up cycle, the controller will
display the message “Warm Up Mode”. If the pressure falls during this time
period, the compressor will return to normal operation.
 Blower control
The blower speed varies in some conditions to assist in controlling the after-
cooler approach temperature and the coolant injection temperature. The
blower motor has its own variable speed drive and will ramp up and down as
the compressor starts and stops.
 Emergency stopping
If the compressor has to be stopped in an emergency press the emergency
stop button located underneath the instrument panel.
This will over-ride the normal unload/stop button and will immediately stop
the compressor.
NOTICE
It is a normal situation that drive cooling fan continues to run even
when the drive is stopped. And the fan can run even under an E-stop.
 Restarting after emergency stopping
If the compressor has been switched OFF because of a compressor
malfunction, identify and correct the fault before attempting to restart.
If the compressor has been switched OFF for reasons of safety, ensure that
the compressor can be operated safely before restarting.
Refer to the PRIOR TO STARTING and START SEQUENCE instructions earlier in
this section before restarting the compressor.
EN-11
93014.15.07

EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (XE-90M CONTROLLER)

 User Interface Icon Name Function
The standard user interface configuration of the controller consists of the
membrane and the LCD display. The membrane consists of five command
Start Starts the compressor.
keys (START, STOP, LOAD, UNLOAD, and RESET), four navigation keys (UP,
RIGHT, LEFT and DOWN), and an Edit mode selection key (ENTER). These keys,
the color graphics display and the LED icons make up the user interface to
the compressor. Stops the compressor. This button should be
Stop pressed instead of the E-Stop for normal stopping
Figure 7 : Xe-90M
operation.

Toggles the display between the Navigation mode

Enter
and the Edit mode.

NOTICE

The LOAD and UNLOAD keys are not used on variable speed
compressors.

 Navigation keys
There are four navigation keys (UP, RIGHT, DOWN and LEFT). While the ENTER
key is not considered a navigation key, it is used in conjunction with the
navigation keys to make or confirm a selection.
Figure 8 : Navigation Keys
 LED status icons
Three LED icons are used to indicate the current status of the control system
from a distance and are located on the upper left side of the user interface.
Table 4 : LED Status Icons

Icon Name Function

Illuminates when no Warnings or Trips are sensed.

OK
Can be in a Ready or Not Ready state. Pressing one of the navigation keys will lead the user down a navigation path.
Each time the key is pressed, another step in the path is taken. Once the end
Illuminates when an Warning (flashes) or Trip of a navigation path is reached, pressing the key one more time will bring the
Alert (constant ON) is sensed. Can be in a Ready user back to the beginning of the path. Pressing the opposite key, will move
(Warning) or Not Ready (Trip) state. the user through the navigation path in the opposite direction. Once the
beginning is reached, pressing the opposite key will take the user to the end
of the path.
Illuminates when the compressor stops in auto
Auto
restart.  Display layout
Figure 9 : Display Layout
 Command keys
These keys command the controller to perform actions as specified in the
following table. When any of these keys are pressed the action below will be
initiated and logged in the event log.
Table 5 : Command Keys

Icon Name Function

--- None

Puts the compressor into the selected mode of

Load operation. Unit will load if the pressure conditions
are right.
Table 6 : Display Layout

Puts the compressor into an unloaded state. Unit Key Name Description
Unload
will run unloaded. A Folder Bar Uses tabs to graphically identify each folder.
B Title Bar Identifies current folder and page (underlined).
C Page Content Content of the current page.
Clears Warnings and Trips once the condition is
Reset
corrected. D Dashboard Displays system status.

EN-12 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

 Folder navigation and icons Figure 10 : Numeric Entry Window

To move among the tabbed folders shown on the LCD display, press the
RIGHT and LEFT keys. The navigation rolls over from the last to the first folder
and vice-versa.
Table 7 : Folder Bar Icons

Folder
Icon Description
Name
System performance and status main
Home information. The first page of this folder is the
default page when the controller first powers up. NOTICE
Operator Not all pages have adjustable parameters. Some just have read-only
System options and configuration settings.
Settings information.

Events System events log.  Dashboard icons

The dashboard is intended to be a quick at-a-glance view of system status.
Trip History Details on the most recent trips. The following table lists standard dashboard icons and their definition.
Note that the color of these icons changes based on the state set by the
On-board graphing of system data. (Optional for application while running.
Graphing
some controllers)
Table 9 : Dashboard Icons
Status and notification setup for compressor
Maintenance
maintenance items. Name Icon Description
General General settings such as Language, Time, and Network
Network control is enabled.
Settings Units of Measure. Control

Service A service reminder is nearing or has expired

Integral Inter Module communication status and
Sequencing configuration. Required (i.e.: an air or oil filter needs to be changed).

Measurements or status from/of all analog and Unloaded Compressor is in the unloaded state.
Status
digital I/O. or
Factory Compressor tuning parameters. Also displays Loaded Compressor is in the loaded state.
Settings hardware and software versions.

 Page navigation  Folder Options (Fixed Speed)

Once the desired folder is selected, press the DOWN key to move to the page
selection area and then use the RIGHT and LEFT keys to select the desired  Home folder
page. Use the UP key to get back to the folder tabs.
Page 1: System Overview
Table 8 : Title Bar Page Icons
Figure 11 : Home Folder
Icon Description
Start of the page selection area.

Indicates that there are more pages available by navigating

right.

Indicates that there are more pages available by navigating

left.

 Accessing parameters
After the desired page is selected, the page’s parameters can be selected by
using the DOWN key. The cursor will move to the next parameter each time
the DOWN key is pressed. Use the UP key to go back to the previous one.
This is the factory default display after powering up the system.
The cursor rolls over, so once the last parameter is selected, pressing the
• Online Pressure Setpoint is indicated in the white box and by the white
DOWN key will navigate the cursor to the folder bar. If the first parameter is
arrow, which is always left of center on the gauge.
selected, pressing the UP key will move the cursor to the page selection area.
• Offline Pressure Setpoint is indicated in the white box and by the white
Once selected, access parameters by pressing the ENTER key. Make changes
arrow, which is always right of center on the gauge.
using the navigation keys and then enter the setting by pressing the ENTER
key again. After a parameter is accessed, pressing the ENTER key will enter • Package Discharge Pressure is indicated by the large numbers centered
the current setting into the control program and navigate the cursor back to below the gauge and by the red arrow.
the selected parameter on the page. • Pressure Unit of Measure is indicated below the Package Discharge
When the cursor is on a parameter that has an enabled/disabled box, Pressure. This is selectable from the General Settings folder.
pressing the ENTER key will cause the setting to toggle. • Airend Discharge Temperature is indicated by the numbers in the lower
This “X” icon appears on numeric entry windows as shown below. Placing the left of the display.
cursor on it and then pressing the ENTER key will cancel the entry and any • Temperature Unit of Measure is indicated to the right of the Airend
changes that were made. Discharge Temperature. This is selectable from the General Settings folder.

80447204 Rev B EN-13

93014.15.07

EN

• Run Hours indicate the number of hours the compressor has been • Coolant Filter Pressure Drop
running.
• Inlet Vacuum
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (integrated dryer compressors only)
NOTICE
• Remote Pressure (optional)
The online and offline set points can be selected and modified on this
page. All other information on this page is read only.
 Operator settings folder
Page 2 : Counters Pages 1-2: Operator Settings
Figure 12 : Counters Figure 14 : Operator Settings

• Hour Meters indicate the hours that: the controller has been powered
Table 10 : Operator Settings
up, the compressor has been running, and the compressor has running
loaded.
Operator Selection Min. Max. Default Step Unit
• Starts indicate the number of times a start is attempted on the Settings
compressor.
Offline --- 75 Rated+10 Rated+10 1 psi
• Date & Time is adjustable and configurable in the General Settings folder. Pressure

Pages 3-4: Analog Inputs Online --- 65 Offline-10 Offline-10 1 psi

Pressure
Figure 13 : Analog Inputs
Lead/Lag Lead/Lag --- --- Lead --- ---
Lag Offset --- 0 45 0 1 psi
Mode of Mode --- --- ON/OFF --- ---
Operation line
Condensate --- 2 20 5 1 sec
Release
Condensate --- 90 270 180 1 sec
Interval
Stop Delay --- 10 30 10 1 sec
Time
Star-Delta --- 5 30 10 1 sec
Time / Start
Time
Pages 3-5: Operator Options
Icon Meaning Figure 15 : Operator Options
Pressure

Temperature

NOTICE

All information on these pages is read only.

The following inputs are displayed in this section:

• Package Discharge Pressure
• Sump Pressure
• Airend Discharge Temperature
• Injected Coolant Temperature
• After-cooler Discharge Temperature
• Separator Pressure Drop

EN-14 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Table 11 : Operator Options

Operator Options Selection Min. Max. Def. Step Unit Installed option
required?
Enable Auto Restart ON/OFF --- --- OFF --- --- No
Auto Restart Time --- 2 60 10 1 Min No
Auto Restart Delay --- 0 60 0 1 Sec No
Comm Control ON/OFF --- --- OFF --- --- No
Remote Start/Stop ON/OFF --- --- OFF --- --- No
Power Out Restart ON/OFF --- --- OFF --- --- Yes
Power Out Restart Time --- 10 600 10 1 Sec Yes
Low Ambient Temp* --- 30 60 35 1 Deg F No
Lead/Lag Cycle Time** --- 0 750 0 1 Hours No
Scheduled Start - Day --- Day Day Sun 1 Day Yes
Scheduled Start --- 00:00 23:59 00:00 1 Time Yes
Scheduled Stop - Day --- Day Day Sun 1 Day Yes
Scheduled Stop --- 00:00 23:59 00:00 1 Time Yes
High Dust Filter ON/OFF --- --- OFF --- --- Yes
Remote Sensor ON/OFF --- --- OFF --- --- Yes
* The low ambient temperature is only adjustable if the low ambient factory set point is on.
** A value of 0 will disable the lead/lag cycle time feature.
Pages 6-7: Sensor Calibration
Figure 16 : Sensor Calibration  Events folder
Pages 1-42 (max.)
Figure 17 : Events Folder

Sensor calibration can only take place when the compressor is stopped.
There should be no pressure on a sensor when it is calibrated. Calibration
only needs to take place after a sensor is replaced, the controller is replaced,
or the operator suspects the sensor reading is in error. Calibrate a sensor by
selecting the checkbox beside the sensor name.
Each of the sensors listed below can be calibrated:
• Inlet Vacuum (1AVPT)
• Sump Pressure (3APT)
• Package Discharge Pressure (4APT)
• Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure (5CPT)
• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure (6CPT)
• Remote Pressure (10APT) – Only on compressors with the remote sensor
option
The pages in the Events folder document up to the last 250 events that the
controller has experienced, and time stamps each. The events are recorded
in sequence, with number one being the newest and 250 being the oldest.
When a new event occurs, it becomes number one and all others are shifted
up in number.
The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through six,
page two displays seven through twelve, and so on.
The following items will generate an event:
• Power ON
• Power OFF

• Interstage Pressure (2APT) – Only on 2-stage compressors • Press the Start Key

• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (7APT) – Only on compressors with • Press the Stop Key
integrated dryer • Press the Load Key
Please note that if a sensor is currently reading a value that is +/- 10% of • Press the Unload Key
its range from zero, the sensor will not be able to be calibrated. Please • Warning
make sure the sensor is being exposed to atmosphere before attempting
calibration. • Trip
• Start Inhibit

Active Warnings will be highlighted in amber while cleared Warnings will

have amber text.

80447204 Rev B EN-15

93014.15.07
EN
Active Trips will be highlighted in red while cleared Trips will have red text.
Active Start Inhibits will be listed in the Event log, but not highlighted. The
display will indicate the compressor is not ready to start if a start inhibit is
active.
See the following lists for details about messages in each type of event.
Warning Events List
Change Inlet Filter
Will occur if 1AVPT is greater than 0.7 psi vacuum (or 1.3 psi vacuum if the
high dust filter option is enabled) and the compressor has been loaded for at
least 8 seconds. This condition must exist for 3 seconds before the warning
is issued.
Change Coolant Filter
This will occur if the compressor has been running loaded for at least 8
seconds, is warmed up, and the coolant filter pressure drop (5CPT - 6CPT)
is greater than 25 psi. This condition must exist for 3 seconds before the
warning is issued.
Sensor Failure
This will occur whenever sensors 4ATT, 5DTT, 6DTT, and 7APT are recognized
as missing or broken. The sensor failure message shall follow the following
format: SENSOR FAILURE 4ATT. The 5DTT, 6DTT, and 7APT sensor failures will
be shown only when the integrated dryer is installed (accessed in the factory
settings menu). This condition must exist for 3 seconds before the warning
is issued.
Change Separator Element
Will occur if the compressor is loaded, the compressor is warmed up (the
injected coolant temperature is at least 120 °F), the package discharge
pressure is at least 90 psi, and the separator pressure drop is greater than
12 psi. This condition must exist for 3 seconds before the warning is issued.
High Airend Discharge Temperature
Will occur if the compressor is running and 2ATT is greater than 221 °F (97%
of 228) and the compressor is running. This condition must exist for
3 seconds before the warning is issued.
High Sump Pressure
If the compressor is running loaded, has been loaded for at least 8 seconds
and the sump pressure is more than 25 psi above the rated pressure for the
compressor. If this warning occurs, the online and offline pressures will be
reduced. For example, a rated pressure of 100 psi would have a maximum
offline pressure of 110 psi. This warning would occur if the sump pressure
goes above 125 psi in this example. This condition must exist for 3 seconds
before the warning is issued.
Auxiliary 1
This will occur if auxiliary input 1 closes. The contact must be closed for at
least 3 seconds before the warning will occur.
Auxiliary 2
This will occur if auxiliary input 2 closes. The contact must be closed for at
least 3 seconds before the warning will occur.
Service
Service warnings occur when the compressor has operated a certain number
of hours, based on the total hours. Service warnings can have multiple
levels, depending on the service level selection. A service level selection of 0
disables service warnings.
Service Level 1
If service level 1 has been selected for the compressor, a “SERVICE REQUIRED”
warning will be issued on hour intervals equal to the service time period set
point. This warning can be reset the same as any other warning.
Service Level 2
If service level 2 has been selected for the compressor, the service complete
factory set point will be used to clear a level 2 service warning and reset
the service time or date. The service complete can be reset before a service
warning occurs.
The initial “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will occur at total hour intervals
EN-16
equal to the service time period set point. However, 100 hours before this
a “100 HOURS TO SERVICE” warning will occur. This warning can be reset
the same as any other warning. One hundred hours later the “SERVICE
REQUIRED” warning will occur. This warning can be reset the same as any
other warning, however this warning will return in 24 hours if the service
complete factory set point has not be set. If the service complete has not
been set, 100 hours later, the “ALARM – SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be
issued. This warning can only be cleared by the service complete factory
set point. Once the service complete factory set point is set, indicating the
service is completed, the time for the next “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will
be calculated by adding the service time period to the total hours value, with
the “100 HOURS TO SERVICE” warning occurring 100 hours before and the
“ALARM – SERVICE REQUIRED” warning occurring 100 hours after that time.
Communication Failure
This will occur if the compressor is the lead compressor in integral
sequencing and is unable to communicate with another compressor.
Sensor Failure 10APT – Remote Sensor
This will occur if the remote sensor option is ON and the remote sensor
is recognized as missing or broken. If this occurs, the compressor will
automatically start using 4APT for loading and unloading the compressor.
Units equipped with an integrated dryer cannot have a remote pressure
sensor. This condition must exist for 3 seconds before the warning is issued.
High Discharge Pressure
Will occur if the compressor is using a remote sensor or is under the control
of an external device, such as an 8XI, is loaded, and the discharge pressure
(4APT) is greater than the maximum offline pressure. This condition must
exist for 3 seconds before the warning is issued. If this condition occurs, the
compressor will automatically unload. The compressor will be available to
reload once the discharge pressure falls to the rated pressure value.
Condensate Drain Error
This will occur if the compressor is running, the package discharge pressure is
over 50 psi, and the condensate drain error contact closes for at least
240 seconds. This warning will be ignored for 4.5 minutes after starting.
Freeze Warning
This will occur if the evaporator sensor has a value of 687 (about 0.5 C)
or below (low temp) while the dryer is running, on compressors with the
integrated dryer. This is a dryer fault. If this happens, the compressor will
continue to run, but the dryer will stop. The condition must exist for at least
180 seconds before the warning will occur. NOTE: If this warning is reset
while the conditions for running the dryer exist, the dryer can restart. Also the
dryer can restart if the evaporator value rises to 709 (about 5 C). However the
warning will still be displayed.
Dryer High Pressure
On compressors with the integrated dryer, this will occur if the dryer high
pressure switch opens while the dryer is running. This is a dryer fault. If this
happens, the compressor will continue to run, but the dryer will stop. The
contact must be open for at least 3 seconds before the warning will occur.
If this warning is reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist, the
dryer can restart. However, this switch is a locking switch. The switch must be
reset before the dryer can run. Resetting the warning on the display does not
reset the switch.
Condenser Temperature High
This will occur if the condenser sensor has a value above high temperature
threshold while the dryer is running, on compressors with the integrated
dryer. This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the compressor and dryer will
continue to run. The condition must exist for at least 180 seconds before the
warning will occur.
Condenser Temperature Low
This will occur if the condenser sensor has a value below the low temperature
threshold while the dryer is running, on compressors with the integrated
dryer. This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the compressor and dryer will
continue to run. The condition must exist for at least 180 seconds before the
warning will occur.
Change HE Filter
The HE filter is located between the after-cooler discharge and the inlet to
the dryer and is only on compressors with an integrated dryer. The drop
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

across the HE filter is measured by subtracting the package discharge this fault occurs, the operator can reset it and start the compressor. This fault
pressure from the after-cooler discharge pressure. If the compressor is will be logged in the trip history to indicate that the compressor is being
running, the measured drop across the HE filter is at or above 10 psi (0.7 started in low ambient conditions.
bar), the compressor is hot (injected coolant temp above 120 °F), and the
package discharge pressure (4APT) is above 90 psi, this warning can occur. High Interstage Pressure
The condition must exist for at least 3 seconds before the warning will occur. This will occur if the compressor is running and the interstage pressure
This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the warning will be displayed, but the (2APT) is greater than 75 psi. This trip will only occur in 2 stage compressors.
dryer will continue to run.
Invalid Calibration
Trip Events List
Will occur if the sensor zero value is +/- 10% of its scale. This will only occur
Low Sump Pressure when a sensor is calibrated.
Will occur if the compressor is running unloaded or loaded and 3APT is less Start Inhibit List
than 13 psi for 15 seconds.
High Airend Discharge Temperature
High Airend Discharge Temperature
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 95% of 228 °F.
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 228 °F and the compressor is running.
High Sump Pressure
Check Motor Rotation
This will occur if the sump pressure (3APT) is 25 psi or higher than the rated
This will occur if 3APT is less than 1 psi on a compressor, 3 seconds after pressure of the compressor.
starting (6 seconds if the compressor is equipped with a soft starter or airend
discharge temperature is less than 50 °F). This condition can be caused by
the motor running in reverse. Once correct motor rotation is established, this  Trip history
trip will not be checked again unless power is removed from the controller.
Pages 1-4 (max.)
Main Motor Overload
Figure 18 : Trip History
This will occur if the motor overload relay contact opens. The contact must
be open for at least 3 seconds before the trip will occur.
Fan Motor Overload
Will occur if a fan motor overload relay contact opens. The contact must be
open for at least 3 seconds before the trip will occur.
Remote Stop Failure
Will occur if the remote start/stop option is enabled, the remote stop button
remains open and either start button is pressed.
Remote Start Failure
Will occur if the remote start/stop option is enabled, the compressor is
started by the remote start button, and the button stays closed for 7 seconds
after the compressor starts.
Sensor Failure The pages in the Trip History folder document up to the last 15 trips that the
This will occur when a sensor is recognized as missing or broken. The sensors controller has experienced, and time stamps each. The trips are recorded in
affected by this trip are 1AVPT, 3APT, 4APT, 5CPT, 6CPT, 2APT (if 2 stage sequence, with number one being the newest and 15 being the oldest. When
compressor), 2CTT, and 2ATT. The sensor should be displayed along with the a new trip occurs, it becomes number one and all others are shifted up in
sensor failure message. The sensor failure message shall follow the following number.
format: SENSOR FAILURE 1AVPT. The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
Emergency Stop each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through five,
page two displays six through ten, and so on.
This will occur when the emergency stop button is engaged.
The following items will generate an event.
High Sump Pressure
• Power ON
This will occur if the compressor is running loaded for at least 8 seconds, and • Power OFF
any one of the 3 following conditions exist. (1) The sump pressure is above
the rated pressure by 35 psi. (2) The separator pressure drop is measured to • Press the Start Key
be more than 25 psi and the package discharge pressure at least equal to the • Press the Stop Key
minimum online set point value. (3) The sump pressure is above 165 psi if the
rated pressure is less than 190 psi or the sump pressure is above 220 if the • Press the Load Key
rated pressure is 190 psi. • Press the Unload Key
High Coolant Filter Pressure Drop • Warning
This will occur if the compressor has been running loaded for at least 8 • Trip
seconds, is warmed up, already has a change coolant filter warning, and the
• Start Inhibit
coolant filter pressure drop (5CPT - 6CPT) is greater than 35 psi.
High Inlet Vacuum Active Trips will be highlighted in red while cleared Trips will have red text.

This will occur if the compressor is running loaded and the inlet vacuum is The trip history also records compressor data at the time of the trip to assist
greater than 1.8 psi. If the compressor has a high dust filter, the trip threshold in diagnostics and troubleshooting. Navigating to the trip entry and hitting
for inlet vacuum is 2.4 psi. the enter button will bring up the trip history dialog box.

Unit Too Cold To Start

This will occur if the compressor does not have the low ambient option,
the airend discharge temperature (2ATT) is less than 35 °F, and the operator
attempts to start the compressor. This fault can only occur once a day. Once

80447204 Rev B EN-17

93014.15.07

EN

Figure 19 : Trip History Dialog Page 3: Maintenance Configuration

Figure 22 : Maintenance Configuration

While the dialog box is active, press the left and right keys in order to scroll
through the displayed data. The name of the trip will always be shown in
the title bar of the dialog box. Press enter when finished viewing the data to This page allows the user to set the service interval and to reset the counter
return to the trip history screen. after the service has been performed.

 Maintenance folder  General settings folder

Page 1: Filter Status
Figure 20 : Filter Status
NOTICE

All parameters in this folder are adjustable.

Page 1: Language Selection

Figure 23 : Language Selection

This page displays the following:

• Coolant Filter Status
• Separator Element Status
• Inlet Filter Status

Page 2: Maintenance Status Language is selectable from the following 30 choices:

Figure 21 : Maintenance Status • English (default) • Korean
• Bulgarian • Latvian
• Chinese, simplified • Lithuanian
• Croatian • Maltese
• Czech • Norwegian
• Danish • Polish
• Dutch • Portuguese
• Estonian • Romanian
• Finish • Russian
• French • Slovak
• German • Slovenian
• Greek • Spanish
This page displays the time until the compressor should be serviced. • Hungarian • Swedish
• Italian • Thai
• Indonesian • Turkish

EN-18 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

The controller will display all screens in the selected language and only one Pages 4-5: Time & Date Settings
language can be selected at a time.
Figure 26 : Time & Date Settings
Each language appears in its native translation.
Page 1: Units of Measure Settings
Figure 24 : Units of Measure Settings

All items are adjustable.

The following settings are displayed in this section:
The following compressors of measure settings are displayed in this section. Table 14 : Time & Date Settings
Table 12 : Units of Measure Settings
Display Text Description
Display Text Description Hours Allows the current hour to be set. The hours format is
Temperature Selectable between °F and °C. fixed on 24-hour.
Pressure Selectable among psi, kpa, bar, kg/cm2. Minutes Allows current minutes to be set.
Power Selectable between kW and HP. Seconds Allows current seconds to be set.
Page 3: Home Page Selection Year Allows current year to be set.
Figure 25 : Home Page Selection Month Allows current month to be set.
Day Allows current day to be set.
Date Format Selectable between dd/mm/yyyy (default) and mm/dd/
yyyy.
Confirm New Used to verify that changes to selections are desired. An
Time and Date “x” must appear in the checkbox before any changes will
take affect.
The controller will continue to display any changes, even when the selections
have not been confirmed and the user exits the page, then returns. Cycling of
the power returns all selections to their current settings.

NOTICE

The controller does not support Daylight Savings Time.

Table 13 : Home Page Selection Page 6: Backlight Settings

Figure 27 : Backlight Settings
Display Text Description
Auto Return to Enables the controller to return the display back to the
Home selected Home Page if there is no user activity for the
Delay Time shown. This is only enabled when an “x”
appears in the checkbox.
Delay Time Determines how many seconds of inactivity it will take
before the controller will return to the Home Page.
Select Home Used to select the Home folder.
Folder
Select Home Used to select the Home Page within the selected Home
Page folder.

The following settings are displayed in this section:

80447204 Rev B EN-19

93014.15.07

EN

Table 15 : Backlight Settings

 Status folder
Display Text Description
Backlight Adjusts the brightness of the display. NOTICE
Brightness
All information on these pages is read only.
Enable Backlight Enables the controller to shut-off the backlight if
Auto-Off there is no user activity for the delay time shown.
Pages 1-3: Analog Inputs
Backlight Auto-Off Determines how many seconds of inactivity it will
Delay Time take before the controller will shut-off the backlight. Figure 29 : Analog Inputs

NOTICE

The backlight will be switched ON whenever any of the controller’s

keys are pressed.
The START, STOP, LOAD, UNLOAD, RESET, and ACKNOWLEDGE keys on
the controller remain functional while the backlight is switched OFF. It
is recommended to press the ENTER key or one of the navigation keys
in order to switch the backlight ON.

Pages 7-8: Ethernet Settings

Figure 28 : Ethernet Settings

The following inputs are displayed in this section:

• Package Discharge Pressure
• Sump Pressure
• Airend Discharge Temperature
• Injected Coolant Temperature
• After-cooler Discharge Temperature
• Separator Pressure Drop
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop
• Inlet Vacuum
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (integrated dryer compressors only)
• Remote Pressure (optional)
Table 16 : Ethernet Settings • Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure
Display Text Description • Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure
Enable Ethernet Allow connection by users to utilize the • Interstage Pressure (2-stage compressors only)
network enabled functionality of the controller • Evaporator
Enable DHCP Allow the controller to automatically receive an • Condenser
IP address from the Local Area Network (LAN)
Page 4: Compressor Data
IP Address Setting When DHCP is not enabled, this setpoint sets
the IP address of the controller. Figure 30 : Compressor Data
IP Address Actual This will match the IP address setting when
DHCP is not enabled. If DHCP is enabled
this will display the address assigned to the
controller by the DHCP server.
MAC Address This is the unique hardware MAC address for
the controller. This can not be changed.
Subnet Mask Setting Setpoint for the subnet mask
Subnet Mask Actual Current reading/setting for the subnet mask
Default Gateway Setting Setpoint for the default gateway.
Default Gateway Actual Current reading/setting for the default gateway.
Accept After editing the desired setpoint navigate
to the accept setting and press enter in order
for the values in the setting variables to be
confirmed by the controller.
Cancel Discard any changes made to the Ethernet The following data are displayed in this section:
settings. • Power ON Hours
• Running Hours
• Loaded Hours
• Real Time Clock

EN-20 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Pages 5-6: Digital Inputs Page 9: Analog Outputs

Figure 31 : Digital Inputs Figure 33 : Analog Outputs

The value for the analog outputs will be in mA.

A marked checkbox beside a digital input indicates that the input is in its
TRUE state. For example, Starter Feedback is TRUE when its input is in the • VSD Blower Output
high state, where as, E-Stop is TRUE when its input is at 0Vdc. • Analog Output 2
• Emergency Stop
• Main Motor Overload NOTICE
• Fan Motor Overload (RO) indicates read-only values.
• Condensate Drain Error
• Remote Stop
• Remote Start  Factory settings folder
• Remote Lead/Lag This folder is for factory and service personnel. A password must be entered
• Remote Load Enable on page one in order to adjust values in this folder. This folder is used for
setting parameters that are specific to that compressor and displaying
• Remote Load/Unload software information for the controller.
• Auxiliary Input 1 Page 1: Password
• Auxiliary Input 2 Figure 34 : Password
• Dryer High Pressure

Pages 7-8: Digital Outputs

Figure 32 : Digital Outputs

Table 17 : Password

Display Text Description

Password Provides access to enter a valid password to gain access
A marked checkbox beside a digital output indicates that it is energized. to password protected parameters. The password is
entered by scrolling down to the password value and
• Starter Contact 1 • PORO Horn pressing the RETURN key.
• Starter Contact 2 • Trip Relay Password This checkbox will indicate a valid password has been
• Fan Starter Contact • Warning Relay entered entered. If this checkbox is blank, a valid password has
not been entered or it has timed out. This is read only.
• Blowdown Solenoid • Low Voltage Output 1
Password Checking this box will enable the password time feature.
• Modulation Solenoid • Low Voltage Output 2
timeout
• Condensate Drain • Low Voltage Output 3 enable
• Dryer Run / Fan Run • Low Voltage Output 4 Password This timeout along with the password timeout enable
timeout allows the user to set an adjustable amount of time
to require a valid password to be re-entered. Once
NOTICE
this timeout is reached re-entry of a valid password is
(RO) indicates read-only values. required.

80447204 Rev B EN-21

93014.15.07

EN

Pages 2-3: Factory Settings  Folder Options (Variable Speed)

Figure 35 : Factory Settings
 Home folder
Page 1: System Overview
Figure 37 : Systems Overview

These pages are used for setting parameters that are specific to the
compressor. All of the factory settings that are adjustable are listed below.
All settings on these pages are password protected.
• Rated Pressure (psi – 100, 115, 135, 190)
• Enable Two Stage (ON/OFF) This is the factory default display after powering up the system.
• Target Pressure Setpoint is indicated in the white box and by the white
• Starter Type (Star-delta, Remote Starter, Soft Starter)
arrow, which is always centered on the gauge. This is the pressure that
• Service Level (0, 1, or 2) the compressor is trying to maintain.
• Service Time Period (1000 – 8000, in increments of 1000 hours) • Automatic Stop Setpoint is indicated in the white box and by the
• Enable Modulation (ON/OFF) white arrow, which is always right of center on the gauge. When the
compressor reaches this setpoint the compressor will unload and stop.
• Enable PAC (ON/OFF)
• Package Discharge Pressure is indicated by the large numbers centered
• Enable Dryer (ON/OFF) below the gauge and by the red arrow. This is the output pressure of the
• Running Hours (adjustable) compressor.

• Loaded Hours (adjustable) • Pressure Unit of Measure is indicated below the Package Discharge
Pressure. This is selectable from the GENERAL SETTINGS folder.
• VSD Blower (ON/OFF)
• Percent Capacity is indicated on the lower left side of the screen in
• Enable Low Ambient (ON/OFF) numeric and bar graph form. This is how much air the compressor is
producing as a percentage of its maximum capacity.
Pages 4-5: Factory Settings
• Airend Discharge Temperature is indicated by the numbers in the lower
Figure 36 : Factory Settings right of the display.
• Temperature Unit of Measure is indicated to the right of the Airend
Discharge Temperature. This is selectable from the GENERAL SETTINGS
folder.
• Run Hours indicate the number of hours the compressor has been
running.

NOTICE

The target pressure and automatic stop set points can be selected and
modified on this page. All other information on this page is read only.

Page 2: Counters
Figure 38 : Counters

These pages are used for displaying software information for the controller.
All items are read only.

EN-22 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

• Hour Meters indicate the hours that: the controller has been powered up,
and the compressor has been running.  Operator settings folder
• Starts indicate the number of times a start is attempted on the
Pages 1-2: Operator Settings
compressor.
• Date & Time is adjustable and configurable in the GENERAL SETTINGS Figure 40 : Operator Settings
folder.

NOTICE

All information on this page is read only.

Pages 3-5: Analog Inputs & Compressor Information

Figure 39 : Analog Inputs & Compressor Information

The parameters below are adjustable at any time:

Table 18 : Operator Settings

Operator Default Min. Max. Step Unit

Settings
Target Pressure 100 65 145 1 psi
Automatic Stop 110 Target+1 Target+10 1 psi
Pressure
Icon Meaning Immediate Stop 120 Auto Auto+10 1 psi
Pressure Pressure
% Savings Modulation --- --- --- ---
Temperature
Compared To
Energy Rate 0.000 0.000 9999.999 --- ---
NOTICE Reset Averaging --/--/-- - - - Date
All information on these pages is read only. Pages 3-5: Operator Options
Figure 41 : Operator Options
The following analog inputs are displayed in this section:
• Package Discharge Pressure
• Sump Pressure
• Airend Discharge Temperature
• Injected Coolant Temperature
• After-cooler Discharge Temperature
• Separator Pressure Drop
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop
• Inlet Vacuum
• Remote Pressure (optional)
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (integrated dryer compressors only)

Additionally, the following compressor status readings are included in this The parameters immediately below are only adjustable when the compressor
section: is stopped.
• Motor Speed
The options set points are similar to the operator set points except these set
• Package kW points cannot be changed while the compressor is running.
• Average Package kW/hour Table 19 : Operator Options
• Average % Capacity
Option Selection Min. Max. Step Unit Installed
• Average Capacity
Items option
• Energy Cost required?
• Energy Savings Remote ON/OFF --- --- --- --- No
Sensor
• Lifetime Energy Savings
Comm ON/OFF --- --- --- --- No
Control

80447204 Rev B EN-23

93014.15.07

EN

Option Selection Min. Max. Step Unit Installed

Items option  Events folder
required? Pages 1-42 (max.)
Remote ON/OFF --- --- --- --- No
Figure 43 : Events Folder
Start-
Stop
Enable ON/OFF --- --- --- --- Yes
PORO
PORO --- 10 600 1 Sec Yes
Time
--- Day Day 1 Day Yes
--- 00:00 23:59 1 Time Yes
--- Day Day 1 Day Yes
--- 00:00 23:59 1 Time Yes
Modbus ON/OFF/ --- --- --- --- No
Protocol ICU
Modbus --- 1 247 1 --- No
Address The pages in the Events folder document up to the last 250 events that the
controller has experienced, and time stamps each. The events are recorded
If an option has not been purchased and installed in the compressor, the in sequence, with number one being the newest and 250 being the oldest.
message “Not Installed” will be shown on the selection display screen. When a new event occurs, it becomes number one and all others are shifted
Installation of options will be done using the Ingersoll Rand service tool. up in number.
* The low ambient temperature is only adjustable if the low ambient factory The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
set point is ON. each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through six,
** A value of 0 will disable the lead/lag cycle time feature. page two displays seven through twelve, and so on.

Pages 6-7: Sensor Calibration The following actions will generate an event:
• Power ON
Figure 42 : Sensor Calibration
• Power OFF
• Press the Start Key
• Press the Stop Key
• Press the Load Key
• Press the Unload Key
• Warning
• Trip
• Start Inhibit

Active Warnings will be highlighted in amber while cleared Warnings will

Sensor calibration can only take place when the compressor is stopped.
There should be no pressure on a sensor when it is calibrated. Calibration
only needs to take place after a sensor is replaced, the controller is replaced,
or the operator suspects the sensor reading is in error. Calibrate a sensor by
selecting the checkbox beside the sensor name.
Each of the sensors listed below can be calibrated.
• Inlet Vacuum (1AVPT)
• Sump Pressure (3APT)
• Package Discharge Pressure (4APT)
• Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure (5CPT)
• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure (6CPT)
• Remote Pressure (10APT) – Only on compressors with the remote sensor
option
• Interstage Pressure (2APT) – Only on 2-stage compressors
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (7APT) – Only on compressors with
integrated dryer
Please note that if a sensor is currently reading a value that is +/- 10% of
its range from zero, the sensor will not be able to be calibrated. Please
make sure the sensor is being exposed to atmosphere before attempting
calibration.
have amber text.
Active Trips will be highlighted in red while cleared Trips will have red text.
Active Start Inhibits will be listed in the Event log, but not highlighted. The
display will indicate the compressor is not ready to start if a start inhibit is
active.
See the following lists for details about messages in each type of event.
Warning Events List
Change Inlet Filter
This will occur if the compressor has been running for at least 7 seconds, the
motor speed is equal to or greater than the minimum speed, and the inlet
vacuum is greater than 0.7 psi.
Change Coolant Filter
This will occur if the compressor has been running for at least 7 seconds, the
injected coolant temperature is at least 140 °F, the motor speed is at least
equal to the minimum speed, and the coolant filter pressure drop (5CPT
- 6CPT) is greater than 25 psi.
Sensor Failure (Units without Integrated Dryer)
Will occur whenever a sensor is recognized as missing or broken. The sensors
affected by this warning are 1ATT, 2ATT, 4ATT, and 3CTT. The sensor failure
message shall follow the following format: SENSOR FAILURE 4ATT.
Sensor Failure (Units with Integrated Dryer)
Will occur whenever a sensor is recognized as missing or broken and the
compressor has an integrated dryer (3.3.1.6). The sensors affected by this

EN-24 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
warning are 7APT, 5DTT, and 6DTT. The sensor failure message shall follow
the following format: SENSOR FAILURE 7APT.
Change Separator Element
This will occur if the compressor has been running for at least 7 seconds,
the injected coolant temperature is at least 120 °F, the package discharge
pressure is at least 65 psi, and the separator pressure drop is at least 12 psi.
If the target pressure is less than 90 psi, the warning value will increase 1 psi
per 5 psi in reduced target pressure. For example, if the target pressure is
between 89 and 85 psi, the warning value will be 13 psi.
High Airend Disch Temp
Will occur if the compressor is running and 2ATT is greater than 221 °F (97%
of 228) or the compressor is in idle mode (3.3.7.1) and 2ATT is greater than
184 °F. This warning will normally have a 5 second delay, however, if the hot
side thermal valve (3.3.1.5) is set to ON, this warning will have a 90 second
delay.
High Discharge Press
Will occur if the compressor is under the control of an external device, such
as an X-series, and the discharge pressure is greater than the immediate stop
pressure.
Auxiliary Warning 1 (2)
This will occur if the auxiliary warning input closes.
Service
Service warnings could change significantly once the predictive maintenance
warnings have been determined.
Service warnings occur when the compressor has operated a certain number
of hours, based on the total hours. Service warnings can have multiple levels,
depending on the service level selection. Selecting service level 0 disables
service warnings.
Service Level 1
If service level 1 (3.3.1.9) has been selected for the compressor, a “SERVICE
REQUIRED” warning will be issued the amount of operating hours in the
Service Time Period set point (3.3.1.10). This warning can be reset the same as
any other warning.
Service Level 2
If service level 2 has been selected for the compressor, the service complete
factory set point (3.3.1.11) will be used to clear a level 2 service warning and
reset the service time or date. The service complete can be reset before a
service warning occurs.
The first “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will occur at the total hours value of
the service time period set point (3.3.1.10). However, 100 hours before this a
“100 HOURS TO SERVICE” warning will occur. This warning can be reset the
same as any other warning. One hundred hours later, at the total hours value
of the service time period, the “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will occur. This
warning can be reset the same as any other warning, however this warning
will return in 24 hours if the service complete factory set point has not be set.
If the service complete has not been set, 100 hours later (service time period
+ 100) the “ALARM – SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be issued. This warning
can only be cleared by the service complete factory set point. Once the
service complete factory set point is set, indicating the service is completed,
the time for the next “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be calculated by
adding the service time period to the total hours value, with the “100 HOURS
TO SERVICE” warning occurring 100 hours before and the “ALARM – SERVICE
REQUIRED” warning occurring 100 hours after that time.
Condensate Drain Error
This will occur if the compressor is running, the package discharge pressure is
over 50 psi, and the condensate drain error contact closes for at least
240 seconds. This warning will be ignored for 4.5 minutes after starting.
High VSD Ambient Temperature
This warning will occur if the VSD ambient temperature gets within 5% of the
shutdown value (133 °F).
Freeze Warning
This will occur if the evaporator sensor has a value of 687 (about 0.5 °C)
or below (low temp) while the dryer is running, on compressors with the
80447204 Rev B
EN
integrated dryer. This is a dryer fault. If this happens, the compressor will
continue to run, but the dryer will stop. The condition must exist for at
least 180 seconds before the warning will occur. NOTE: If this warning is
reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist, the dryer can restart.
Also the dryer can restart if the evaporator value rises to 709 (about 5 °C).
However the warning will still be displayed.
Dryer High Pressure
On compressors with an integrated dryer, this will occur if the dryer high
pressure switch opens while the dryer is running. This is a dryer fault. If this
happens, the compressor will continue to run, but the dryer will stop. The
contact must be open for at least three seconds before the warning will
occur. If this warning is reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist,
the dryer can restart. However, this switch is a locking switch. The switch
must be reset before the dryer can run. Resetting the warning on the display
does not reset the switch.
Sensor Failure Remote
This will occur whenever the remote sensor is recognized as missing or
broken. The sensor failure message shall follow the following format:
SENSOR FAILURE REMOTE. If this warning occurs, the compressor will
automatically switch to the package discharge pressure sensor for control.
High Sump Pressure
This will occur if the compressor is running, the package discharge pressure
is at least 65 psi, and the sump pressure is more than 15 psi above the target
pressure. The occurrence of this warning will cause the controller to evaluate
the need to lower the maximum speed (see 4.11).
Condenser Temperature High
This will occur if the condenser sensor has a value of 1019 (about 65 °C)
or above (high temp) while the dryer is running, on compressors with the
integrated dryer. This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the compressor and
dryer will continue to run. The condition must exist for at least 180 seconds
before the warning will occur.
Condenser Temperature Low
This will occur if the condenser sensor has a value of 887 (about 40 °C)
or below (low temp) while the dryer is running, on compressors with the
integrated dryer. This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the compressor and
dryer will continue to run. The condition must exist for at least 180 seconds
before the warning will occur.
Change HE Filter
The HE filter is located between the after-cooler discharge and the inlet to the
dryer and is only on compressors with an integrated dryer. The drop across
the HE filter is measured by subtracting the package discharge pressure
from the after-cooler discharge pressure. If the compressor is running at a
minimum of 75% capacity, the measured drop across the HE filter is at or
above 10 psi (0.7 bar), the compressor is hot (injected coolant temp above
120 °F), and the package discharge pressure (4APT) is above 90 psi, this
warning can occur. The condition must exist for at least 3 seconds before the
warning will occur. This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the warning will
be displayed, but the dryer will continue to run.
Trip Events List
High Airend Disch Temp
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 228 °F during normal operation. This
trip will occur at 200 °F if the compressor is in idle mode.
Blower Fault
Will occur if the fault contact opens for 3 seconds on the blower VSD.
Remote Stop Failure
Will occur if the REMOTE START/STOP option is enabled, the remote stop
button remains open and either start button is pressed.
Remote Start Failure
Will occur if the compressor is started by the remote start button and the
button stays closed for 7 seconds after the compressor starts.
Sensor Failure
This will occur when a sensor is recognized as missing or broken. The sensors
affected by this trip are 4APT, 3APT, 2APT, 1AVPT, 5CPT, 6CPT, and 2ATT. The
EN-25
93014.15.07

EN

sensor should be displayed along with the sensor failure message. The Control Power Loss
sensor failure message shall follow the following format: SENSOR FAILURE
4APT. Sensor 4APT has the following additional logic. A sensor failure 4APT This will occur if the compressor should be running and the AC input voltage,
will be issued if the sump pressure is over 100 psi and the package discharge as read from the VSD, falls below 100 VAC. There is a delay of 2 seconds on
pressure (4APT) is 50 psi less than the sump pressure. this trip in case the power quickly returns. A phase monitor is something that
can cause this trip.
Emergency Stop
Stop Failure
This will occur when the EMERGENCY STOP button is engaged.
This will occur if the compressor should be stopped, but the motor speed has
VSD Fault not dropped below the minimum motor speed set point. The controller will
wait 4 seconds for the compressor to stop before issuing this trip.
For R30-37 kW, the VSD fault is read from drive, controller only shows VSD
FAULT. Once fault is eliminated from drive, VSD fault can be cleared by High Interstage Pressure
pressing the reset button and machine can be restarted.
This will occur if the compressor is running, is a two stage compressor, and
For R37e-160 kW, the VSD fault is read from the drive. The controller will read the interstage pressure is above 75 psi.
the status menu of the variable speed drive. If a fault condition is returned in
the status information, the controller will issue a VSD FAULT trip and display High Coolant Filter Pressure Drop
the number of the fault condition. VSD faults 39 – 42 and 44 cannot be This will occur if the compressor has been running for at least seven seconds,
cleared by pressing the reset button. All other VSD faults can be cleared by the injected coolant temperature is at least 140 °F, already has a change
pressing the reset button. The only way to clear a VSD fault 39 – 42 or 44 is by coolant filter warning, the motor speed is at least equal to the minimum
cycling the power on the compressor. Cycling the power causes the VSD to speed, and the coolant filter pressure drop (5CPT - 6CPT) is greater than
execute a power module test. The power module test must be passed before 35 psi.
the compressor can be restarted after a VSD fault 39 – 42 or 44. VSD faults
39, 40, and 41 (IGBT failures) have additional logic associated with them. High Inlet Vacuum
Due to false trips the logic was modified to allow an automatic restart. If the This will occur if the compressor is running loaded, the motor speed is at least
VSD fault 39, 40, or 41 occurs, the controller will trip and display the fault minimum speed, and the inlet vacuum is greater than 1.8 psi (vacuum).
message. After two minutes, the controller will issue a command to the VSD
to run the power module test. While the VSD is running the power module High Sump Pressure
test, the controller will force itself into a reset. Upon completing the reset,
This will occur if the compressor is running and any one of the three
the controller will monitor the VSD for completion of the power module test.
following conditions exist: (1) The sump pressure is above the target pressure
If the power module test is completed and all conditions have passed, the
by 25 psi. (2) The separator pressure drop is measured to be more than 25 psi
controller will automatically restart the compressor. If the power module
and the package discharge pressure is at least 65 psi. (3) The sump pressure is
test is failed, the controller will show the power module test failure message
above 168 psi.
and the failure code. The controller will not allow more than five automatic
restarts of VSD Fault 39 – 41 within a 24 hour period. The controller will also Start Inhibit List
not allow two automatic restarts of VSD Fault 39 – 41 within a 10 minute
period. If a VSD Fault 39 – 41 occurs and violates the time periods, the High Airend Discharge Temperature
controller will not issue a power module test and restart. It will display the This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 95% of 228 °F.
fault and not allow a reset from the controller. The operator must cycle
power. Another exception on all drives are VSD faults 10, 12 – 14, and 16. If High Sump Pressure
the compressor trips due to one of these faults, instead of shutting down
This will occur if the sump pressure (3APT) is 25 psi or higher than the rated
on the VSD fault, the controller will reset and then restart the compressor.
pressure of the compressor.
If the compressor is equipped with a power outage restart option (PORO),
the controller will execute a PORO restart. If the compressor does not Waiting for VSD Comms
have PORO, the controller will restart the compressor 10 seconds after the
controller has reset. A compressor will be allowed to do this up to five times This will occur if the compressor VSD has not responded to the initial
in a one hour period. If the compressor exceeds five occurrences within a one communications from the controller.
hour period, the sixth occurrence will be treated like a regular VSD fault.
Low Sump Pressure  Trip history
This will occur if the compressor is operating and the sump pressure drops Pages 1-4 (max.)
below 13 psi for 15 seconds.
Figure 44 : Trip History
Check Motor Rotation
This will occur if the controller reads a negative speed from the VSD when
starting.
VSD Communication Failure
This will occur if the controller does not receive a response from the VSD
when requesting information. This trip will take about 8 seconds to occur.
VSD Initialization Fault
This will occur if the controller is unable to establish communications with
the VSD after a power up.
Replace Coolant Filter
This will occur if the idle mode is set to on. This trip is used as a reminder
to Ingersoll Rand service to only use idle mode if a new coolant filter is
installed.
The pages in the Trip History folder document up to the last 15 trips that the
Incorrect VSD Type controller has experienced, and time stamps each. The trips are recorded in
sequence, with number one being the newest and 15 being the oldest. When
This will occur at power up if the VSD type does not match the size of a new trip occurs, it becomes number one and all others are shifted up in
compressor. The controller will determine this by comparing the compressor number.
type with the drive ID board.
The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through five,

EN-26 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

page two displays six through ten, and so on. Page 2: Maintenance Status
The following actions will generate an event: Figure 47 : Maintenance Status
• Power ON
• Power OFF
• Press the Start Key
• Press the Stop Key
• Press the Load Key
• Press the Unload Key
• Warning
• Trip
• Start Inhibit

Active Trips will be highlighted in red while cleared Trips will have red text.
The trip history also records compressor data at the time of the trip to assist
in diagnostics and troubleshooting. Navigating to the trip entry and pressing This page displays the time until the compressor should be serviced.
the enter button will activate the trip history dialog box.
Page 3: Maintenance Configuration
Figure 45 : Trip History Dialog
Figure 48 : Maintenance Configuration

While the dialog box is active, press the left and right keys to scroll through
the displayed data. The name of the trip will always be shown in the title bar This page allows the user to set the service interval and to reset the counter
of the dialog box. Press enter when finished viewing the data to return to the after the service has been performed.
trip history screen.

 General settings folder

 Maintenance folder
Page 1: Filter Status NOTICE
Figure 46 : Filter Status
All parameters in this folder are adjustable.

Page 1: Language Selection

Figure 49 : Language Selection

This page displays the following:

• Coolant Filter Status
• Separator Element Status
• Inlet Filter Status

80447204 Rev B EN-27

93014.15.07

EN

Language is selectable from the following 30 choices: The following settings are displayed in this section:
Table 21 : Home Page Selection
• English (default) • Korean
• Bulgarian • Latvian Display Text Description
• Chinese, simplified • Lithuanian Auto Return to Home Enables the controller to return the display back to
• Croatian • Maltese the selected Home Page if there is no user activity
for the Delay Time shown. This is only enabled
• Czech • Norwegian when an “x” appears in the checkbox.
• Danish • Polish Delay Time Determines how many seconds of inactivity it will
• Dutch • Portuguese take before the controller will return to the Home
Page.
• Estonian • Romanian
Select Home Folder Used to select the Home folder.
• Finish • Russian
Select Home Page Used to select the Home Page within the selected
• French • Slovak
Home folder.
• German • Slovenian
Page 4-5: Time & Date Settings
• Greek • Spanish
Figure 52 : Time & Date Settings
• Hungarian • Swedish
• Italian • Thai
• Indonesian • Turkish
The controller will display all screens in the selected language and only one
language can be selected at a time.
Each language appears in its native translation.
Page 1: Units of Measure Settings
Figure 50 : Units of Measure Settings

All items are adjustable.

The following settings are displayed in this section:
Table 22 : Time & Date Settings

Display Text Description

Hours Allows the current hour to be set. The hours format is
fixed on 24-hour.
Minutes Allows current minutes to be set.

The following compressors of measure settings are displayed in this section: Seconds Allows current seconds to be set.
Year Allows current year to be set.
Table 20 : Units of Measure Settings
Month Allows current month to be set.
Display Text Description Day Allows current day to be set.
Temperature Selectable between ºF and ºC. Date Format Selectable between dd/mm/yyyy (default) and mm/
Pressure Selectable among psi, kpa, bar, kg/cm2. dd/yyyy.

Power Selectable between kW and HP. Confirm New Used to verify that changes to selections are desired.
Time and Date An “x” must appear in the checkbox before any changes
Page 3: Home Page Selection will take effect.
Figure 51 : Home Page Selection The controller will continue to display any changes, even when the selections
have not been confirmed and the user exits the page, then returns. Cycling of
the power returns all selections to their current settings.

NOTICE

The controller does not support Daylight Savings Time.

EN-28 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Page 6 : Backlight Settings

Display Text Description
Figure 53 : Backlight Settings IP Address Actual This will match the IP address setting when DHCP
is not enabled. If DHCP is enabled this will display
the address assigned to the controller by the
DHCP server.
MAC Address This is the unique hardware MAC address for the
controller. This can not be changed.
Subnet Mask Setting Setpoint for the subnet mask.
Subnet Mask Actual Current reading/setting for the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Setpoint for the default gateway.
Setting
Default Gateway Current reading/setting for the default gateway.
Actual
Accept After editing the desired setpoint navigate to the
accept setting and press enter in order for the
The following settings are displayed in this section: values in the setting variables to be confirmed by
the controller.
Table 23 : Backlight Settings
Cancel Discard any changes made to the Ethernet
settings.
Display Text Description
Backlight Adjusts the brightness of the display.
 Status folder
Brightness
Enable Backlight Enables the controller to shut-off the backlight if
Auto-Off there is no user activity for the delay time shown. NOTICE
Backlight Auto-Off Determines how many seconds of inactivity it will All information on these pages is read only.
Delay Time take before the controller will shut-off the backlight.
Pages 1 -2: Analog Inputs
NOTICE Figure 55 : Analog Inputs

The backlight will be switched ON whenever any of the controller’s

keys are pressed.
The START, STOP, LOAD, UNLOAD, RESET, and ACKNOWLEDGE keys on
the controller remain functional while the backlight is switched OFF. It
is recommended to press the ENTER key or one of the navigation keys
in order to switch the backlight ON.

Pages 7-8: Ethernet Settings

Figure 54 : Ethernet Settings

The following inputs are displayed in this section:

The following settings are displayed in this section:
Table 24 : Ethernet Settings
Display Text Description
Enable Ethernet Allow connection by users to utilize the network
enabled functionality of the controller.
Enable DHCP Allow the controller to automatically receive an IP
address from the Local Area Network (LAN).
IP Address Setting When DHCP is not enabled, this setpoint sets the
IP address of the controller.
• Package Discharge Pressure
• Sump Pressure
• Airend Discharge Temperature
• Injected Coolant Temperature
• After-cooler Discharge Temperature
• Separator Pressure Drop
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop
• Inlet Vacuum
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (integrated dryer compressors only)
• Remote Pressure (optional)
• Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure
• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure
• Interstage Pressure (2-stage compressors only)
• Evaporator
• Condenser

80447204 Rev B EN-29

93014.15.07

EN

Page 4: Compressor Data The following are displayed in this section:

Figure 56 : Compressor Data • Emergency Stop
• Main Motor Overload
• Fan Motor Overload
• Condensate Drain Error
• Remote Stop
• Remote Start
• Remote Lead/Lag
• Remote Load Enable
• Remote Load/Unload
• Auxiliary Input 1
• Auxiliary Input 2
• Dryer High Pressure

The following are displayed in this section: Pages 9-10: Digital Outputs
• % Energy Savings Figure 58 : Digital Outputs
• % Capacity
• Package Power
• Power ON Hours
• Running Hours
• Motor Speed
• Time
• Motor Current
• Motor Voltage
• AC Input Voltage
• DC Bus Voltage
• IGBT U Temperature
• IGBT V Temperature A marked checkbox beside a digital output indicates that it is energized.
• IGBT W Temperature • Starter Contact 1
• Input Rectifier Temperature • Starter Contact 2
• VSD Ambient Temperature • Fan Starter Contact
• Remote Maximum Speed • Blowdown Solenoid
• Remote Maximum Pressure • Modulation Solenoid
• Target Pressure • Condensate Drain
Pages 7-8: Digital Inputs • Dryer Run / Fan Run

Figure 57 : Digital Inputs • PORO Horn

• Trip Relay
• Warning Relay
• Low Voltage Output 1
• Low Voltage Output 2
• Low Voltage Output 3
• Low Voltage Output 4

NOTICE

(RO) indicates read-only values.

A marked checkbox beside a digital input indicates that the input is in its
TRUE state. For example, Starter Feedback is TRUE when its input is in the
high state, where as, E-Stop is TRUE when its input is at 0Vdc.

EN-30 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Page 11: Analog Outputs Pages 2-3: Factory Settings

Figure 59 : Analog Outputs Figure 61 : Factory Settings

The value for the analog outputs will be in mA.

These pages are used for setting parameters that are specific to the
• VSD Blower Output compressor. All of the factory settings that are adjustable are listed below.
• Analog Output 2 All settings on these pages are password protected.
Compressor Type will be selected here. The choices are listed below:
 Factory settings folder • 37 kW/50 hp 1-S (46, 47) (38, 39)
• 45 kW/60 hp 1-S (47) (39)
This folder is for Ingersoll Rand factory and service personnel. A password
must be entered on page one in order to adjust values in this folder. This • 55 kW/75 hp 1-S (48, 49) (40, 41)
folder is used for setting parameters that are specific to that compressor and
• 75 kW/100 hp 1-S (49) (41)
displaying software information for the controller.
• 90 kW 1-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
Page 1: Password
• 125 hp 1-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
Figure 60 : Password
• 110 kW 1-S (51) (43)
• 150 hp 1-S (51) (43)
• 132 kW 1-S (52, 53) (44, 45)
• 200 hp 1-S (53) (45)
• 160 kW 1-S (53) (45)
• 90 kW 2-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
• 125 hp 2-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
• 110 kW 2-S (51) (43)
• 150 hp 2-S (51) (43)
• 132 kW 2-S (52, 53) (44, 45)
• 200 hp 2-S (53) (45)
• 160 kW 2-S (53) (45)
Table 25 : Password
Water Cooled (ON/OFF)
Password: Provides access to enter a valid password to gain access to
password protected parameters. The password is entered Hot Side Thermal Valve (ON/OFF)
by scrolling down to the password value and pressing the Enable PAC (ON/OFF)
return key.
Enable Dryer (ON/OFF)
Password This checkbox will indicate a valid password has been
Entered: entered. If this checkbox is blank, a valid password has not Constant Running Dryer (ON/OFF)
been entered or it has timed out. This is read only.
Running Hours (adjustable)
Password Checking this box will enable the password time feature.
Loaded Hours (adjustable)
Timeout
Enable:
Timeout This timeout along with the password timeout enable allows
Delay: the user to set an adjustable amount of time to require
a valid password to be re-entered. Once this timeout is
reached re-entry of a valid password is required.

80447204 Rev B EN-31

93014.15.07

EN

Pages 4-5: Software Information Pages 13 -16: VSD Service Menus

Figure 62 : Software Information Figure 65 : VSD Service Menus

These pages are used for displaying software information for the controller. The VSD service menus contain parameters used to set up the compressor for
All items are read only. optimal operation.
Pages 6-10: Maximum Values
NOTICE
Figure 63 : Maximum Values
These screens must only be used by authorized service technicians.
The password must be entered in order to modify these parameters.

The maximum values pages are used to record the highest value the
controller has seen since the last time the maximum values have been reset.
Each maximum value entry displays the highest value recorded as well as the
time and date stamp of when these maximum values have occurred.
The final maximum value page has a reset setting at the bottom of the page,
highlighting this button and hitting enter will cause the controller to clear all
history of maximum values and begin recording them again. The password
must be entered in order to use this reset functionality.
Pages 11-12: VSD Diagnostics
Figure 64 : VSD Diagnostics

The VSD Diagnostics screens are used to troubleshoot any drive problems.

NOTICE

These screens must only be used by authorized service technicians.

The password must be entered in order to activate these diagnostic
tests.

EN-32 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (XE-70M CONTROLLER)

 User Interface Icon Name Function
The standard user interface configuration of the controller consists of the Enter Toggles the display between the Navigation mode
membrane and the LCD display. The membrane consists of five command and the Edit mode.
keys (Start, Stop, Load, Unload, and Reset), four navigation keys (Up, Right,
Left and Down), and an Edit mode selection key (Enter). These keys, in
conjunction with the graphics display and the LED icons, make up the user
interface to the compressor.
NOTICE
Figure 66: Xe-70M
The Load and Unload keys are not used on the variable speed
compressors.

 Navigation Keys
There are four navigation keys (UP, RIGHT, DOWN and LEFT). While the ENTER
key is not considered a navigation key, it is used in conjunction with the
navigation keys to make or confirm a selection.
Figure 67 : Navigation Keys

 Led Status Icons

Three LED icons are used to indicate the current status of the control system
from a distance and are located on the upper left side of the user interface.

Table 26: Xe-70M LED Status Icons

Icon Name Function
OK Illuminates when no Warnings or Trips are sensed.
Can be in a Ready or Not Ready state. This icon will
flash when the machine is Running Unloaded.
Alert Illuminates when a Warning (flashes) or Trip
(constant ON) is sensed. Can be in a Ready
(Warning) or Tripped state.
Auto Illuminates when the compressor stops in auto
restart.
 Command Keys
These keys command the controller to perform actions as specified in the
following table. When any of these keys are pressed the action below will be
initiated and logged in the event log.
The navigation keys roll over. Pressing one of the navigation keys will lead
the user down a navigation path. Each time the key is pressed, another step
in the path is taken. Once the end of a navigation path is reached, pressing
the key one more time will bring the user back to the beginning of the path.
Pressing the opposite key will move the user through the navigation path in
the opposite direction. Once the beginning is reached, pressing the opposite
key will take the user to the end of the path.
 Display layout
Figure 68 : Display Layout
A
B
C

Table 27: Xe-70M Command Keys

Icon Name Function

Load Puts the compressor into the selected mode of D
operation. Unit will load if the pressure conditions
are right. Table 28 : Display Layout
Key Name Description
Unload Puts the compressor into an unloaded state. Unit
A Folder Bar Uses tabs to graphically identify each folder.
will run unloaded indefinitely.
B Title Bar Identifies current folder and page (underlined).
C Page Content Content of the current page.
Reset Clears Warnings and Trips once the fault condition D Dashboard Displays system status.
is corrected.

Start Starts the compressor.

Stop Stops the compressor. This button should be

pressed instead of the Emergency Stop for normal
stopping operation.

80447204 Rev B EN-33

93014.15.07

EN

 Folder navigation and icons Figure 69 : Numeric Entry Window

To move among the tabbed folders shown on the LCD display, press the
RIGHT and LEFT keys. The navigation rolls over from the last to the first folder
and vice-versa.
Table 29 : Folder Bar Icons

Folder Icon Description

Name
Home System performance and status main
information. The first page of this folder is the NOTICE
default page when the controller first powers up.
Not all pages have adjustable parameters. Some just have read-only
Operator System options and configuration settings. information.
Settings
Events System events log.  Dashboard icons
The dashboard is intended to be a quick at-a-glance view of system status.
Trip History Details on the most recent trips. The following table lists standard dashboard icons and their definition.
Note that the color of these icons changes based on the state set by the
application while running.
Maintenance Status and notification setup for compressor
maintenance items. Table 31 : Dashboard Icons

General General settings such as Language, Time, and

Name Icon Description
Settings Units of Measure.
Remote Remote control is enabled. This can be Remote
Integral Integral Sequencing communication status and Control Start/Stop, COM Control, Integral Sequencing or
Sequencing configuration. Web Control.
Status Measurements or status from/of all analog and Service A service reminder is nearing or has expired
digital I/O. Required (i.e.: an air or oil filter needs to be changed).
Factory Compressor tuning parameters. Also displays Unloaded Compressor is in the unloaded state.
Settings hardware and software versions. or
Loaded Compressor is in the loaded state.
 Page navigation
Once the desired folder is selected, press the DOWN key to move to the page
selection area and then use the RIGHT and LEFT keys to select the desired  Dashboard Status Messages
page. Use the UP key to get back to the folder tabs. The dashboard also displays the current operating state of the compressor.
Table 30 : Title Bar Page Icons The following states can be encountered during machine operation:
• Ready to Start – The compressor currently has no trip or start inhibit
Icon Description conditions present. The machine can be started by pressing the start
button at any time.
Start of the page selection area.
• Starting – A start command has been given to the compressor and the
start sequence is being performed. The time period for this state can vary
Indicates that there are more pages available by navigating depending on the starter type of the machine.
right.
• Load Delay – The compressor is waiting for a small period of time after
Indicates that there are more pages available by navigating starting before allowing the machine to load. This ensures the machine is
left. at operating conditions before loading.

 Accessing parameters
After the desired page is selected, the page’s parameters can be selected by
using the DOWN key. The cursor will move to the next parameter each time
the DOWN key is pressed. Use the UP key to go back to the previous one.
The cursor rolls over, so once the last parameter is selected, pressing the
DOWN key will navigate the cursor to the Folder Bar. If the first parameter is
selected, pressing the UP key will move the cursor to the page selection area.
Once selected, access parameters by pressing the ENTER key. Make changes
using the NAVIGATION keys and then enter the setting by pressing the ENTER
key again. After a parameter is accessed, pressing the ENTER key will enter
the current setting into the control program and navigate the cursor back to
the selected parameter on the page.
When the cursor is on a parameter that has an enabled/disabled box,
pressing the ENTER key will cause the setting to toggle.
This icon appears on numeric entry windows (see Figure 69). Placing the
cursor on it and then pressing the ENTER key will cancel the entry and any
changes that were made.
• Running Loaded – The compressor is operating and producing air. The
inlet valve is open and the blow-off valve is closed.
• Running Unloaded – The compressor is operating, but not producing air.
The inlet valve is closed and the blow-off valve is open.
• Reload Delay – This is a brief period of time after the compressor has
unloaded before it is allowed to load again. This gives the inlet and bypass
valves time to reach their proper positions.
• Auto-Restart – The compressor has stopped due to pressure rising above
the offline or auto-stop setpoints and auto-restart being enabled. The
compressor will automatically restart when pressure falls to the online or
target pressure setpoint.
• Stopping – The compressor has received a stop command and the stop
sequence is being performed.
• Blowdown – The compressor must wait for a brief period of time after
stopping its motor before it is allowed to start again. The compressor will
restart at the end of the blowdown period if a start command is recieved
during blowdown.
• Not Ready – The compressor has detected a condition that will not allow
the compressor to start. The condition must be cleared before a start is
allowed, but does not need to be acknowledged.
• Tripped – The compressor has detected an abnormal operational
condition that has stopped the machine. A trip must be acknowledged by
hitting the reset button before the compressor can start.
• Processor Init – The controller is being initialized.

EN-34 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

 Fixed Speed Compressor Pages 3 & 4 – Analog Inputs and Compressor Information
Figure 72 : Analog Inputs and Compressor Information
 Home folder
Page 1: System Overview
Figure 70 : Home Folder

This is the factory default display after powering up the system.

• Online Pressure Setpoint - indicated in the black box and arrow, which
is always left of center on the gauge. The compressor will load when
package discharge pressure falls below this value.
• Offline Pressure Setpoint - indicated in the black box and arrow, which
is always right of center on the gauge. The compressor will unload when
package discharge pressure rises above this value.
Any sensor that is not installed or is reporting a failure will show a [ - - ]
• Package Discharge Pressure - indicated by the large numbers centered symbol.
below the gauge and by the black arrow below the gauge. This is the air
pressure that the compressor is supplying to the plant. NOTICE
• Pressure Unit of Measure - indicated below the Package Discharge
Pressure. This is selectable from the GENERAL SETTINGS folder. All information on this page is read only.

• Airend Discharge Temperature - indicated by the numbers in the lower

right of the display. This is the temperature of the air/oil mixture at the
discharge of the compression module.
• Temperature Unit of Measure - indicated to the right of the Airend
Discharge Temperature. This is selectable from the GENERAL SETTINGS
folder.
• Run Hours – indicated by the numbers in the lower left of the display. The
number of hours the compressor motor has been running.
NOTICE
The online and offline set points can be selected and modified on this
page. All other information on this page is read only.
The following analog inputs are displayed in this section.
• Package Discharge Pressure – The pressure the compressor is delivering
to the plant.
• Sump Pressure – The compressor’s internal pressure at the sump tank.
• Airend Discharge Temperature – The temperature of the air/oil mixture
at the discharge of the compression module.
• After-cooler Discharge Temperature – The temperature of the air after
passing through the after-cooler. Note – Only shown when the Low
Ambient option is purchased and installed.
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure – Pressure the compressor is delivering
before the dryer. Note – Only shown when the TAS option is purchased
and installed.

Page 2 : Counters • Separator Pressure Drop – The pressure drop across the separator
element.
Figure 71 : Counters
• Dryer Run Status (Integrated dryer units only) – Checkbox that shows
whether the dryer is currently running (checked) or not (blank).
• Time and Date
• Main Motor Current – Current flowing through the main motor as
measured by the installed current transducers.

• Hour Meters - Indicates the hours that: the controller has been powered
up, the compressor motor has been running, and the compressor has
running loaded.
• Starts - Indicates the number of times a start is attempted on the
compressor.
• Date & Time – Indicates the current date and time. This is adjustable and
configurable in the GENERAL SETTINGS folder.

NOTICE

All information on this page is read only.

80447204 Rev B EN-35

93014.15.07

EN

to operating speed after a start command before being able to produce air.
 Operator Settings folder Range (in seconds): 5 - 30

Pages 1-2: Operator Settings The parameters on these pages are adjustable any time.

Figure 73 : Operator Settings *Note that Mode of Operation can only be adjusted if the modulation option
has been purchased for the compressor and the Enable Modulation factory
setpoint has been turned ON.
Pages 3-6: Operator Options
Figure 74 : Operator Options

The below values are all setpoints

Online Pressure – The compressor will load when the package discharge
pressure falls below this value.
Range (in PSI): 65 to Offline Pressure - 10
Offline Pressure – The compressor will unload when package discharge
pressure rises above this value.
Range (in PSI): 75 to Rated Pressure + 10. Please note that the range will be
reduced by 7 psi when operating a TAS machine.
Lead/Lag – When this box is checked the compressor is operating as a lead
machine. Unchecking the box causes the machine to run as a lag machine.
Lag Offset – If the machine is running as a lag compressor, the lag offset will
be subtracted from the online and offline setpoints.
Range (in PSI): 0 – 45, depending on the online and offline setpoints. The Lag
Offset will never allow you to exceed the minimum or maximum values of the
online and offline setpoints.
The below values are all setpoints
Mode of Operation – Selections are Online/Offline, Modulation/ACS, and
Modulation only – determines how the compressor will try to maintain a Enable Auto-Restart – Enabling this will allow the compressor to stop if it
specific pressure. has been running unloaded for a period of time, and the motor has exceeded
its minimum running time (10 minute in most cases).
• Online/Offline – The compressor will load the machine by energizing a
solenoid that opens the inlet valve and closes the blowdown valve when Auto-Restart Time – The time period the compressor must run unloaded
package discharge pressure falls below the online pressure setpoint. The before stopping in auto-restart. This time period begins the moment that
compressor will unload the machine by de-energizing the solenoid when package discharge pressure rises above the offline setpoint. Both this time
pressure rises above the offline pressure setpoint. period and the minimum motor run timer (10 minutes) must be satisfied
before the compressor will stop in auto restart.
• Modulation – The compressor will still load and unload as in online/
Range (in seconds) 2 - 60
offline, but will energize a different solenoid valve for modulation.
When the package discharge pressure is between the online and offline Auto-Restart Delay – The time period after the package discharge pressure
setpoints the compressor will adjust the inlet valve in order to achieve has fallen below the online setpoint before the compressor can automatically
a stable output pressure. The output pressure target needs to be set by restart.
a technician at the inlet valve in order to provide effective modulation Range (in seconds): 0 - 60
control. Modulation can only work when the package discharge pressure
is above 60 psi. Modulation is an option and must be enabled in the COM Control – Enabling this setpoint allows the compressor to be controlled
factory settings tab. by a serial or Ethernet device, such as an X8I. This is equivalent to the
“Sequencer” option on older Intellisys controllers.
• Mod/ACS – The compressor will initially start out in online offline mode.
If the compressor goes through 3 load/unload cycles within 3 minutes, it Remote Start/Stop – Enabling this setpoint allows the compressor to be
will switch over into Modulation mode. It will remain in modulation until started and stopped using the digital inputs on the controller.
the stop button is pressed or 3 minutes pass between an unload and load Enable PORO – Enabling this setpoint will allow the compressor to
command. Mod/ACS is an option and must be enabled in the factory automatically restart after a power outage has been restored if the
settings tab. compressor was running loaded at the time of the outage. PORO is an option
Unloaded Stop Time – Time period that the machine must run unloaded which must be purchased and installed before this feature can be turned ON.
before the motor is allowed to stop after a stop command is received. PORO Time – Time after the controller power has been restored and
Range (in seconds): 10 - 30 controller has finished booting before the compressor will perform a PORO
Starter Time – Time period that the compressor needs in order to come up start. During this time the PORO Horn will sound.
Range (in seconds): 10 - 600

EN-36 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Low Ambient Temp – Temperature below which the low ambient option will
come into effect.  Events folder
Range (in deg F): 30 - 60
Pages 1 to a Max of 50
Scheduled Start Day – Day (or days) of the week for which a scheduled start
will be performed. The compressor will start when its onboard clock matches Figure 76 : Events folder
the day, hour, and minute of the scheduled start setpoints. Scheduled Start/
Stop is an option which must be purchased and installed before this feature
can be turned ON.
Scheduled Start Hour – Hour of the day for which a scheduled start will be
performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be purchased and
installed before this feature can be turned ON.
Scheduled Start Minute – Minute of the hour for which a scheduled
start will be performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be
purchased and installed before this feature can be turned ON.
The pages in the Events folder document up to the last 250 events that the
Scheduled Stop Day – Day (or days) of the week for which a scheduled stop controller has experienced, with the time and date of the occurrence. The
will be performed. The compressor will stop when its onboard clock matches events are recorded in sequence, with number one being the newest and 250
the day, hour, and minute of the scheduled stop setpoints. Scheduled Start/ being the oldest. When a new event occurs, it becomes number one and all
Stop is an option which must be purchased and installed before this feature others are shifted up in number.
can be turned ON.
The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
Scheduled Stop Hour – Hour of the day for which a scheduled stop will be each page displaying up to five. Page one displays events one through five,
performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be purchased and page two displays six through ten, and so on.
installed before this feature can be turned ON.
The time and date of the event can be viewed by navigating to an event and
Scheduled Stop Minute – Minute of the hour for which a scheduled stop will pressing the right arrow navigation key. The time and date window can then
be performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be purchased be exited by pressing the enter key.
and installed before this feature can be turned ON.
Figure 77 : Events folder
Note that in order to disable Scheduled Start/Stop, the Scheduled Start and
Stop days, hours, and minutes must match exactly.
* The low ambient temperature is only adjustable if the low ambient factory
set point is ON.
** A value of 0 will disable the lead/lag cycle time feature.
Page 7 Calibrate Sensors
Figure 75 : Calibrate Sensors

The following items will generate an event.

• Power ON
• Power OFF
• Press the Start Key
• Press the Stop Key
• Press the Load Key
• Press the Unload Key
• Starting the compressor remotely
Sensor calibration can only take place when the machine is stopped and
there is no pressure on the sensor. Calibration only needs to take place after • Stopping the compressor remotely
a sensor is replaced, the controller is replaced, the controller software is
• Loading the compressor remotely
upgraded, or the operator suspects the sensor reading is in error. Calibrate
a sensor by selecting the checkbox beside the sensor name. Note that the • Unloading the compressor remotely
checkbox may appear too quickly to be visible. Calibration can be confirmed
• Warning
by verifying that the sensor value now reads zero.
• Trip
Each of the sensors listed below can be calibrated.
• Start Inhibit
• Sump Pressure (3APT) – Only on units with the Enable 3APT factory
setpoint ON. The R4 – 11 units typically do not have 3APT installed Active Warnings will show a flashing caution icon while acknowledged
• Package Discharge Pressure (4APT) Warnings will a solid icon.

• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (7APT) – Only on units with integrated Active Trips will show a flashing trip icon while acknowledged Trips will
dryer have a solid icon.
Note that if a sensor is currently reading a value that is +/- 10% of its range Active Start Inhibits will be listed in the Event log, but not have an icon
from zero, the sensor will not be able to be calibrated and an warning present. The display will indicate the compressor is not ready to start if a start
will be logged in the event log. Make sure the sensor is being exposed to inhibit is active.
atmosphere before attempting calibration.

80447204 Rev B EN-37

93014.15.07
EN
Warning Events List
Sensor Failure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: 7ATT Failure
This will occur whenever sensor 7ATT is recognized as missing or broken. The
sensor failure message shall follow the following format: 7ATT FAILURE. The
7ATT sensor failure will be shown only when the integrated dryer is installed
(accessed in the factory settings menu). This condition must exist for 3
seconds before the warning is issued.
Change Separator Element
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Chg Sep Elem
Will occur if the unit is loaded, the package discharge pressure (4APT) is
at least 90 psi and the separator pressure drop is greater than 12 psi. This
condition must exist for 3 seconds before the warning is issued.
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur
High Airend Discharge Temperature
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High A/E Disch T
Will occur if the unit is running and 2ATT is greater than 221 deg F (97% of
228) and the unit is running. This condition must exist for 3 seconds before
the warning is issued.
High Sump Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Sump Pres
If the unit is running loaded, has been loaded for at least 8 seconds and
the sump pressure is more than 25 psi above the rated pressure for the
compressor. If this warning occurs, the online and offline pressures will be
reduced. For example, a rated pressure of 100 psi would have a maximum
offline pressure of 110 psi. This warning would occur if the sump pressure
goes above 125 psi in this example. This condition must exist for 3 seconds
before the warning is issued.
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur.
Service
Service warnings occur when the unit has operated a certain number of
hours, based on the total hours. Service warnings can have multiple levels,
depending on the service level selection. A service level selection of 0
disables service warnings.
Service Level 1
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: SVC Required
If service level 1 has been selected for the unit, a “SERVICE REQUIRED”
warning will be issued on hour intervals equal to the service time period set
point. This warning can be reset the same as any other warning.
Service Level 2
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: 100 hours to SVC, SVC Required, Service Alarm
If service level 2 has been selected for the unit, the service complete factory
set point will be used to clear a level 2 service warning and reset the service
time or date. The service complete can be reset before a service warning
occurs.
The initial “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will occur at total hour intervals
equal to the service time period set point. However, 100 hours before this a
“100 HOURS TO SERVICE” warning will occur. This warning can be reset the
same as any other warning. One hundred hours later the “SERVICE REQUIRED”
warning will occur. This warning can be reset the same as any other warning,
however this warning will return in 24 hours if the service complete factory
set point has not be set. If the service complete has not been set, 100 hours
later, the “ALARM – SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be issued. This warning
can only be cleared by the service complete factory set point. Once the
service complete factory set point is set, indicating the service is completed,
the time for the next “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be calculated by
adding the service time period to the total hours value, with the “100 HOURS
TO SERVICE” warning occurring 100 hours before and the “ALARM – SERVICE
REQUIRED” warning occurring 100 hours after that time.
EN-38
High Discharge Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Disch Pres
Will occur if the unit is using a remote sensor or is under the control of an
external device, such as an X8I, is loaded, and the discharge pressure (4APT)
is greater than the maximum offline pressure. This condition must exist for 3
seconds before the warning is issued. If this condition occurs, the compressor
will automatically unload. The unit will be available to reload once the
discharge pressure falls to the rated pressure value.
Dryer Temp Warning
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Dryer Temp
For R30 – 37 kW compressors this will occur if the dryer condenser or
evaporator temperature switches close. The condenser switch is locking
and must be manually reset before performing a reset on the controller.
The evaporator switch does not latch and can be reset as soon as the signal
opens. If this warning is reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist,
the dryer can restart.
Note that for R4 – 11 kW compressors equipped with a TAS dryer, the dryer
temp warning is triggered when the dewpoint temperature exceeds 14.5
deg C for 6 minutes or longer. This warning can also be triggered if the
temperature probe in the dryer fails.
Dryer High Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Dryer High Pres
On units with the integrated dryer, this will occur if the dryer high pressure
switch opens while the dryer is running. This is a dryer fault. If this happens,
the compressor will continue to run, but the dryer will stop. The contact
must be open for at least 3 seconds before the warning will occur. However,
this switch is a locking switch. The dryer high pressure switch must be reset
(contact closed) before this warning can be reset. If this warning is reset while
the conditions for running the dryer exist, the dryer can restart.
Change HE Filter
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Change HE Filt
The HE filter is located between the after-cooler discharge and the inlet
to the dryer and is only on units with an integrated dryer. The drop across
the HE filter is measured by subtracting the package discharge pressure
from the after-cooler discharge pressure. If the compressor is running, the
measured drop across the HE filter is at or above 14 psi (0.7 bar) and the
package discharge pressure (4APT) is above 90 psi, this warning can occur.
The condition must exist for at least 3 seconds before the warning will occur.
This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the warning will be displayed, but the
dryer will continue to run.
Note that the Enable 7APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur.
Invalid Calibration
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Invalid Cal
Will occur if the sensor zero value is ± 10% of its scale. See Sensor Calibration.
Trip Events List
Low Sump Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Low Sump Press
Will occur if the unit is running unloaded or loaded and 3APT is less than 13
psi for 15 seconds.
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur
High Airend Discharge Temperature
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High A/E Disch T
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 228 deg F and the unit is running.
Check Motor Rotation
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Ck Motor Rot
This will occur if 3APT is less than 1 psi on a unit, 3 seconds after starting
(6 seconds if the unit is equipped with a soft starter or airend discharge
temperature is less than 50 deg F). This condition can be caused by the motor
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

running in reverse. Once correct motor rotation is established, this trip will High Sump Pressure
not be checked again unless power is removed from the controller. However,
if correct motor rotation is not established, this fault will be checked after Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Sump Pres
each start until correct motor rotation is established. Correct motor rotation This will occur if the sump pressure (3APT) is 25 psi or higher than the rated
is established when the controller reads a sump pressure of 1 psi or more pressure of the compressor.
within 3 seconds of starting.
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to  Trip History
occur
Pages 1 to a Max of 3
Overload
Figure 78 : Trip History
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Overload
This will occur if the fan or motor overload relays opens. The contact must be
open for at least 3 seconds before the trip will occur.
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Main Motor OL
This will occur if the current transducers indicate that the motor amp draw is
excessive. This overload is the equivalent of a class 10A trip level.
Remote Stop Failure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Rem Stop Fail
Will occur if the remote start/stop option is enabled, the remote stop button The pages in the Trips History folder document up to the last 15 trips that the
remains open and either start button is pressed. controller has experienced, and time stamps each. The trips are recorded in
sequence, with number one being the newest and 15 being the oldest. When
Remote Start Failure a new trip occurs, it becomes number one and all others are shifted up in
number.
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Rem Start Fail
The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
Will occur if the remote start/stop option is enabled, the unit is started by the
each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through five,
remote start button, and the button stays closed for 7 seconds after the unit
page two displays six through ten, and so on.
starts.
The following items will generate an entry in the trip history.
Sensor Failure
• Trips
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: 3APT Failure, 4APT Failure, 7APT Failure, 2ATT Failure,
Main Motor CT Failure Active Trips will show a flashing trip icon while acknowledged Trips will
This will occur when a sensor is recognized as missing or broken. The sensors have a solid icon.
affected by this trip are CT1, CT2, CT3, 3APT, 4APT, 7APT, and 2ATT. The sensor The trip history also records compressor data at the time of the trip to assist
should be displayed along with the sensor failure message. The sensor failure in diagnostics and troubleshooting. Navigating to the trip entry and hitting
message shall follow the following format: 3APT Failure. the right navigation button will bring up the trip history dialog box.
Emergency Stop Figure 79 : Trip History
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Emergency Stop
This will occur when the EMERGENCY STOP button is engaged.
High Sump Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Sump Pres
This will occur if the compressor is running loaded for at least 8 seconds, and
any one of the 3 following conditions exist. (1) The sump pressure is above
the rated pressure by 35 psi. (2) The separator pressure drop is measured to
be more than 25 psi and the package discharge pressure at least equal to the
minimum online set point value. (3) The sump pressure is above 165 psi if the While the dialog box is active, press the left and right keys in order to scroll
rated pressure is less than 190 psi or the sump pressure is above 220 if the through the displayed data. The name of the trip will always be shown in
rated pressure is 190 psi. the title bar of the dialog box. Press enter when finished viewing the data to
return to the trip history screen.
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur.
Unit Too Cold To Start
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Unit Too Cold
This will occur if the unit does not have the low ambient option, the airend
discharge temperature (2ATT) is less than 35 deg F, and the operator
attempts to start the compressor. This fault can only occur once a day. Once
this fault occurs, the operator can reset it and start the compressor. This fault
will be logged in the trip history to indicate that the unit is being started in
low ambient conditions.
Start Inhibit List
High Airend Discharge Temperature
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High A/E Disch T
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 95% of 228 deg F.

80447204 Rev B EN-39

93014.15.07

EN

• Danish • Polish
 Maintenance folder
• Dutch • Portuguese
Page 1 – Filter Status
• Estonian • Romanian
Figure 80 : Filter Status • Finish • Russian
• French • Slovak
• German • Slovenian
• Greek • Spanish
• Hungarian • Swedish
• Italian • Thai
• Indonesian • Turkish

This page displays the status of the filters. The filter status will either be “OK”
or “Change” depending on the compressor’s diagnostic readings. If a filter
reaches the “change’ status, a warning will be issued and the service indicator
will light up to notify the user. Please note that the compressor must be in a
“Running Loaded” state to check these maintenance items. If the compressor
is not in a running state – the status will display “Load,” unless a maintenance
indicator has been issued when the machine was running and has not yet
been reset.
The controller will display all screens in the selected language and only one
language can be selected at a time.
Each language appears in its native translation.
Temperature is selectable between oF and oC.
Pressure is selectable between psi, kpa, bar, kg/cm2.
Page 2 – Time & Date Settings

The following filters are displayed: Figure 83 : Time & Date Settings
• Separator Element

Page 2 - Maintenance Configuration

Figure 81 : Maintenance Configuration

All items are adjustable.

This page allows the user to set the service interval and to reset the counter
after the service has been performed. The service interval may be set to any
value between 1000 and 8000 hours, but must be set in accordance with the
factory maintenance schedule. After maintenance has been performed, the
user can reset the counter by navigating to the Reset button and pressing
the enter key. Note that after changing the Service Interval a Reset must be
performed to set the Hours Until Service to the proper value.
 General Settings folder
Time allows the current time to be set in a 24 hour format
Date allows the current month, day, and year to be set
Date Format is selectable between dd/mm/yyyy (default), mm/dd/yyyy, and
YYYY/MM/DD
Confirm New Time and Date is used to verify that changes to selections are
desired. An “x” must appear in the checkbox before any changes will take
affect.
The controller will continue to display any changes, even when the selections
have not been confirmed and the user exits the page, then returns. Cycling of
the power returns all selections to their current settings.

All parameters in the general settings folder are adjustable.

NOTICE
Page 1 – Language and Units Selection
The controller does not support Daylight Savings Time.
Figure 82 : Language and Units Selection
Page 3 – Backlight Settings
Figure 84 : Backlight Settings

Language is selectable from the following 30 choices:

• English (default) • Korean

• Bulgarian • Latvian Backlight Brightness adjusts the brightness of the display.
• Chinese, simplified • Lithuanian
NOTICE
• Croatian • Maltese
• Czech • Norwegian The backlight will be switched ON whenever any of the controller’s
keys are pressed.

EN-40 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

WARNING  Integral Sequencing folder

The start, stop, load, unload, reset, and acknowledge keys on the Figure 87 : Integral Sequencing folder
controller remain functional while the backlight is switched OFF. It is
recommended to press the enter key or one of the navigation keys in
order to switch the backlight ON.

Page 4 - Serial Port Address Settings

Figure 85 : Serial Port Address Settings

This page allows the user to set up the network addresses for the RS-485
networks the controller is capable of communicating with.
Active Protocol – Allows the serial port to be configured to Airbus (used for
X-Series system controllers and integral sequencing) or Modbus protocols.
MODBUS Address – Sets the modbus node ID for the controller to
communicate with a Modbus capable device, this can be any value between
1 and 254.
RS-485 Address – Sets the airbus address that allows the controller to
communicate over Integral Sequencing or an X-Series system controller
network.
Pages 5 & 6 – Ethernet Settings (ECO Module Only)
Please note that these pages will have no effect unless the ECO module
option has been purchased.
Figure 86 : Ethernet Settings (ECO Module Only)

IP Address Setting – When DHCP is not enabled, this setpoint sets the IP
address of the controller.
IP Address Actual – This will match the IP address setting when DHCP is
not enabled. If DHCP is enabled this will display the address assigned to the
controller by the DHCP server.
Default Gateway Setting – Setpoint for the default gateway.
Default Gateway Actual – Current reading/setting for the default gateway.
Subnet Mask Setting – Setpoint for the subnet mask
Subnet Mask Actual – Current reading/setting for the subnet mask
MAC Address – This is the unique hardware MAC address for the controller.
This can not be changed.
Enable DHCP – Allow the controller to automatically receive an IP address
from the Local Area Network (LAN)
Apply– After editing the desired setpoint navigate to the accept setting and
press enter in order for the values in the setting variables to be confirmed by
the controller.
Cancel – Discard any changes made to the Ethernet settings
Integral Sequencing allows the compressor to be networked with up to
three other compressors (fixed or variable speed) to maintain a stable
system pressure by loading and unloading compressors as needed. Integral
sequencing requires no additional hardware other than a serial two wire
connection daisy chained between all compressors in the system, connected
to port X04 on the controller.
For a compressor to be a member of the integral sequencing system, the
COM control setpoint in the operator settings tab must be enabled and
the compressor must be started via the local start button. Additionally, it
is recommended that the Auto-Restart function be enabled as the integral
sequencing system will never start and stop machines, only load and unload
them. Integral sequencing relies on Auto-Restart to turn OFF the compressor
motor when not needed.
Please note that the compressor’s address in the integral sequencing system
is defined by the RS-485 address that is set on the general settings folder.
Also note that the pressure signal used to determine when to load or unload
another compressor is based on the pressure reading from the compressor
assigned as the integral sequencing master. Lastly, note that the Active
Protocol on the general settings tab must be set to Airbus485 for integral
sequencing to operate properly.
Certain functions may interfere with compressors loading and unloading:
• Verify that the Remote Load Enable switch is in the open position. Having
this closed will allow the remote load/unload switch to define the load
command.

80447204 Rev B EN-41

93014.15.07

EN

• The master controller MUST be started and running in the sequence.

Otherwise, compressors will revert to their local setpoints.  Status folder
• If the master controller is telling a slave controller to load and the slave’s
local pressure is above its maximum offline setpoint, or its immediate NOTICE
stop setpoint, the slave will unload locally, and remain unloaded until
pressure falls below online or target setpoints. All information on these pages is read only.

Integral Sequencing – Enabling Integral Sequencing chooses this

compressor to be the sequence Master. The master’s package discharge NOTICE
pressure sensor will be the pressure signal used for the system. The default is
disabled. Please make sure all compressors are set up for integral sequencing Some values may only be visible when the factory settings password
before enabling this function. It is important that only one compressor in is entered.
the system have this setpoint enabled, otherwise system behaviour could be
impacted. This setpoint should also only be modified while the compressor is Page 1 – Analog Inputs
stopped. Note that the Integral Sequencing master does not have to be the
Figure 88 : Analog Inputs
compressor assigned RS-485 address 1.
Unload Pressure – Determines the pressure at which a compressor will be
unloaded by the system. The system unload pressure should always be set
lower than the local offline setpoint of compressors in the system. Note that
when under system control, the compressor will ignore the local pressure
setpoints except for protective functions.
Load Pressure – Determines the pressure at which a compressor will be
loaded by the system. The system unload pressure should always be set
lower than the local offline setpoint of compressors in the system. The system
unload pressure should always be set lower than the local offline setpoint
of compressors in the system. Note that when under system control, the Analog Inputs:
compressor will ignore the local pressure setpoints except for protective
functions. The following analog inputs are displayed in this section.
Start Delay Interval – Determines the amount of time between loading • Package Discharge Pressure – The pressure the compressor is delivering
compressors. This prevents all compressors from loading at once. This to the plant
setpoint should be set to the longest starting time of any compressor in the • Sump Pressure – The compressor’s internal pressure at the sump tank.
system. In general, this will be equivalent to the star/delta transition time for
• Airend Discharge Temperature – The temperature of the air/oil mixture
a fixed speed machine, or ramp time for a VSD machine.
at the discharge of the compression module.
Damping – The pressure control “Damping” setting which is used to tune
• After-cooler Discharge Temperature – The temperature of the air after
how quickly the system responds to pressure deviations. The default is 10 and
passing through the After-cooler. Note that this will only be shown if the
should not normally be changed.
Low Ambient option has been purchased and installed.
Tolerance - The pressure control “Tolerance” setting, which is used to tell the • After-cooler Discharge Pressure (integrated dryer units only)
system how to respond to changes in pressure above and below the load/ – Pressure the compressor is delivering before the dryer.
unload pressures. The default is 3.0 psi and should not normally be changed.
Page 2 – Compressor Data
Number of Compressors – Defines how many compressors are in the
system. There is a maximum of 4. Figure 89 : Compressor data
Priority – Each compressor can be assigned a priority level. Setting a
priority for a compressor affects how the rotation will occur. Compressors
with priority 1 will always be in the lead position(s), followed by priority 2
compressors, and so on. Compressors will only rotate positions with other
compressors of the same priority level.
Sequence – Displays the current load/unload order of the system. Each
compressor in the system is assigned a letter. The letter indicates whether
the machine with the assigned Airbus address is a lead machine (loads first,
unloads last) or one of the trim machines. Letter A is assigned to the lead
machine, B to the next machine to load, C to the third machine to load, and D
to the final machine to load. Machines will unload in the reverse order, such Compressor Data:
that A will be the last machine running. • Power ON Hours – The number of hours the controller has been powered
The first position in the - - - - sequence on Integral Sequencing tab, page 3 up
always refers to the compressor that is assigned Airbus Address 1. The second • Running Hours – The number of hours the compressor’s motor has been
position to Airbus Address 2, and so on. Note that the letter sequence may running
change due to rotation.
• Loaded Hours - The number of hours the compressor has been
Note that the sequence will only be displayed on the master controller. producing air
Rotate Now – Selecting this setpoint will cause the sequence to shift • Real Time Clock - Current time of day
according to the priorities, regardless of the rotation interval setpoint.
Rotation Interval – Determines the time period between automatic
sequence rotations.
Time Left – Counts down the time until the sequence rotation will occur.
System Pressure – Shows the current pressure reading that the system is
using for control. This will only be shown on the sequence Master controller.

EN-42 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Pages 3 and 4 – Digital Inputs • Load Solenoid 1SV – Normally Open

Figure 90 : Digital inputs • Modulation Solenoid 3SV – Normally Open
• Dryer Run / Fan Run – Normally Open
• PORO Horn – Normally Open
• Trip Indication – Normally Open

Page 7 – Analog Outputs

Figure 92 : Analog inputs

Analog Outputs:
The value for the analog outputs will be in mA.
Digital Inputs: • VSD Blower Output – Current speed of the VSD blower (if installed).
Each digital input will have an indication showing whether the input is in Page 8 – CT Inputs
an “OPEN” or “CLOSED” state. This is the physical state of the input and may
not necessarily line up with the logical condition. The normal state is shown Figure 93 : CT Inputs
below.
• Emergency Stop – Normally Closed
• Main/Fan Motor Overload – Normally Closed
• Remote Load Enable – Normally Open
• Remote Load/Unload – Normally Open
• Remote Start - Normally Open
• Remote Stop – Normally Closed
• Dryer Temperature Fault – Normally Open
CT Inputs
• Dryer High Pressure – Normally Closed
Displays the mA value of the current transformers installed on each leg of the
Pages 5 & 6 – Digital Outputs motor incoming power
Figure 91 : Digital inputs • CT1
• CT2
• CT3

 Factory Settings folder

This folder is for Ingersoll Rand factory and service personnel. A password
must be entered on page one in order to adjust values in this folder. This
folder is used for setting parameters that are specific to that compressor and
displaying software information for the controller.
Page 1 – Password
Figure 84 : Password

Digital Outputs:
Each digital output will have an indication showing whether the output is in
an “OPEN” or “CLOSED” state. This is the physical state of the input and may
not necessarily line up with the logical condition. The normal state is shown
Password:
below.
• Starter Contact KM1, KM2 – Normally Open Provides access to enter a valid password to gain access to password
protected parameters. The password is entered by scrolling down to the
• Starter Contact KM3 – Normally Open password value and pressing the return key.
• Fan Starter Contact KM4 – Normally Open

80447204 Rev B EN-43

93014.15.07
EN
Password entered:
This checkbox will indicate a valid password has been entered. If this
checkbox is blank, a valid password has not been entered or it has timed out.
This is read only.
Password timeout enable:
Checking this box will enable the password time feature.
Password timeout:
This timeout along with the password timeout enable allows the user to set
an adjustable amount of time to require a valid password to be re-entered.
Once this timeout is reached re-entry of a valid password is required. The
timeout counter is reset after any button press.
Pages 2 Thru 6 – Factory Settings
Figure 95 : Factory settings
These pages are used for setting parameters that are specific to the
compressor. All of the factory settings that are adjustable are listed below.
All settings on these pages are password protected.
Rated Pressure (psi – 100, 115, 135, 190) – This is the nominal pressure that
the compressor can provide.
Starter Type (Star-delta, Remote Starter, Soft Starter) – Choose the starter
type installed in the compressor. If this is not set correctly, the compressor
may not start.
Service Level (0, 1, or 2) – Set the service level reminders for the compressor.
EN-44
• Service Level 0 – Disables all service reminders
• Service Level 1 – A service warning will be issued when the service time
period has been expired. This warning can be reset by any user.
• Service Level 2 – A service warning will be issued 100 hours prior to the
service time period expiring. This 100 hour warning can be reset by any
user. At the expiration of the service time interval the service warning will
again occur. This warning can be reset by any user but will recur every 24
hours until the service complete factory setpoint has been set (Password
Required).
Motor Protection – Used to enable current transformer based overload and
locked rotor protection. This must be set to ON unless a thermal overload is
installed in the compressor starter panel.
Nominal Current – Used to set up the motor overload protection. This value
is set at the factory and must not be changed.
Main Motor CT Range - Must match the range of the installed current
transformers. All current transformers must have the same range.
CT Windings – Must match the number of windings of the installed current
transformers. All current transformers must have the same winding number
Enable Modulation (ON/OFF) – This enables the modulation option in
the controller, allowing Modulation or Mod/ACS modes of operations to be
chosen from the operator settings. The modulation option must be installed
on the compressor for this to work.
Enable PAC (ON/OFF) – Enables Progressive Adaptive Control – this will
reduce operating pressure in the case of a Change HE Filter warning or High
Sump Pressure warning in order to protect the compressor.
Enable Dryer (ON/OFF) – Enables dryer control from the controller. The
dryer option must be installed in the compressor for this to work properly.
Constant Run Dryer (ON/OFF) – Enabling this function causes the dryer to
run whenever the compressor is in a running state, including auto-restart.
Disabling this will allow the dryer to stop if certain conditions are met, such
as satisfying a minimum run timer. Certain dryer warnings will stop the dryer
regardless of this setpoint. If the dryer stops for any reason it will not be
allowed to restart for 90 seconds. When the compressor is being controlled
by an external source, constant run dryer will be enabled regardless of this
setpoint’s state.
Enable VSD Blower (ON/OFF) – Enable this function if there is a VSD blower
option installed in the compressor.
Limit Blower VSD (ON/OFF) – Enable this setpoint to limit the maximum
speed of the blower to 39 Hz.
Blower Override – Sets the blower on VSD blower equipped units to run at a
set percentage of full speed. Setting this to 101% enables automatic control
Enable Low Ambient (ON/OFF) – Enable this setpoint to activate low
ambient control. Low ambient control uses temperature readings to
determine the speed of the blower to allow the compressor to reach
an optimal operating temperature. When low ambient is enabled, the
compressor will always start, but will run unloaded until the airend discharge
temperature reaches the low ambient temperature set point.
Running Hours (adjustable) – Used to adjust the running hours counter on
the compressor
Loaded Hours (adjustable) – Used to adjust the loaded hours on the
compressor
Power ON Hours (Read Only)
Pages 7 & 8 – Factory Settings
Figure 96 : Factory Settings
These pages are used for displaying software information for the controller.
All items are read only.
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

 Variable Speed Compressor Pages 3 & 4 – Analog Inputs and Compressor Information
Figure 99 : Analog Inputs and Compressor Information
 Home folder
Page 1 – System Overview
Figure 97 : System overview

This is the factory default display after powering up the system.

Target Pressure Setpoint is indicated in the black box, which is always
centered on the gauge. This is the pressure that the compressor is trying to
maintain by adjusting the motor speed.
Automatic Stop Setpoint is indicated in the black box which is always right
of center on the gauge. When the compressor reaches this setpoint the Any sensor that is not installed or is reporting a failure will show a [ - - ]
compressor will unload and stop once the motor reaches minimum speed symbol.
and the compressor motor has been running for at least 2 minutes.
Package Discharge Pressure is indicated by the large numbers centered NOTICE
below the gauge and by the red arrow. This is the output pressure of the
compressor. All information on this page is read only.

Pressure Unit of Measure is indicated below the Package Discharge
Pressure. This is selectable from the GENERAL SETTINGS folder.
Percent Capacity is indicated on the lower left side of the screen in numeric
and bar graph form. This is how much air the compressor is producing as a
percentage of its maximum capacity.
Airend Discharge Temperature is indicated by the numbers in the lower
right of the display. This is the temperature of the air/oil mixture at the
discharge of the compression module.
Temperature Unit of Measure is indicated to the right of the Airend
Discharge Temperature. This is selectable from the GENERAL SETTINGS folder.
Run Hours indicate the number of hours the compressor has been running.
NOTICE
The target pressure and automatic stop set points can be selected and
modified on this page. All other information on this page is read only.
Page 2 - Counters
Figure 98 : Counters
The following analog inputs are displayed in this section.
• Package Discharge Pressure – The pressure the compressor is delivering
to the plant
• Sump Pressure – The compressor’s internal pressure at the sump tank.
• Airend Discharge Temperature – The temperature of the air/oil mixture
at the discharge of the compression module.
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (integrated dryer units only)
– Pressure the compressor is delivering before upstream of the dryer
• Separator Pressure Drop – The pressure drop across the separator
element
• Dryer Run Status (Integrated dryer units only) – Checkbox that shows
whether the dryer is currently running (checked) or not (blank)
Additionally, the following compressor status readings are included in this
section:
• Motor Speed – The current speed of the motor in rpm
• Package kW – The current power being consumed by the package,
including the main and blower VSDs

 Operator Settings folder

Pages 1 and 2 Operator Settings
Figure 100 : Operator Settings

Hour Meters Indicate the hours that: the controller has been powered up,
and the compressor has been running.
Starts indicate the number of times a start is attempted on the compressor.
Date & Time is adjustable and configurable in the GENERAL SETTINGS folder.
Target Pressure – The compressor will vary its speed in order to maintain a
package discharge pressure as close to this value as possible.
NOTICE
Range (in psi): 65 - 145 (non-TAS compressors)
All information on this page is read only. : 65 – 138 (TAS Equipped Compressors)

80447204 Rev B EN-45

93014.15.07
EN
Automatic Stop Pressure – The compressor will stop if the package
discharge pressure reaches this value and the compressor is running at
minimum speed.
Range (in psi): Target +1 to Target +10
Immediate Stop Pressure – The compressor will stop if the package
discharge pressure reaches this value, regardless of its speed.
Range (in psi): Auto Stop Pressure to Auto Stop Pressure +10
Pages 2 Thru 4 Operator Options
Figure 101 : Operator Settings
The options set points are similar to the operator set points except these set
points cannot be changed while the unit is running.
COM Control – Enabling this setpoint allows the compressor to be controlled
by a serial or Ethernet device, such as an X8I. This is equivalent to the
“Sequencer” option on older Intellisys controllers.
Remote Start/Stop – Enabling this setpoint allows the compressor to be
started and stopped using the digital inputs on the controller.
Enable PORO – Enabling this setpoint will allow the compressor to
automatically restart after a power outage has been restored if the
compressor was running loaded at the time of the outage. PORO is an option
which must be purchased and installed before this feature can be turned ON.
PORO Time – Time after the controller power has been restored and
controller has finished booting before the compressor will perform a PORO
start.
Scheduled Start Day – Day (or days) of the week for which a scheduled start
will be performed. The compressor will start when its onboard clock matches
the day, hour, and minute of the scheduled start setpoints. Scheduled Start/
Stop is an option which must be purchased and installed before this feature
can be turned ON.
Scheduled Start Hour – Hour of the day for which a scheduled start will be
performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be purchased and
installed before this feature can be turned ON.
Scheduled Start Minute – Minute of the hour for which a scheduled
start will be performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be
purchased and installed before this feature can be turned ON.
Scheduled Stop Day – Day (or days) of the week for which a scheduled stop
will be performed. The compressor will stop when its onboard clock matches
the day, hour, and minute of the scheduled stop setpoints. Scheduled Start/
EN-46
Stop is an option which must be purchased and installed before this feature
can be turned ON.
Scheduled Stop Hour – Hour of the day for which a scheduled stop will be
performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be purchased and
installed before this feature can be turned ON.
Scheduled Stop Minute – Minute of the hour for which a scheduled stop will
be performed. Scheduled Start/Stop is an option which must be purchased
and installed before this feature can be turned ON.
Note that in order to disable Scheduled Start/Stop, the Scheduled Start
and Stop days, hours, and minutes must match exactly.
Page 5 Calibrate Sensors
Figure 102 : Calibrate Sensors
Sensor calibration can only take place when the machine is stopped and
there is no pressure on the sensor. Calibration only needs to take place after
a sensor is replaced, the controller is replaced, the controller software is
upgraded, or the operator suspects the sensor reading is in error. Calibrate
a sensor by selecting the checkbox beside the sensor name. Note that the
checkbox may appear too quickly to be visible. Calibration can be confirmed
by verifying that the sensor value now reads zero.
Each of the sensors listed below can be calibrated.
• Package Discharge Pressure (4APT)
• Sump Pressure (3APT)
• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (7APT) – Only on units with integrated
dryer (TAS)
Note that if a sensor is currently reading a value that is ± 10% of its
range from zero, the sensor will not be able to be calibrated and an
warning will be logged in the event log. Please make sure the sensor is
being exposed to atmosphere before attempting calibration.
 Events folder
Pages 1 to a Max of 50
Figure 103 : Events folder
The pages in the Events folder document up to the last 200 events that the
controller has experienced, with the time and date of the occurrence. The
events are recorded in sequence, with number one being the newest and 200
being the oldest. When a new event occurs, it becomes number one and all
others are shifted up in number.
The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through five,
page two displays six through ten, and so on.
The time and date of the event can be viewed by navigating to an event and
pressing the right arrow navigation key. The time and date window can then
be exited by pressing the enter key.
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

EN

Figure 104 : Events folder service warnings.

Service Level 1
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: SVC Required
If service level 1 has been selected for the unit, a “SERVICE REQUIRED”
warning will be issued the amount of operating hours in the Service Time
Period set point. This warning can be reset the same as any other warning.
Service Level 2
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: 100 Hrs to SVC, SVC Required, Service Alarm
If service level 2 has been selected for the unit, the service complete factory
The following items will generate an event.
set point will be used to clear a level 2 service warning and reset the service
• Power ON time or date. The service complete can be reset before a service warning
• Power OFF occurs.

• Press the Start Key The first “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will occur at the total hours value
of the service time period set point. However, 100 hours before this a “100
• Press the Stop Key HOURS TO SERVICE” warning will occur. This warning can be reset the same
• Press the Load Key as any other warning. One hundred hours later, at the total hours value of the
service time period, the “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will occur. This warning
• Press the Unload Key
can be reset the same as any other warning, however this warning will return
• Starting the compressor remotely in 24 hours if the service complete factory set point has not be set. If the
service complete has not been set, 100 hours later (service time period + 100)
• Stopping the compressor remotely
the “ALARM – SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be issued. This warning can
• Loading the compressor remotely only be cleared by the service complete factory set point. Once the service
complete factory set point is set, indicating the service is completed, the time
• Unloading the compressor remotely
for the next “SERVICE REQUIRED” warning will be calculated by adding the
• Warning service time period to the total hours value, with the “100 HOURS TO SERVICE”
• Trip warning occurring 100 hours before and the “ALARM – SERVICE REQUIRED”
warning occurring 100 hours after that time.
• Start Inhibit
High VSD Ambient Temperature
Active Warnings will show a flashing caution icon while acknowledged Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High VSD Amb T
Warnings will a solid icon.
This warning will occur if the VSD ambient temperature gets within 5% of the
shutdown value (133 deg F). This condition must exist for 3 seconds before
Active Trips will show a flashing trip icon while acknowledged Trips will
the warning is issued.
have a solid icon.
Dryer Temp Warning
Active Start Inhibits will be listed in the Event log, but not highlighted. The
display will indicate the compressor is not ready to start if a start inhibit is Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Dryer Temp
active.
For R30 – 37 kW compressors this will occur if the dryer condenser or
Warning Events List evaporator temperature switches close. The condenser switch is locking
and must be manually reset before performing a reset on the controller.
Change Separator Element
The evaporator switch does not latch and can be reset as soon as the signal
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Chg Sep Elem opens. If this warning is reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist,
the dryer can restart.
This will occur if the unit has been running for at least 15 seconds, the
package discharge pressure is at least 65 psi, and the separator pressure drop Note that for R4 – 11 kW compressors equipped with a TAS dryer, the dryer
is at least 12 psi. If the target pressure is less than 90 psi, the warning value temp warning is triggered when the dewpoint temperature exceeds 14.5
will increase 1 psi per 5 psi in reduced target pressure. For example, if the deg C for 6 minutes or longer. This warning can also be triggered if the
target pressure is between 89 and 85 psi, the warning value will be 13 psi. temperature probe in the dryer fails.
This condition must exist for 3 seconds before the warning is issued.
Dryer High Pressure
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Dryer High Pres
occur.
On units with the integrated dryer, this will occur if the dryer high pressure
High Airend Disch Temp
switch opens while the dryer is running. This is a dryer fault. If this happens,
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High A/E Disch T the compressor will continue to run, but the dryer will stop. The contact must
be open for at least 3 seconds before the warning will occur. If this warning
Will occur if the unit is running and 2ATT is greater than 221 deg F (97% of is reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist, the dryer can restart.
228) or the unit is in idle mode (3.3.7.1) and 2ATT is greater than 184 deg F. However, this switch is a locking switch. The dryer high pressure switch must
This warning will have a 90 second delay. be reset (contact closed) before this warning can be reset. If this warning is
High Discharge Press reset while the conditions for running the dryer exist, the dryer can restart.

Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Disch Press High Sump Pressure

Will occur if the unit is under the control of an external device, such as an
X-series system controller, and the discharge pressure is greater than the
immediate stop pressure for a time period of 3 seconds. At this point, the
controller will unload the compressor until package discharge pressure falls
back below the target pressure setpoint.
Service
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Sump Pres
This will occur if the compressor is running, the package discharge pressure
is at least 65 psi, and the sump pressure is more than 15 psi above the target
pressure. The occurrence of this warning will cause the controller to evaluate
the need to lower the maximum speed. This condition must exist for 3
seconds before the warning is issued.

Service warnings occur when the unit has operated a certain number of Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
hours, based on the total hours. Service warnings can have multiple levels, occur
depending on the service level selection. Selecting service level 0 disables

80447204 Rev B EN-47

93014.15.07

EN

Change HE Filter
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Change HE Filt
The HE filter is located between the after-cooler discharge and the inlet to
the dryer and is only on units with an integrated dryer. The drop across the
HE filter is measured by subtracting the package discharge pressure from the
after-cooler discharge pressure. If the compressor is running at a minimum
of 75% capacity, the measured drop across the HE filter is at or above 14 psi
(1.0 bar), and the package discharge pressure (4APT) is above 90 psi, this
warning can occur. The condition must exist for at least 3 seconds before the
warning will occur. This is not a dryer fault. If this happens, the warning will
be displayed, but the dryer will continue to run.
Note that the Enable 7APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur
Replace Coolant Filter
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Chg Rplc Coolant Filt
Will occur if the idle mode is set to on. This trip is used as a reminder to
Ingersoll Rand service to only use idle mode if a new coolant filter is
installed.
Invalid Calibration
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Invalid Cal
This will occur if the sensor zero value is ± 10% of its scale.
Trip Events List
High Airend Disch Temp
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High A/E Disch T
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 228 deg F during normal operation. This
trip will occur at 200 deg F if the unit is in idle mode.
Overload
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Overload
This will occur if the fan overload relay opens. The contact must be open for
at least 3 seconds before the trip will occur.
Remote Stop Failure
Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur.
Check Motor Rotation
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Ck Motor Rot
This will occur if the controller reads a negative speed from the VSD when
starting.
VSD Communication Failure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: VSD Comm Fail
This will occur if the controller does not receive a response from the VSD
when requesting information. This trip will take about 8 seconds to occur.
Incorrect VSD Type
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Wrong VSD Type
This will occur at power up if the VSD type does not match the size of
compressor. The controller will determine this by comparing the compressor
type with the drive ID.
Stop Failure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Stop Failure
This will occur if the compressor should be stopped, but the motor speed
has not dropped below the minimum motor speed set point. The controller
will wait 4 seconds for the compressor to stop before issuing this trip. This is
normally an indication the run relay (K1) did not open when de-energized.
Because of this, the isolation contact should open when this fault occurs. The
isolation contact can close when this fault is cleared, if the unit is not water
cooled.
High Sump Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Sump Pres
This will occur if the compressor is running and any one of the 3 following
conditions exist. (1) The sump pressure is above the target pressure by 25 psi
(32 PSI if the dryer is enabled). (2) The separator pressure drop is measured to
be more than 25 psi and the package discharge pressure is at least 65 psi. (3)
The sump pressure is above 168 psi for a machine with rated pressure of 145
psi.

Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Rem Stop Fail Note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this warning to
occur
Will occur if the REMOTE START/STOP option is enabled, the remote stop
button remains open and either start button is pressed. VSD Initialization Fault

Remote Start Failure Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Drive Init Error

Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Rem Start Fail This will occur if the controller is unable to properly set-up the drive after
boot or after a reset. The controller will attempt to write a parameter 10 times
Will occur if the unit is started by the remote start button and the button to the drive, after these 10 attempts have failed this trip will be registered.
stays closed for 7 seconds after the unit starts.
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: VSD Comm Except
Sensor Failure
This will occur if the controller receives invalid communications from the VSD.
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: 3APT Failure, 4APT Failure, 7APT Failure, 2ATT Failure, Please refer to the troubleshooting guide for further information.
Main Motor CT Failure
Start Inhibit List
This will occur when a sensor is recognized as missing or broken. The sensors
affected by this trip are CT1, CT2, CT3, 3APT, 4APT, 7APT, and 2ATT. The sensor High Airend Discharge Temperature
should be displayed along with the sensor failure message. The sensor failure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High A/E Disch T
message shall follow the following format: 3APT Failure.
This will occur if 2ATT is greater than 95% of 228 deg F.
Emergency Stop
High Sump Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Emergency Stop
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: High Sump Pres
This will occur when the EMERGENCY STOP button is engaged.
This will occur if the sump pressure (3APT) is 25 psi or higher than the rated
VSD Fault X
pressure of the compressor.
Xe-70M On-Screen Text:
Please note that the Enable 3APT setpoint must be turned ON for this
The compressors variable speed drive is reporting a fault. Please refer to the warning to occur
troubleshooting guide for further information.
VSD Intialization
Low Sump Pressure
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: VSD Initializing
Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Low Sump Press
This will occur if the compressor VSD has not responded to the initial
Will occur if the compressor is operating and the sump pressure drops below communications from the controller.
13 psi for 15 seconds.

EN-48 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

The following filters are displayed:

 Trip History • Separator Element
Pages 1 to A Max of 3 Page 2 - Maintenance Configuration
Figure 105 : Trip History Figure 108 : Maintenance Configuration

The pages in the Trips History folder document up to the last 15 trips that the
controller has experienced, and time stamps each. The trips are recorded in
sequence, with number one being the newest and 15 being the oldest. When
a new trip occurs, it becomes number one and all others are shifted up in
number.
The page numbers in the Title Bar are used to scroll through the events, with
each page displaying up to seven. Page one displays events one through five,
page two displays six through ten, and so on.
The following items will generate an entry in the trip history.
• Trips
This page allows the user to set the service interval and to reset the counter
after the service has been performed. The service interval may be set to any
value between 1000 and 8000 hours, but must be set in accordance with the
factory maintenance schedule. After maintenance has been performed, the
user can reset the counter by navigating to the Reset button and pressing
the enter key. Note that after changing the Service Interval a Reset must be
performed to set the Hours Until Service to the proper value.
 General Settings folder
All parameters in the general settings folder are adjustable.

Active Trips will show a flashing trip icon while acknowledged Trips will Page 1 – Language & Units Selection
have a solid icon. Figure 109 : Language & Units Selection
The trip history also records compressor data at the time of the trip to assist
in diagnostics and troubleshooting. Navigating to the trip entry and hitting
the enter button will bring up the trip history dialog box.
Figure 106 : Trip History

Language is selectable from the following 30 selections:

• English (default) • Korean

• Bulgarian • Latvian

While the dialog box is active, press the left and right keys in order to scroll • Chinese, simplified • Lithuanian
through the displayed data. The name of the trip will always be shown in • Croatian • Maltese
the title bar of the dialog box. Press enter when finished viewing the data to
• Czech • Norwegian
return to the trip history screen.
• Danish • Polish
• Dutch • Portuguese
 Maintenance folder
• Estonian • Romanian
Page 1 – Filter Status
• Finish • Russian
Figure 107 : Filter Status • French • Slovak
• German • Slovenian
• Greek • Spanish
• Hungarian • Swedish
• Italian • Thai
• Indonesian • Turkish

The controller will display all screens in the selected language and only one
language can be selected at a time.
This page displays the status of the filters. The filter status will either be “OK” Each language appears in its native translation.
or “Change” depending on the compressor’s diagnostic readings. If a filter
Temperature is selectable between oF and oC.
reaches the “change’ status, a warning will be issued and the service indicator
will light up to notify the user. Please note that the compressor must be in a Pressure is selectable between psi, kpa, bar, kg/cm2.
“Running Loaded” state to check these maintenance items. If the compressor
is not in a running state – the status will display “Load,” unless a maintenance
indicator has been issued when the machine was running and has not yet
been reset.

80447204 Rev B EN-49

93014.15.07

EN

Page 2 – Time & Date Settings This page allows the user to set up the network addresses for the RS-485
networks the controller is capable of communicating with.
Figure 110 : Time & Date Settings
Active Protocol – Allows the serial port to be configured to Airbus (used for
X-Series system controllers and integral sequencing) or Modbus protocols
MODBUS Address – Sets the modbus node ID for the controller to
communicate with a Modbus capable device, this can be any value between
1 and 254.
RS-485 Address – Sets the airbus address that allows the controller to
communicate over Integral Sequencing or an X-Series system controller
network.
Pages 5 & 6 – Ethernet Settings (ECO Module Only)
All items are adjustable.
Note that these pages will have no effect unless the ECO module option has
Time allows the current time to be set in a 24 hour format been purchased.

Date allows the current month, day, and year to be set Figure 113 : Ethernet Settings (ECO Module Only)

Date Format is selectable between dd/mm/yyyy (default), mm/dd/yyyy, and

YYYY/MM/DD
Confirm New Time and Date is used to verify that changes to selections are
desired. An “x” must appear in the checkbox before any changes will take
affect.
The controller will continue to display any changes, even when the selections
have not been confirmed and the user exits the page, then returns. Cycling of
the power returns all selections to their current settings.

NOTICE IP Address Setting – When DHCP is not enabled, this setpoint sets the IP
address of the controller.
The controller does not support Daylight Savings Time.
IP Address Actual – This will match the IP address setting when DHCP is
not enabled. If DHCP is enabled this will display the address assigned to the
Page 3 – Backlight Settings controller by the DHCP server.

Figure 111 : Backlight Settings Default Gateway Setting – Setpoint for the default gateway.
Default Gateway Actual – Current reading/setting for the default gateway.
Subnet Mask Setting – Setpoint for the subnet mask
Subnet Mask Actual – Current reading/setting for the subnet mask
MAC Address – This is the unique hardware MAC address for the controller.
This can not be changed.
Enable DHCP – Allow the controller to automatically receive an IP address
from the Local Area Network (LAN)
Apply– After editing the desired setpoint navigate to the accept setting and
Backlight Brightness adjusts the brightness of the display. press enter in order for the values in the setting variables to be confirmed by
the controller.
NOTICE Cancel – Discard any changes made to the Ethernet settings.
The backlight will be switched ON whenever any of the controller’s
keys are pressed.
 Integral Sequencing folder
Figure 114 : Integral Sequencing
WARNING

The start, stop, load, unload, reset, and acknowledge keys on the
controller remain functional while the backlight is switched OFF. It is
recommended to press the enter key or one of the navigation keys in
order to switch the backlight ON.

Page 4 - Serial Port Address Settings

Figure 112 : Serial Port Address Settings

EN-50 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
Integral Sequencing allows the compressor to be networked with up to
three other compressors (fixed or variable speed) to maintain a stable
system pressure by loading and unloading compressors as needed. Integral
sequencing requires no additional hardware other than a serial two wire
connection daisy chained between all compressors in the system, connected
to port X04 on the controller.
For a compressor to be a member of the integral sequencing system, the
COM control setpoint in the operator settings tab must be enabled and
the compressor must be started via the local start button. Additionally, it
is recommended that the Auto-Restart function be enabled as the integral
sequencing system will never start and stop machines, only load and unload
them. Integral sequencing relies on Auto-Restart to turn OFF the compressor
motor when not needed.
Please note that the compressor’s address in the integral sequencing system
is defined by the RS-485 address that is set on the general settings folder.
Also note that the pressure signal used to determine when to load or unload
another compressor is based on the pressure reading from the compressor
assigned as the integral sequencing master. Lastly, note that the Active
Protocol on the general settings tab must be set to Airbus485 for integral
sequencing to operate properly.
Certain functions may interfere with compressors loading and unloading:
• Verify that the Remote Load Enable switch is in the open position. Having
this closed will allow the remote load/unload switch to define the load
command.
• The master controller MUST be started and running in the sequence.
Otherwise, compressors will revert to their local setpoints.
• If the master controller is telling a slave controller to load and the slave’s
local pressure is above its maximum offline setpoint, or its immediate
stop setpoint, the slave will unload locally, and remain unloaded until
pressure falls below online or target setpoints.
Integral Sequencing – Enabling Integral Sequencing chooses this
compressor to be the sequence Master. The master’s package discharge
pressure sensor will be the pressure signal used for the system. The default is
disabled. Please make sure all compressors are set up for integral sequencing
before enabling this function. It is important that only one compressor in
the system have this setpoint enabled, otherwise system behaviour could be
impacted. This setpoint should also only be modified while the compressor is
stopped. Note that the Integral Sequencing master does not have to be the
compressor assigned RS-485 address 1.
Unload Pressure – Determines the pressure at which a compressor will be
unloaded by the system. The system unload pressure should always be set
lower than the local offline setpoint of compressors in the system. Note that
when under system control, the compressor will ignore the local pressure
setpoints except for protective functions.
Load Pressure – Determines the pressure at which a compressor will be
loaded by the system. . The system unload pressure should always be set
lower than the local offline setpoint of compressors in the system. The system
unload pressure should always be set lower than the local offline setpoint
of compressors in the system. Note that when under system control, the
compressor will ignore the local pressure setpoints except for protective
functions.
80447204 Rev B
EN
Start Delay Interval – Determines the amount of time between loading
compressors. This prevents all compressors from loading at once. This
setpoint should be set to the longest starting time of any compressor in the
system. In general, this will be equivalent to the star/delta transition time for
a fixed speed machine, or ramp time for a VSD machine.
Damping – The pressure control “Damping” setting which is used to tune
how quickly the system responds to pressure deviations. The default is 10 and
should not normally be changed.
Tolerance - The pressure control “Tolerance” setting, which is used to tell the
system how to respond to changes in pressure above and below the load/
unload pressures. The default is 3.0 psi and should not normally be changed.
Number of Compressors – Defines how many compressors are in the
system. There is a maximum of 4.
Priority – Each compressor can be assigned a priority level. Setting a
priority for a compressor affects how the rotation will occur. Compressors
with priority 1 will always be in the lead position(s), followed by priority 2
compressors, and so on. Compressors will only rotate positions with other
compressors of the same priority level.
Sequence – Displays the current load/unload order of the system. Each
compressor in the system is assigned a letter. The letter indicates whether
the machine with the assigned Airbus address is a lead machine (loads first,
unloads last) or one of the trim machines. Letter A is assigned to the lead
machine, B to the next machine to load, C to the third machine to load, and D
to the final machine to load. Machines will unload in the reverse order, such
that A will be the last machine running.
The first position in the - - - - sequence on Integral Sequencing tab, page 3
always refers to the compressor that is assigned Airbus Address 1. The second
position to Airbus Address 2, and so on.
Note that the letter sequence may change due to rotation.
Note that the sequence will only be displayed on the master controller.
Rotate Now – Selecting this setpoint will cause the sequence to shift
according to the priorities, regardless of the rotation interval setpoint.
Rotation Interval – Determines the time period between sequence
rotations.
Time Left – Counts down the time until the sequence rotation will occur.
System Pressure – Shows the current pressure reading that the system is
using for control. This will only be shown on the sequence Master controller.
 Status folder
NOTICE
All information on these pages is read only. Page numbers are valid
for when the password is entered. When the password is not entered
the pages may be arranged slightly differently.
Page 1– Analog Inputs
Figure 115 : Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs:
The following analog inputs are displayed in this section.
• Package Discharge Pressure – The pressure the compressor is delivering
to the plant
• Sump Pressure – The compressor’s internal pressure at the sump tank.
• Airend Discharge Temperature – The temperature of the air/oil mixture
at the discharge of the compression module.
EN-51
93014.15.07

EN

• After-cooler Discharge Pressure (TAS units only) – Pressure the

compressor is delivering before the dryer.

Pages 2 Thru 4 – Compressor Data

Figure 116 : Compressor Data

Digital Inputs: (Password Required)

Each digital input will have an indication showing whether the input is in
an “OPEN” or “CLOSED” state. This is the physical state of the input and may
not necessarily line up with the logical condition. The normal state is shown
below.
• Emergency Stop – Normally Closed
• Main/Fan Motor Overload – Normally Closed
• Remote Start - Normally Open
• Remote Stop – Normally Closed
• Dryer Temperature Fault – Normally Open
• Dryer High Pressure – Normally Closed

Pages 7 & 8 – Digital Outputs

Figure 118 : Digital Outputs

Compressor Data:
• Power ON Hours – Number of hours that the controller has been
powered up
• Running Hours – Number of hours the compressor’s motor has been
running
• Motor Speed – Current speed of the motor in RPM
• Time – Current time of day.
• Motor Current – Electrical current currently being drawn by the motor.
• Motor Voltage – Electrical voltage at the motor.
• DC Link Voltage – DC Bus Voltage on the VSD
Digital Outputs (Password Required):
• Package kW – Instantaneous power consumption of the compressor
Each digital output will have an indication showing whether the output is in
• Heatsink Temperature – Temperature of the VSD at the heatsink
an “OPEN” or “CLOSED” state. This is the physical state of the input and may
• Control Card Temperature – Temperature of the VSD at the control card not necessarily line up with the logical condition. The normal state is shown
below.
Pages 5 & 6 – Digital Inputs
• VSD Run K1 Contact – Normally Open
Figure 117 : Digital Inputs • Fan Starter Contact KM4 – Normally Open
• Blowdown Solenoid 1SV – Normally Open
• Dryer Run / Fan Run – Normally Open
• PORO Horn – Normally Open
• Trip Indication – Normally Open

EN-52 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Page 9 – Analog Outputs

Figure 119 : Analog Inputs

Analog Outputs:
The value for the analog outputs will be in mA.
• VSD Output

 Factory settings folder

This folder is for Ingersoll Rand factory and service personnel. A password
must be entered on page one in order to adjust values in this folder. This
folder is used for setting parameters that are specific to that compressor and
displaying software information for the controller.
Page 1 – Password
Figure 120 : Password
Password:
Provides access to enter a valid password to gain access to password
protected parameters. The password is entered by scrolling down to the
password value and pressing the return key.
Password entered:
This checkbox will indicate a valid password has been entered. If this
checkbox is blank, a valid password has not been entered or it has timed out.
This is read only.
Password timeout enable:
Checking this box will enable the password time feature.
Password timeout:
This timeout along with the password timeout enable allows the user to set
an adjustable amount of time to require a valid password to be re-entered.
Once this timeout is reached re-entry of a valid password is required. The
timeout counter is reset after any button press.
Pages 2 Thru 4 – Factory Settings
Figure 121 : Factory Settings
These pages are used for setting parameters that are specific to the
compressor. All of the factory settings that are adjustable are listed below.
All settings on these pages are password protected and must only be
changed by authorize factory technicians.
Compressor Type - The type of compressor will be selected here. The choices
are listed below.
• 5.5 kW
• 7.5 kW
• 11 kW
• 30 kW
• 37 kW
• 7.5 hp
• 10 hp
• 15 hp
• 40 hp
• 50 hp
Rated Pressure (psi – 145, 200) – This is the maximum target pressure that
the compressor can provide.
Enable PAC (ON/OFF) – Enables Progressive Adaptive Control – this will
reduce maximum motor speeds in the case of a Change HE Filter warning or
High Sump Pressure warning in order to protect the compressor.
Enable 3APT (ON/OFF) – Enables the sump pressure sensor. This is set at the
factory and should not be changed.
Enable 7APT (ON/OFF) – Enables the after-cooler discharge pressure sensor.
This is set at the factory and should not be changed.
Service Level (0, 1, or 2) – Set the service level reminders for the compressor.
• Service Level 0 – Disables all service reminders
• Service Level 1 – A service warning will be issued when the service time
period has been expired. This warning can be reset by any user.
• Service Level 2 – A service warning will be issued 100 hours prior to the
service time period expiring. This 100 hour warning can be reset by any
user. At the expiration of the service time interval the service warning will
again occur. This warning can be reset by any user but will recur every 24
hours until the service complete factory setpoint has been set (Password
Required).

Enable Dryer (ON/OFF) – Enables dryer control from the controller. The
dryer option must be installed in the compressor for this to work properly.
Constant Run Dryer (ON/OFF) – Enabling this function causes the dryer to
run whenever the compressor is in a running state, including auto-restart.
Disabling this will allow the dryer to stop if certain conditions are met, such
as satisfying a minimum run timer. Certain dryer warnings will stop the dryer
regardless of this setpoint. If the dryer stops for any reason it will not be
allowed to restart for 90 seconds. When the compressor is being controlled
by an external source, constant run dryer will be enabled regardless of this

80447204 Rev B EN-53

93014.15.07

EN

setpoint’s state. Pages 9 & 10 – VSD Diagnostics

Fan Minimum Run Time – Sets the amount of time the fan will have to stay Figure 123 : Factory Settings (VSD Diagnostics)
running before being allowed to shut-off if the compressor stops. Note that
this means the fan may continue to run after the compressor main motor has
stopped.
PORO Installed (ON/OFF) – Allows the PORO and Scheduled Start/Stop
functions to be turned ON. This can only be turned ON if the PORO kit has
been purchased and installed.
Running Hours (adjustable) – Used to adjust the running hours counter on
the compressor.
Power ON Hours (Read Only) – Displays the amount of time the controller
has had power connected.
Pages 5 Through 8 – Maximum Values
Figure 122 : Factory Settings (Maximum Values)

The VSD Diagnostics screens are used to troubleshoot any drive problems.
These screens must only be used by authorized service technicians. The
password must be entered in order to activate these diagnostic tests.
Pages 11 through 14 – VSD Service Menus
Figure 124 : Factory Settings (VSD Service Menus)

The VSD service menus contain parameters used to set up the compressor for
optimal operation. The default selections have been set to work optimally for
a majority of compressors. These screens must only be used by authorized
service technicians. The password must be entered in order to modify these
parameters.
Pages 13 & 14 – Software Information
Figure 125 : Software Information
The maximum values pages are used to record the highest value the
controller has seen since the last time the maximum values have been reset.
Each maximum value entry displays the highest value recorded as well as the
time and date stamp of when these maximum values have occurred.
The final maximum value page has a reset setting at the bottom of the page,
highlighting this button and hitting enter will cause the controller to clear all
history of maximum values and begin recording them again. The password
must be entered in order to use this reset functionality.

These pages are used for displaying software information for the controller.
All items are read only.

EN-54 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

MODBUS CONNECTION AND CONTROL

 Connection to the Modbus Network  Modbus Address Selection
The Xe-70M controller is designed to interface to any Modbus RTU master Each compressor connected to the MODBUS network will have a unique
capable device using Belden 9841 or equivalent RS-485 cable. In order to assigned address, starting at compressor 1 increasing sequentially to the
connect to the network, the cable must be connected to port X04 on the number of compressors connected to the MODBUS network.
controller as shown in the figure below:
The Modbus address for each compressor is set on the General Settings Tab,
Figure 126 Page 4. The controller’s default Modbus Address setting is 1,
X e7 0M P h o e n ix 2 P in
Additionally, the active protocol must be set to Modbus Slave.
C o n n e cto r
L2
2 Figure 128
1
L1

2 1
X 04

L2
L1  Modbus Master Settings
In order to communicate properly with the Xe-70M controller, the Modbus
 RS-485 Network master must be set to communicate with the following configuration:
Baud Rate – 9600
RS-485 data communications and other low voltage signals can be Data Bits – 8
subject to electrical interference.
Stop Bits – 1
This potential can result in intermittent malfunction or anomaly that is
difficult to diagnose. To avoid this possibility always use earth shielded Parity – None
cables, securely bonded to a known good earth at one end. In addition, give
The following polling parameters are recommended for optimal system
careful consideration to cable routing during installation.
operation:
1. Never route an RS-485 data communications or low voltage signal
Polling Rate: Not less than 500 ms
cable alongside a high voltage 3- phase power supply cable. If it is
necessary to cross the path of a power supply cable(s), always cross at Timeout: 500 ms
a right angle.
Retries: 2
2. If it is necessary to follow the route of power supply cables for a
short distance (for example: from a compressor unit to a wall along a
suspended cable tray) attach the RS-485 or signal cable on the outside
of an earthed cable tray such that the cable tray forms an earthed
electrical interference shield.
3. Where possible, never route an RS-485 or signal cable near
to equipment or devices that may be a source of electrical
interference (for example: 3-phase power supply transformer, high
voltage switchgear unit, frequency inverter drive module, radio
communications antenna).
Figure 127

80447204 Rev B EN-55

93014.15.07

EN

 R4 to 37 kW Fixed Speed Modbus Table

Table 32: R4 To 37 kW Fixed Speed Modbus Table

Register Variable Read/Write Range Notes

(40XXX)
1 Status/Control R/W See FIGURE 129
3 Package Discharge Pressure R
4 Sump Pressure R
7 Airend Discharge Temperature R
8 After-cooler Discharge Temperature R Low Ambient units only
10 Separator Pressure Drop R
16 After-cooler Discharge Pressure R Dryer units only
65 Running Hours MSB R
66 Running Hours LSB R
67 Loaded Hours MSB R
68 Loaded Hours LSB R
98 Rated Pressure R
100 Starter Type R 1-3 See Figure 130
101 Modulation Enabled R 0=Disabled
102 Service Level R 0-2 0=Level 0, 1=Level 1, 2=Level 2
103 Service Time Period R 1000 - 8000 Increments of 1000
104 Dryer Installed R 0=OFF
112 Offline Pressure R/W 75 - (rated+10) rated = rated pressure
113 Online Pressure R/W 65-(offline-10) offline = offline pressure
114 Mode of Operation R/W 0–2 See Figure 130
115 Starter Time (seconds) R/W 5 – 30
116 Auto Restart Time (seconds) R/W 120 – 3600
117 Auto Restart ON/OFF R 0=OFF
118 Communication Control ON/OFF R 0=OFF
119 Remote Start/Stop Enable R 0=OFF
121 Power Out Restart Option (PORO) Enable R 0=OFF
122 PORO Time (seconds) R/W 10 - 600
123 Auto Start/Stop Delay Time (seconds) R/W 0 - 60
124 Low Ambient Temperature R/W 30 - 60 Degree F
125 Unloaded Stop Time R/W 10 - 30
128 Lead/Lag R/W 0=Lag
129 Lag Offset R/W 0 - 45 psi
131 Lead/Lag Cycle Length (Hours) R/W 0 – 750
132 Scheduled Start (Day) R/W 0-9 See Figure 130
133 Scheduled Start (Hour) R/W 0 – 23
134 Scheduled Start (Minute) R/W 0 – 59
135 Scheduled Stop (Day) R/W 0-9 See Figure 130
136 Scheduled Stop (Hour) R/W 0 – 23
137 Scheduled Stop (Minute) R/W 0 – 59
255 Warning Code R See Figure 131
256 Trip Code R See Figure 131
400 Reset Web Logins R/W 0-1 Writing a 1 value will reset the web logins to
factory defaults. After the reset is performed
this value shall be set back to 0

EN-56 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Figure 129 : Manhattan Fixed Speed Controller Register 01-Status/Control

Bit 0: Host/Local (R/W) Bit 6: Alarm (R)

0 = Local 0 = No Alarms
1 = Host 1 = Alarms
Bit 1: Run/Stop (R/W) Bit 7: Warning (R)
0 = Stop 0 = No Warnings
1 = Run 1 = Warnings
Bit 2: Load/Unload (R/W) Bit 8: On/Off Line Mode (R)
0 = Unload 0 = Not in On/Off Line Mode
1 = Load 1 = On/Off Line Mode
Bit 3: Modulating (R) Bit 9: Mod/ACS or Mod Only (R)
0 = Not Modulating 0 = Not in Mod/ASC Mode
1 = Modulating 1 = Mod/ASC Mode
Bit 4: Unused Bits 10-12: Unused
Bit 5: Stopped in Auto Restart (R) Bits 13-15: Unit Type (R): Unused
0 = Not Stopped in Auto Restart
1 = Stopped in Auto Restart

Figure 130 : Manhattan Fixed Speed Controller Register Codes

Register 100: Starter Type Register 114: Mode of Operation

1 = Star-Delta 0 = On/Off Line
2 = Remote Starter 1 = MOD/ACS
3 = Soft Starter 2 = Modulation Only

Registers 132, 135: Day

0 = Sunday 4 = Thursday 7 = Daily
1 = Monday 5 = Friday 8 = Weekdays
2 = Tuesday 6 = Saturday 9 = Weekends
3 = Wednesday

Figure 131 : Manhattan Fixed Speed Controller Trip & Warning Codes

Code Description
02 Sensor Failure 3APT
03 Sensor Failure 4APT
08 Sensor Failure 7APT
10 Sensor Failure 2ATT
11 Sensor Failure 4ATT
18 Motor Overload (Main) – due to CTs
19 Overload – due to Thermal OL
22 Check Motor Rotation
25 Remote Stop Failure
26 Remote Start Failure
28 Low Sump Pressure
29 High Air Pressure
31 High Airend Discharge Temperature
32 Emergency Stop
34 Change Separator Element
36 Sensor Error (Calibration)
38 100 Hours To Service
39 Service Required
40 Alarm – Service Required
48 Unit Too Cold To Start
49 High Sump Pressure
51 Dryer High Pressure
52 Dryer Temperature Warning
55 Change HE Filter (Dryer)
56 Sensor Failure – Main Motor CT Inputs

80447204 Rev B EN-57

93014.15.07

EN

 R5.5 to 37 kW Variable Speed Modbus Table

Table 33 : R5.5 TO 37 kW Variable Speed Modbus Table

Register Variable Read/Write Range Notes

(40XXX)
1 Status/Control R/W See Figure 132
3 Package Discharge Pressure R
4 Sump Pressure R
10 After-cooler Discharge Pressure R
12 Airend Temperature R
19 Separator Pressure Drop R
20 Percent Capacity R
25 Motor Speed R
26 Motor Current R
28 DC Link Voltage R
30 Motor Voltage R
31 Package kW R
32 kW Hours R 0 – 999 Add to (mW hours * 1000)
65 Total Hours MSB R
66 Total Hours LSB R
98 Compressor Type R See FIGURE 133
99 Service Level R 0-2 0=Level 0, 1=Level 1, 2=Level 2
100 Service Time Period R 1000 - 8000 Increments of 1000
103 Dryer Installed R 0 = no dryer
112 Target Pressure R/W 65 - 145
113 Auto Stop Pressure R/W (T+1)-(T+10) T = target pressure
114 Immediate Stop Pressure R/W ASP–(ASP+10) ASP = auto stop pressure
117 Compare Savings To R/W 0-2 0=Geo, 1=Mod, 2=ON/OFF
121 Communication Control ON/OFF R 0=OFF
122 Remote Start/Stop ON/OFF R 0=OFF
123 Power Out Restart Option (PORO) ON/OFF R 0=OFF
124 PORO Time (seconds) R/W 10 - 600 See Figure 133
127 Scheduled Start - Day R/W 0-9 See Figure 133
128 Scheduled Stop - Day R/W 0-9
129 Scheduled Start (Hour) R/W 0 – 23
130 Scheduled Start (Minute) R/W 0 – 59
131 Scheduled Stop (Hour) R/W 0 – 23
132 Scheduled Stop (Minute) R/W 0 – 59
133 Rated Pressure R
251 VSD Software Version Number R Divide by 100
255 Warning Code R See Figure 134
256 Alarm Code History R See Figure 134
400 Reset Web Logins R/W 0-1 Writing a 1 value will reset the web logins to
factory defaults. After the reset is performed
this value shall be set back to 0

EN-58 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

Figure 132 : Manhattan Variable Speed Controller Register 01-Status/Control

Bit 0: Host/Local (R/W) Bit 6: Alarm (R)

0 = Local 0 = No Alarms
1 = Host 1 = Alarms
Bit 1: Run/Stop (R/W) Bit 7: Warning (R)
0 = Stop 0 = No Warnings
1 = Run 1 = Warnings
Bit 2: Load/Unload (R/W) Bits 8 - 9: Normal/Unload Operate (R)
0 = No Loaded Operation 00 = Unloaded Operation
1 = Loaded Operatoin 11 = Normal Operation
Bit 3: Operating at Minimum Speed (R) Bits 10 – 11: Unused
0 = Operating above Minimum Speed Bit 12: Fixed/Variable Speed Compressor (R)
1 = Operating at Minimum Speed 0 = Fixed Speed
Bit 4: Operating at Maximum Speed (R) 1 = Variable Speed
0 = Operating below Maximum Speed
1 = Operating at Maximum Speed
Bit 5: Stopped in Auto Restart (R) Bits 13-15: Unit Type (R): Unused
0 = Not Stopped in Auto Restart
1 = Stopped in Auto Restart

Figure 133 : Manhattan Variable Speed Controller Register Codes

Register 98: Compressor Type

55 = 5.5 kW
75 = 7.5 kW
80 = 7.5 hp
100 = 10 hp
110 = 11 kW
150 = 15 kW
200 = 20 hp
220 = 22 kW
290 = 30 hp
300 = 30 kW
400 = 40 hp
370 = 37 kW
500 = 50 hp

Register 127 & 128: Day

0 = Sunday 4 = Thursday 7 = Daily
1 = Monday 5 = Friday 8 = Weekdays
2 = Tuesday 6 = Saturday 9 = Weekends
3 = Wednesday

80447204 Rev B EN-59

93014.15.07

EN

Figure 134 : Manhattan Variable Speed Controller Alarm & Warning Codes

Code Description Code Description

01 Sensor Failure 4APT 128 VSD Fault 28
02 Sensor Failure 3APT 129 VSD Fault 29
08 Sensor Failure 7APT (Dryer) 130 VSD Fault 30
10 Sensor Failure 2ATT 131 VSD Fault 31
18 High VSD Temperature 132 VSD Fault 32
19 Blower Fault 133 VSD Fault 33
20 VSD Communication Failure 134 VSD Fault 34
22 Check Motor Rotation 135 Unused
23 Stop Failure 136 VSD Fault 36
25 Remote Stop Failure 137 Unused
26 Remote Start Failure 138 VSD Fault 38
27 Incorrect VSD Type 139 Unused
28 Replace Coolant Filter (Idle Mode) 140 VSD Fault 40
29 High Air Pressure 141 VSD Fault 41
30 Low Sump Air Pressure 142 VSD Fault 42
31 High Airend Discharge Temperature … Unused
32 Emergency Stop 147 VSD Fault 47
34 Change Separator Element 148 VSD Fault 48
36 Invalid Calibration 149 VSD Fault 49
37 Check Set Points (Parameter Reset to Defaults 150 AMA Not OK
38 100 Hours To Service … Unused
39 Service Required 159 VSD Fault 59
40 Alarm – Service Required 160 Unused
48 High Sump Pressure 161 VSD Fault 61
51 Dryer High Pressure 162 VSD Fault 62
52 Dryer Temperatures Warning 163 VSD Fault 63
55 Change HE Filter 164 VSD Fault 64
100 VSD Fault (generic) 165 VSD Fault 65
101 VSD Fault 1 166 VSD Fault 66
102 VSD Fault 2 167 VSD Fault 67
103 VSD Fault 3 168 VSD Fault 68
104 VSD Fault 4 169 Unused
105 VSD Fault 5 170 VSD Fault 70
106 VSD Fault 6 171 VSD Fault 71
107 VSD Fault 7 172 VSD Fault 72
108 VSD Fault 8 … Unused
109 VSD Fault 9 180 VSD Fault 80
110 VSD Fault 10 … Unused
111 VSD Fault 11 190 VSD Fault 90
112 VSD Fault 12 191 VSD Fault 91
113 VSD Fault 13 … Unused
114 VSD Fault 14 210 KTY Error (VSD Fault)
115 VSD Fault 15 211 Fans Error (VSD Fault)
116 VSD Fault 16 212 ECB Error (VSD Fault)
117 VSD Fault 17 213 Broken Belt (VSD Fault)
… Unused 214 Clock Failure (VSD Fault)
123 VSD Fault 23 215 End of Curve (VSD Fault)
124 VSD Fault 24
125 VSD Fault 25
126 VSD Fault 26
127 VSD Fault 27

EN-60 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

EN

X-SERIES SYSTEM CONTROLS CONNECTION

The Xe-70M controller is designed to interface to an Ingersoll Rand X-Series Figure 137
System Controller using Belden 9841 or equivalent RS-485 cable. In order
to connect to the network, the cable must be connected to port X04 on the
controller as shown in the diagrams below. Note that up to 8 (X8I) or 12 (X12I)
devices can be daisy chained together in an X-Series network.:

Figure 135

X e7 0M P h o e n ix 2 P in
C o n n e cto r
L2
2

1
L1
 Enabling System Control Capabilities
In order to communicate properly with the X-Series system controller, the
Xe-70M must have the following setpoints correctly set.
2 1
On the Operator Settings tab, page 3 (Fixed Speed) or page 2 (Variable
X 04 Speed).

L2 Verify that the COM control setpoint is enabled (Checkbox is filled in) as
L1 shown below. If this setpoint is not selected, the system controller will be
unable to load or unload the machine.

 RS-485 Network Additionally, for fixed speed machines, make sure that the Enable Auto-
Restart setpoint is enabled (checkbox is filled in) or the compressor will
continue to run when unloaded by the system controller.
RS-485 data communications and other low voltage signals can be
subject to electrical interference. Figure 138

This potential can result in intermittent malfunction or anomaly that is

difficult to diagnose. To avoid this possibility always use earth shielded
cables, securely bonded to a known good earth at one end. In addition, give
careful consideration to cable routing during installation.
1. Never route an RS-485 data communications or low voltage signal
cable alongside a high voltage 3- phase power supply cable. If it is
necessary to cross the path of a power supply cable(s), always cross at
a right angle.
2. If it is necessary to follow the route of power supply cables for a
short distance (for example: from a compressor unit to a wall along a After the address and COM control have been set, be sure that Integral
suspended cable tray) attach the RS-485 or signal cable on the outside Sequencing is disabled by navigating to Integral Sequencing, page 1 and
of an earthed cable tray such that the cable tray forms an earthed verifying that the Integral sequencing setpoint is disabled (checkbox not
electrical interference shield. filled in) as shown below:
3. Where possible, never route an RS-485 or signal cable near Figure 139
to equipment or devices that may be a source of electrical
interference (for example: 3-phase power supply transformer, high
voltage switchgear unit, frequency inverter drive module, radio
communications antenna).
Figure 136

Once these setpoints are correctly set and the machine is started locally, the
system controller should see status information from the compressor and be
able to take control.

 RS-485 Address Selection

Each compressor connected to the network will have a unique assigned
address, starting at compressor 1 increasing sequentially to the number of
compressors connected to the network.
The RS-485 address for each compressor is set on the General Settings Tab,
Page 7. The controller’s default RS-485 Address setting is 1
Additionally, the active protocol must be set to Airbus485.

80447204 Rev B EN-61

93014.15.07

EN

NOTICES AND DISCLAIMERS

Machine models represented in this manual may be used in various locations worldwide. Machines sold and shipped into European community countries
shall display the EC Mark and conform to various directives. In such cases, the design specification of this compressor has been certified as complying with EC
directives. Any modification to any part is absolutely prohibited and would result in the CE certification and marking being rendered invalid.
The contents of this manual are considered to be proprietary and confidential to Ingersoll Rand and should not be reproduced without the prior written
permission of Ingersoll Rand.
Nothing contained in this document is intended to extend any promise, warranty or representation, expressed or implied, regarding the Ingersoll Rand
products described herein. Any such warranties or other terms and conditions of sale of products shall be in accordance with the standard terms and
conditions of sale for such products, which are available upon request.
Ingersoll Rand reserves the right to make changes and improvements to products without notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes
or add such improvements to products sold previously.
Details of approved equipment are available from Ingersoll Rand Service departments.
The company accepts no responsibility for errors in translation of this manual from the original English version.
The design of this Compressor package and certain features within it are covered by patents held by Ingersoll Rand and patents pending.

WARRANTY
The Company warrants that the equipment manufactured by it and delivered hereunder will be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of
twelve months from the date of placing the Equipment in operation or eighteen months from the date of shipment from the factory, whichever shall first
occur. The Purchaser shall be obligated to promptly report any failure to conform to this warranty, in writing to the Company in said period, whereupon
the Company shall, at its option, correct such nonconformity, by suitable repair to such equipment or, furnish a replacement part F.O.B. point of shipment,
provided the Purchaser has stored, installed, maintained and operated such Equipment in accordance with good industry practices and has complied
with specific recommendations of the Company. Accessories or equipment furnished by the Company, but manufactured by others, shall carry whatever
warranty the manufacturers have conveyed to the Company and which can be passed on to the Purchaser. The Company shall not be liable for any repairs,
replacements, or adjustments to the Equipment or any costs of labor performed by the Purchaser or others without Company‘s prior written approval.
The effects of corrosion, erosion and normal wear and tear are specifically excluded. Performance warranties are limited to those specifically stated within
the Company‘s proposal. Unless responsibility for meeting such performance warranties are limited to specified tests, the Company‘s obligation shall be to
correct in the manner and for the period of time provided above.
THE COMPANY MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE, AND ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.
Correction by the Company of nonconformities whether patent or latent, in the manner and for the period of time provided above, shall constitute
fulfilment of all liabilities of the Company for such non conformities whether based on contract, warranty negligence, indemnity, strict liability or otherwise
with respect to or arising out of such Equipment.
The purchaser shall not operate Equipment which is considered to be defective, without first notifying the Company in writing of its intention to do so. Any
such use of Equipment will be at Purchaser‘s sole risk and liability.
Note that this is Ingersoll Rand standard warranty. Any warranty in force at the time of purchase of the compressor or negotiated as part of the purchase
order may take precedence over this warranty.

EN-62 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
93014.15.07

ingersollrandproducts.com
© 2014 Ingersoll-Rand
93014.15.07

80447204
修订版 B
2014年5月

微油螺杆空气压缩机
R30, R37, R45, R55, R75, R90, R110, R132, R160

产品信息
EN Product Information
ZH 产品信息

保存这些说明
93014.15.07

ZH

目录
关于本手册. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 页面导航. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

安全 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 访问参数. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

运输/接收/调试 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 仪表盘图标 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

运输 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 文件夹选项（恒速） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

接收 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 主文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

拆包与搬运 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 “OPERATOR SETTINGS（操作人员设置）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . 15

长期存储 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TRIP HISTORY（警报历史记录）. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
安装 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
“MAINTENANCE（维护）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
在工厂中的使用位置 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
排放管道和冷凝管道 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
“STATUS（状态）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
电气 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
“FACTORY SETTINGS（出厂设置）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
变速驱动器 (VSD) 压缩机的电气特别注意事项 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
文件夹选项（变速） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
初级输入电源 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
主文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
如何接地. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
“OPERATOR SETTINGS（操作人员设置）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . 24
如何查明使用哪个系统 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
“EVENTS（事件）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
高电压情况和次级保护 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TRIP HISTORY（警报历史记录）. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
功率因素补偿电容器 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
“MAINTENANCE（维护）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
断开电磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波器 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
专用变压器或发电机供应的电源. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
“STATUS（状态）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
控制电源变压器连接 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
“FACTORY SETTINGS（出厂设置）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
水冷却装置 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
冷却水管道 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 操作说明（XE-70M 控制器） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

水系统装置排气. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 用户界面 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

水系统装置排水. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 LED 状态图标 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

水质建议. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 命令键 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

集成式干燥器 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 导航键 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

环境限制 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 显示布局. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
文件夹导航和图标 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
简介 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
PAGE NAVIGATION（页面导航） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
集成式干燥机的操作 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ACCESSING PARAMETERS（访问参数） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
变速驱动器 (VSD) 的操作说明 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
仪表盘图标 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
基本操作 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
仪表盘状态消息. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
开始之前. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
恒速压缩机 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
初始检查顺序 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
主文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
启动顺序. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
操作人员设置文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
停机顺序. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
“EVENTS（事件）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
预热模式. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
离心风扇控制 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
维护文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
紧急停止. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
常规设置文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
在紧急停止之后重启 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
次序联控文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
操作说明 (XE-90M 控制器). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
状态文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
用户界面 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
出厂设置文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
LED 状态图标 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
变速压缩机 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
命令键 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
主文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
导航键 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
操作人员设置文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
显示布局. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
“EVENTS（事件）”文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
文件夹导航和图标 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

ZH-2 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
目录
维护文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
常规设置文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
次序联控文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
状态文件夹 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
出厂设置文件夹. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
MODBUS 连接和控制 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
连接 MODBUS 网络. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
RS-485 网络. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
MODBUS 地址选择 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
MODBUS MASTER 设置 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
80447204 Rev B
ZH
R4 至 37 KW 恒速 MODBUS 表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
R5.5 至 37 KW 变速 MODBUS 表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
X 系列系统控制连接 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
RS-485 网络. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
RS-485 地址选择 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
正在启用系统控制功能 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
公告与声明. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
保证 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
ZH-3
93014.15.07

ZH

关于本手册
本手册的目的是提供压缩机的场地规划，安装和操作指南。
有关支持文件请参考表 1。
表 1：产品手册
按地区分类的部件/文件号
出版 产品
美洲 EMEIA * 亚太区
产品安全信息手册 全部 80446313 80446156 80446321
产品维修信息手册 全部 80447170 80447196 80447212
R30-37 24342156
R37-45 80448095
产品部件信息手册 R55-75 80447592
R90-160 kW Single-Stage 80446057
R90-160 kW Two-Stage 80446065
* 欧洲、中东和非洲
还可提供产品规格表及参考图。

安全
• 请找到、阅读、了解并遵循产品上和所有手册中的所有危险、警告、 • 您有责任向他人传达此信息。
小心和操作说明。未能遵守产品随附手册、本手册或产品附带的任何
• 如果您有任何关于安全或程序的问题未包含在本手册中，请咨询您的
标注与标签中说明的安全预防措施可能会导致死亡、严重伤害或财产
主管或联系 Ingersoll Rand 的任何办公室或合格的 Ingersoll Rand 经 销
损失。
商。
• 请检查是否所有标注、标签和参数标牌（铭牌）都在适当的位置并且
清晰易读。

运输/接收/调试

 运输  拆包与搬运
确保在运输过程中使设备固定不动。 运送压缩机时，通常用聚乙稀薄膜或其他包装材料进行包装。如果必须使
用小刀拆除包装，请确保不要损坏压缩机外层的油漆。
 接收
压缩机底座上有叉车槽，使用叉车可移动机器。请确保叉车的车叉与两侧
在签署交货回单之前，请检查是否有损坏及是否缺少部件。如果发现明显
的损坏或部件缺少，请在交货回单上做出适当标注，然后签署回单。请立 的槽完全吻合。此外，可使用专用的起吊架通过起吊机或吊车搬移压缩
即与运输公司联系进行检查。
机。请仅使用标记的起吊点。
所有材料均应保留在接收位置供运输公司检查。
丢弃包装和托盘、设备放置妥当后，请将黄漆运输支架从弹性底坐上拆
交货回单已签署且其中未标注存在损坏或部件缺少，则视为产品已“清
洁”交付。随后的申诉则被视为隐蔽的损坏索赔。请与运输公司直接联系 下，留作以后使用或丢弃：
处理损坏索赔事宜。 用于变速及恒速 (R30-37 kW)
如果在收到产品之后发现损坏（隐蔽的损坏），应在收到产品 15 天内通 • (2) 空气端和分离槽支座上的托架。
知运输公司，并应通过电话（且附书面确认）请求进行检查。在进行隐 • 电机安装支架中的 (1) 个支架。
蔽 的损坏索赔时，负责证实压缩机是在运输过程中损坏的责任人又转换
为 索赔者。 对于变速驱动器 (VSD) (R37e-160 kW)
请查看产品铭牌以验证是否为所订购的型号，并查看电机铭牌以确定其是 • 分离槽处 (3) 个支架
否与您的电气状况兼容。 • 来自空气端排放弯管的 (1) 个支架。
请确保电气外壳和组件适合安装环境。 • 空气端支架中的 (1) 个支架。

对于恒速 (FS) (R37e-160 kW)

• 分离槽处 (3) 个支架
• 空气端支架中的 (1) 个支架。
• 电机安装支架中的 (1) 个支架。

 长期存储
如果产品在接收到的 6 个月内未使用，应准备进行长期存储。请与
Ingersoll Rand 联系了解详细信息。

ZH-4 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

安装
 在工厂中的使用位置
图 1：典型的空气系统

7 2
4 4
8 3
6 5

图例
⌞ᝅ
1. 压缩机
2. 空气储气罐 除了冷凝液清除管道外，该产品不应随附塑料或 PVC 管道，也不应用
于下行的任何管道。
3. 空气干燥器
4. 压缩空气过滤器 ⌞ᝅ
5. 系统用气点 由于排放出来的空气中含有少量的压缩机润滑油，因此应小心确保下游
设备的兼容性。
6. 通风/排放弯管
7. 隔离阀 当两台螺旋压缩机平行操作时，请在共用储气罐前为每个压缩机提供一
8. 储气罐（“湿罐“） 个 隔离阀 (7) 和排放弯管 (6)。请确保布置了排放管道，以防水被迫进入
未 运行的机器。
• 客户可在设备与压力系统之间安装柔性元件，避免振动传导。
建议在空气干燥剂为再生干燥剂时使用贮液罐 (8)，以防在工厂空气需求
• 压缩机可以安装在任何可以支撑它的平整地面上。建议安装在干燥、
缓慢时进行循环吹净期间使压缩机短期循环。
通风、空气尽量洁净的环境中。
• 为产品位置选择的区域应远离尘埃、化学物质、金属屑、油漆汽雾和 内置式后冷却器可将排气温度降低至露点以下（针对大多数环境条件）。
过量喷涂。 因此，会凝结一定量的水蒸汽。为去除冷凝液，每台含内置式后冷却器的
• 硬表面会反射噪音，从而导致分贝级别明显提高。当噪音很大时，请 压缩机均配备联合冷凝液分离器/排放弯管。
用橡胶或软木板垫在机器下，以降低噪音。可能需要挠性管道。 压缩机排放管道附近应安装地漏或隔离阀。应将排放管道连接到底座上的
• 请参阅总布置图，以了解正常操作和维修的最小空间要求。 冷凝液排放口。
• 应按照国家或地方法规要求在控制面板门正面前保留最小空间。 ⌞ᝅ
• 环境温度应避免高于 46°C (115°F)，且应避开湿度较高的区域。
排放管道应该从底座向下倾斜才能正常工作。为便于检查自动排放弯管
的情况，排放管道应包含一个开放的漏斗。 排水管的最小内径必须为
⌞ᝅ 8 mm（5/16 英寸）

建议压缩机周围至少保留 1 米（3.3 英尺）。如果顶部空间受限，则应

将废气从机器中排出或导出。 ⌞ᝅ
螺杆式压缩机不应与往复式压缩机装在同一个空气系统中，除非使用诸 对于可能不包含储气罐 (2) 的低容量系统，压缩机响应时间可能需要调
如共用储气罐之类的隔离设施。我们建议两种压缩机都用单独的空气管 整。请联系您当地的 Ingersoll Rand 服务提供商。
路与共用储气罐连接起来。
设备在装运时使用了固定装置。请确保拆除这些固定装置以便在操作过 ⌞ᝅ
程中自由地移动驱动电机总线。每个固定装置均漆成黄色。
切勿用压缩机支撑排放管道。

 排放管道和冷凝管道
 电气
请参见图 1。
压缩机应根据所有适用标准与法规（当地、省/自治区/直辖市、国家/地
安装新压缩机 (1) 时考察总体空气系统是非常重要的。其目的是确保有一 区、联邦等）正确接地。
个安全而有效的总体系统。
此压缩机的安装应符合所有适用标准与法规（当地、省/自治区/直辖市、
必须注意含水率。安装空气干燥器 (3) 总是有利的，因为适当选择并安装 国家/地区、联邦等）。
的空气干燥器可以将含水率降到零。
压缩机应该有装在它附近的单独绝缘体。应当根据“通用信息”一节中
建议使用储气罐 (2)，以确保总体系统容量足够。 提供的数据，并按照认可法规的要求，选择用于保护电路和压缩机的熔
排放管道至少应与压缩机的排放接口一样大。所有管道及配件都应经过 断器。
适 当评估，以适合排放压力。排放管道不应对设备施加任何未经分析的 馈电电缆的尺寸应由客户/电气承包商决定，以确保电路得到均衡，而且
力 矩或力。 不因其他电气设备而过载。距离适当馈电点的电缆长度是至关重要的，因
最好安装管道过滤器 (4)。 为压降可能会降低压缩机的性能。

采用相应工具 (6) 排放分离槽上最低压力止回阀中排放管道系统下游的压

⌞ᝅ
力和首个系统隔离阀 (7) 上游的压力。
此产品具有内置排放止回阀。无需外部止回阀。在 1 米（36 英寸）的压 对于 VSD，电缆规格可能相差很大，因此线路感应器配置了铜母线接
缩机排放范围之内需要隔离阀 (7)。 口。这些连接可以接受介于 6 毫米和 12 毫米之间的螺栓。

80447204 Rev B ZH-5

93014.15.07

ZH

输入终端 L1-L2-L3 的馈电电缆接口应该紧固、干净。  如何接地

应用的电压必须与产品参数标牌上的额定值相符合。 在多数情况下，必须将星形系统接地。 参见当地的电气规范。 在将星形
系统接地后，对地电压将变得稳定和可控。 这可防止高对地电压损坏系
控制电路变压器具有不同的电压分接头。确保在启动之前根据特定的适用
统。 下图是星形连接源的典型接地中性（中心）点。
电压进行设置。
三角形系统可以不必接地。 如果将三角形系统接地，则将其单相接地。
卸下盲板凿孔，用于输入电源连接。如有必要在控制箱上的其他位置凿
您还可以将其单相的中央抽头接地。
孔，请小心操作，切勿使金属屑进入启动器或控制箱内的其他电气部件
中。如果使用另一个孔，应当堵住原来的孔。 图 3： 星形和三角形接地
馈电电缆应当在启动器盒中适当密封，以提供正确的进口保护。恒速启动
器盒额定适合 NEMA 4 /IP65，而 VSD 启动器盒额定适合 NEMA12/IP54。 接地的星形连接（典型）　 一角接地的三角形连接（非典型）
对于 VSD 启动器盒，馈电电缆应当进行密封，以防脏污空气从过滤器旁 　
逸出。
完成电气安装后，请检查风扇或风扇电机旋转是否正常。
VSD 设备设计用于供电系统与附近住宅及商业区分开的场合。如果此设
备用于共享本地电网的轻工业、居民或商业环境中，则可能需要采取进
一 步的射频 (RF) 屏蔽措施。有关 RF 过滤选件的详细信息，请咨询当地 　
经销 商/供应商。
VSD 压缩机的电气箱中具有抗冷凝加热器和温控开关。此电路可连接到独 　
立的 110V 或 230V 单相电源，这取决于安装所处的国家/地区。应对电源
安装适当的熔断器，并且压缩机附近应安装独立的隔离开关。验证恒温器 未接地的三角形连接（典型） 中心接地的三角形连接（非典型）
已调整为 29°C (85° F)。这应根据认可的法规进行操作。最好（并且有 　 　
时 必须）显示相应的标志，警告本设备含两个独立的供电系统，在进行
任何 操作前应将它们隔离。
对于 VSD 压缩机，加热电路还可由 110V 分接头的控制变压器供电，并
按接线图所示进行连接（独立于本手册提供）。
　
⌞ᝅ
在首次启动之前或长期关闭置于寒冷潮湿环境中时，必须由合格的电工 　
测试主电机和风扇电机的绝缘情况。
参见电气规范，将压缩机接地，以永久保护接地连接。 压缩机电气外壳
包含带有“PE”标识的电源接地端子。 典型的初级输入电源为包括三根
 变速驱动器 (VSD) 压缩机的电气特别注意事项 电源线和一根地线的四线连接。 将地线与接地端子连接。
 初级输入电源
⌞ᝅ
压缩机的初级输入电源可能来自不同变压器来源和配置。 最典型的来源
和配置是次级星形连接和次级三角形连接。 如果只有三根电源线，没有地线，则将接地端子与合适的建筑物地面连
接。 不要将机架悬浮安装在未将电气连接到接地源的地方。
图 2： 星形和三角形配置

星形连接　 三角形连接

ZH-6 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

 如何查明使用哪个系统 表 2： 额定输入电压

标称额定电压 (VAC) 380-460

⌞ᝅ 相 3
使用万用表测量电压。 所有显示电压均可能在 10% 上下波动。 频率（赫兹） 50/60
最小/最大电压容差 (%) 400-460 伏 ± 10
380 伏 +10, -6
在接地星形连接的 480 伏网络中：
相间电压最小/最大不平衡率 (%) 3
• 每一相对地（中性）电压约为 277 伏（480/√3）左右。
最小/最大频率容差 (%) ±5
• 277 伏是 480 伏系统的标称显示值。
• 对于 380 伏、415 伏、440 伏和 575 伏系统可能显示其他电压值。 见 ⌞ᝅ
表 2.
如果不遵守这些额定数值限制可能会导致压缩机损坏，使所有厂家保
• 相间电压与初级供电电压（575、480、460、440、415 或 380 伏）相 修失效。
同。
 高电压情况和次级保护
⌞ᝅ
配有变速驱动器的压缩机包含金属氧化物变阻器 (MOV)。 MOV 可防止典
在具有 30 欧姆以上高阻抗中性连接的星形网络中，您必须断开两个电 型电压情况下的 VSD 损坏。 极高电压情况可能会损坏 MOV 和 VSD。 以
磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波器。 参见第 3 页的“断开电磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波 下是极高电压情况的示例：
器”。 • 雷电
• 功率因素电容器开关
在未接地的三角形连接网络中：
• 电焊
• 此网络通过电容接地。
• 晶闸管
• 通过连接每相导线之间的寄生电容接地。
• 对于 480 伏网络，所有对地相电压约为 277 伏左右。 如果存在极高电压情况，您必须增加次级保护以防止损坏压缩机。

• 由于电容接地可能会有各种不同显示值。
• 相间电压与初级供电电压（575、480、440 或 380 伏）相同。
未接地三角形网络的主要功能是为了在出现接地故障时使电源不间断。
此时，未接地网络将以地面为参考。 初级断路器只有在两相电路均接地
时才开启。 因此，可以使三相未接地三角形网络中的一相电路接地，或
者在安装压缩机时使网络不接地，但留有接地相以备未来使用。
⌞ᝅ
在未接地的三角形网络中，您必须断开两个电磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波器。
如果不这样做，可能会损坏滤波器和 VSD， 从而使厂家保修失效。 参
见“断开电磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波器”。
在三角形连接网络中：
• 只有对地的两相线路有电压，第三相线路电压为零。 零电压的相路为
接地线路。
• 两个未接地相电压与初级供电电压（480 伏系统的对地电压为 480
伏）相同。
• 相间电压与初级供电电压（480、440 或 380 伏）相同。
⌞ᝅ
对于初级驱动装置具有变速驱动器的所有压缩机，将压缩机的 L2 输入
端接地。 如果您不遵守此程序，压缩机将不工作。
⌞ᝅ
如果在安装中发现相路接地，务必了解接地相是故意（接地）或无意（
未接地以应对接地故障情况）。
⌞ᝅ
MOV 损坏表明压缩机暴露在极高电压情况下。
因极高电压导致 MOV 损坏将使厂家保修及延长保修合同失效。
 功率因素补偿电容器
配有变速驱动器的压缩机可以不必应用功率因素补偿。 不过，如果您将
压缩机连接到含有补偿电容器的系统中，应遵守以下说明：
• 在将压缩机连接到初级电源时，不要将高功率电容器连接到电源线。
高电压情况可能会使压缩机保护电路开路，甚至可能会损坏压缩机。
• 如果在将压缩机连接到电源线时逐渐增加或减少电容器负载，确保连
接步骤足够缓慢，以免引起电压瞬变导致压缩机保护电路开路或压缩
机损坏。
• 检查配有 AC 驱动器的系统中功率因素补偿装置使用是否正确。 补偿
装置通常必须具有阻断反应器或谐波滤波器。
• 不要将任何设备连接到压缩机 AC 驱动器的输出端。
⌞ᝅ
如果不遵守电气安装说明，厂家保修和任何延长保修合同均将失效。
 断开电磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波器
在一些类型的电源系统中，您必须断开电磁兼容性 (EMC) 滤波器。 如果
不这样做，电源系统可能会通过 EMC 滤波器接地。 这可能会导致危险情
况发生，并导致变速驱动器损坏。 参见图 3 和图 4，了解用来禁用 EMC
滤波器必须移除的两根跳线的位置。

80447204 Rev B ZH-7

93014.15.07

ZH

如果电源系统属于以下情况，则断开两个 EMC 滤波器：  专用变压器或发电机供应的电源

• 未接地（悬浮） 高阻抗电源
• 高阻抗接地系统（高于 30 欧姆）
压缩机可以在短路功率比驱动器额定功率大 15 倍（线路阻抗小于百分之
• 一角接地的三角形系统 七）的工业电网中使用。 如果在发电机组或专用变压器上使用压缩机，
需确保网络正确。
䆜઀ 如果安装条件超出以下特征，我们建议您断开电磁兼容性滤波器电容与接
地点的连接：
在压缩机输入端接通电源时，不要尝试安装或移除 EMC 滤波器和跳
• 配电网络没有接地
线。
• 驱动器连接点的短路电流与其额定电流之比低于 30
⌞ᝅ 低阻抗电源
如果您断开内部的 EMC 滤波器，变速驱动器将不符合欧洲电磁兼容性 如果安装具有以下特征，变速驱动器可以承受低阻抗：
要求。 如果您运行无 EMC 滤波器的压缩机，则压缩机可能会对电气设 • 变压器在中压/低压 (MV/LV) 电源变压器附近安装，
备造成不必要的干扰。 只有当电磁兼容性在您区域不需要时，您才能
继续运行无 EMC 滤波器的压缩机。 • 一组功率因数校正电容器在变压器次级端并行连接

在电压降高于变压器初级端的情况下，设备终端的高浪涌电压风险高。
⌞ᝅ
线路阻抗百分比计算示例
您必须移除两根跳线仅适用于R37e-160。 一根跳线位于压缩机底部的 如果压缩机额定输入电流为 100 安培，线路电源的短路电流容量为 5000
MOV/EMC 金属盒内。 另一根跳线位于驱动器输入总线的印刷电路板 安培，则线路阻抗为 2%（100 安/5000 安）。
(PCB) 上。
 控制电源变压器连接
图 4： 第一根跳线的位置 控制电路变压器对于不同的电源线电平具有不同的电压初级抽头。 确保
在启动压缩机之前针对合适接通电压设置抽头。
Ａ　－第一根跳线 
图 6： 控制电源变压器连接

图 5： 第二根跳线的位置

$ದ䟄䄟㘴♲㨎᧤⇜ℝㄤ捷
%ದ䦃㿐㋊兎㎮ㄣ㨎
&ದ㘶Ⓟ㨎
'ದ(0&㨎
(ದ⑆☃歝㓖
)ದ䶻ℛ㫈悂兎

⌞ᝅ
该设备可能不符合 EMC 要求，无法连接至同时为民用建筑供电的供电
网络。 如果需要连接至同时为民用建筑供电的供电网络，须安装额外
的 EMC 滤波器。

ZH-8 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

 水冷却装置  水系统装置排水
 冷却水管道 如果水系统装置必须将水排空，请使用特定于您所拥有的水冷却选件的
以 下步骤。
⌞ᝅ 淡水冷却器（镀铜板热交换器）：

与压缩机组相连接的水管应当至少等于或大于机组的接口规格。水管规 1. 将进水管路从装置后部的接口上断开。
格不能过小。
2. 切断压缩机出水管路中的止水阀。
进口和出口管道上都应安装带有侧排放阀的隔离阀。为维护冷却器的洁
净与可靠性，请务必在进入管道上安装筛孔大小为 2 毫米的滤网。可从 3. 使系统将水完全排出。
Ingersoll Rand 购买过滤器。
苛刻水环境冷却器（壳式及管式热交换器）：
如应用于海水（仅限海水选配件），则不推荐使用锌电极，因为接触海水
1. 从水系统装置后面的接口上断开进水和排水管道。
时，它会损坏 70/30 铜镍合金管上的氧化铜膜。为尽可能减小对冷却器的
电偶腐蚀并为其提供最强的腐蚀防护，强烈建议在尽可能靠近空压机组进 2. 找到后冷却器和油冷却器。取下这些冷却器底部的排水塞。
水接口处连接一段铁管（长度 >300 毫米）。铁管将用作铜镍合金管的防
蚀阳极，因而应视为定期维护与更换的物品。为此，应以适当方式安装该 3. 打开后冷却器和油冷却器顶部的排气口
段铁管以便轻松进行更换（例如用管子接头更换）。
4. 使系统将水完全排出。
空压机设有常关式电磁阀，安装在机组内的出水侧。阀与空压机的控制电
路连接，当空压机停止运转时，阀就会关闭。 调节后冷却器调节阀

安装空压机组前，请仔细检查您的水系统装置。请确保管道不存在水锈和
沉淀物，因为这可能会限制流向空压机组的水流量。如果水洁净度较差，
则建议在进水管道上安装过滤装置。
压缩机正确运行要求提供冷却水流的最大供应温度为 46° C (115° F)。
请参阅压缩机工程数据表，了解冷却水流速。
请参阅独立于本手册提供的管道和仪器仪表图。冷却器以“并行”水流排
列来布管，并带有一个可手动控制流经后冷却器的水流的调节阀。“后冷
却器调节阀”是出厂时设置的，并不需要进行调节，但如果该调节阀功能
出现问题，可按下列步骤调节。
1. 沿顺时针方向将阀完全关闭，然后打开两整转。

水管中应安装水温和压力计量器，以便用于排除水系统中的故障。理想状 2. 当机器载荷运行时，请查看微控制器显示屏上的机组排放温度。
况下，水压应在 3 到 5 bar（43.5 到 72.5 psi）之间，而不应高于 10 bar 应比进水口温度约高 8° C (15° F)。
(145 psi)。
3. 如温度过高，请将阀打开 1/4 转并等待一分钟。如温度过低，请
水的洁净度也极其重要。清除冷却器的污垢是客户的责任。因此，强烈建
议正确的水质应达到本部分后面“水质建议”中所列的要求。 将阀关闭 1/4 转并等待一分钟。渐进重复这一步骤，直至达到理
想温度。
 水系统装置排气
4. 在阀上放置“警告 - 请勿调整”标签或者安装锁定装置。
空气应从系统的出水侧排出，以免出现性能不良及水击作用。由于空压机
会根据您选择“淡水冷却”或“苛刻水环境冷却”系统而使用不同类型的  水质建议
热交换器，因此排放过程不同。请务必遵循下列正确步骤。
检查水冷空压机的冷却系统时经常会忽视水质问题。水质可决定热传输率
淡水冷却器（镀铜板热交换器）： 的效率以及水系统装置ve 寿命内所保持的流速。应注意到，任何冷却系
1. 切断压缩机出水管路中的止水阀。 统中所使用的水的质量都无法在系统运行期间保持不变。蒸发、腐蚀、化
学和温度变化、通风、水锈和生物的形成都会影响水的成分。冷却系统的
2. 打开进水阀，让水流入机组。 大部分问题首先表现为热交换器速度降低，随后水流速度降低或压降增
加，最终使系统受到损坏。
3. 让所有空气从系统逸出，从出水口观察水流情况。
水垢：形成水垢会阻碍有效传热，但有助于预防腐蚀。因此，内表面需要
4. 连接止水阀。 有一层薄的均匀的碳酸钙涂层。形成水垢的可能的最主要原因是水中的碳
酸钙沉淀。这取决于温度及 pH 值。pH 值越高，形成水垢的可能性就越
苛刻水环境冷却器（壳式及管式热交换器）： 大。可通过水处理方法控制水垢。
1. 找到后冷却器和润滑油冷却器顶部的水系统放气旋塞。 腐蚀：相对于水垢而言，另一问题就是腐蚀。氯化物会产生问题是因为氯
2. 打开进水阀，使水流入机组。 化物的量和导电性。低 pH 水平可加剧腐蚀，并提高溶解氧的水平。
污垢：生物和有机物质（残渣）也会产生问题，但在温度升高的环境中
3. 打开放气旋塞，排出系统中的所有空气。当从排放阀可看到水
（ 如冷却处理），却不再是主要问题。如果污垢导致了堵塞，可进行商
时，关闭排放阀。 业震 动处理。

80447204 Rev B ZH-9

93014.15.07

ZH

为确保压缩机冷却系统具有良好的运行寿命和性能，建议的可接受的水成分范围如下：

表 3：冷却水成分的可接受限制

可接受的最大限制
物质 检测时间间隔 淡水（镀铜板热交换器） 脏水/海水（壳式及管式热交换器）
朗格利尔指数 (LI) 每月 0 to 1 -0.5 到 2.5
氨 [NH3]，ppm 每月 <1 <2
氨 [NH4-1]，ppm 每月 <2 <5
氯化物 [Cl-]，ppm 每月 <80 <1000
铜 [Cu]，ppm 每周 <0.01 <0.5
溶解氧 (DO) [O2]，ppm 每月 <0.1 <3
铁 + 锰 [Fe + Mn]，ppm 每月 <0.3 <2
硝酸盐 [NO3-]，ppm 每月 <100 <125
油和油脂，ppm 每月 <5 <5
二氧化硅 (silica) [SiO2]，ppm 每月 <30 <100
硫酸盐 [SO4-2]，ppm 每月 <70 <250
 集成式干燥器  环境限制
请勿将冷凝排放口与其他增压排水管线置于一个密闭的回路中。确保冷凝 标准压缩机组专用于以下情况：
排水管道畅通。连接冷凝排水管道时应该确保排水时声级最小。 • 仅室内
请确保以负责任的方式处理所有冷凝物，处理方式要符合所有适用标准与 • 不被视为高尘区域的区域。
法规（当地、省/自治区/直辖市、国家/地区、联邦等）。
• 环境温度范围：2 至 46° C (35-115° F)
干燥器和压缩机周围的环境空气中不能有任何固体或气体污染物。所有压
缩和冷凝后的气体可能生成会损坏压缩机或干燥器内部组件的酸性或化学 Ingersoll Rand 提供以下适用于可延伸环境限制的恒速装置选配件：
物质。要特别小心硫、氨、氯以及在海水环境的安装。 • 室外修改
• 海平面低环境温度选配件（-23 至 46°C/-15 至 115°F）
• 海平面高环境温度选配件（2 至 55° C/35 至 131°F）
• 高尘空气过滤器
• 高尘机组过滤器

ZH-10 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

简介
压缩机由电机驱动，属触点冷却螺杆型，各种必需部件均已安装，电路已
连接好，底架已安装。因此它是一个自成一体的空压机机组。 ⌞ᝅ
标准压缩机的设计环境温度范围介于 2° C 和 46° C（35° F 至 115° FS 压缩机不得与 VSD 压缩机连接。在更改变频器功率前，请联系您当
F）之间。标准最高温度 46° C (115° F) 适用于海拔 1000 米（3280 英 地的 Ingersoll Rand 代表。
尺）以下的高度。当超过此高度时，如果使用标准电机，则需要大幅降
低 环境温度。
可使用板式电子控制器管理压缩机。控制器与驱动系统协同工作，使压缩
ቅᗹ
机以不同的速度运行，从而以目标压力提供压缩空气。 对于 FS 型号，当用气量低时，压缩机可能无法达到正常操作温度。以
对于恒速 (FS) 型号，容量通过“开关管路”自动控制。压缩机将开始运 低要求进行持续操作可能会导致在冷却剂中产生冷凝物。如果发生此类
行，以保持固定的排放管压力，同时提供在空气需求变化较大的工厂使用 情况，冷却剂的润滑性可能会减弱，这样容易损坏压缩机。
的自动重启系统。 压缩机应有足够的载荷时间。
所提供的面板仪表可指示压缩机的运行状况和一般状态。
空气/冷却剂混合物从压缩机主机排放到分离系统中。该系统把排出气体  集成式干燥机的操作
中的绝大部分冷却剂清除掉，仅有若干 ppm 的残存。冷却剂返回到冷却
系统中，空气通过后冷却器后，再通过水分离器排出压缩机。 在默认模式下，干燥机不运行。必须按下关闭按钮以关闭干燥机。

空气通过冷却风扇吸入到机器中，并通过冷却剂冷却器和后冷却器。 在节能模式下，干燥机在空压机组的启动/关闭模式期间，在自动关闭之
前可能运行多达 6 分钟。请注意：如果空压机需要马上重新开启，干燥
通过对排放空气进行冷却，空气中自然包含的大部分水蒸汽被冷凝，然后 机 可长时间关闭。
由内置的水分离器和排放阀排放掉。
冷却系统包括冷却剂槽、冷却器、温控阀和过滤器。机组运行时，通过空 ⌞ᝅ
气压力将冷却剂从分离槽强行注入到温控阀芯中。温控阀芯位置（冷却剂 如果 ISO 4 级露点标准对您的应用至关重要，则应在卸载模式（固定速
温度的直接结果）将确定冷却剂是在冷却剂中循环、绕过冷却器、还是结 度）或空闲模式（可变速度）下启动空压机并运行一分钟，以让干燥机
合这两种方式来维持最佳的压缩机进气温度。控制此温度以防水蒸气发生 在空压机开始提供压缩空气之前达到所要求的露点。
冷凝。在足够高的温度下注入冷却剂时，排放空气冷却剂混合温度将保持
在露点以上。
对于 VSD 型号，系统由一种控制逻辑增强，该逻辑使冷却风扇速度随进
气与排气温度而变化，从而更紧密地控制注入温度，同时节省风扇电机
能量。
压缩机附带了一个温度传感器，它可以在温度过高时关闭机组。此设置通
常为 109° C (228° F)。
使用旋装式的重尘冷却剂过滤器，可提供有效的冷却剂过滤。

80447204 Rev B ZH-11

93014.15.07
ZH
变速驱动器 (VSD) 的操作说明
 基本操作
⌞ᝅ
微控制器上所显示的语言和度量单位在出厂前已预设好。如果需要进行
更改，请联系您当地的 Ingersoll Rand 服务提供商。
 开始之前
请确保冷却剂的液位至少达到窥孔的中间，如有必要，请添加冷却剂。请
参阅维护程序，了解如何设置正确的液位。
确保打开排放空气隔离阀。打开主电气隔离开关。控制面板将点亮，表明
管道和控制电压是可用的。
打开启动器柜门，旋转控制器右侧的小旋钮可以调整显示对比度。
 初始检查顺序
如果压缩机获得初始的控制器电源或出现警报复位，则控制器将执行
初始检查顺序。当执行初始检查顺序时，控制器将显示信息“Checking
Machine（检查设备）”。
在初始检查顺序中，控制器将检查控制系统工作是否正常。在此过程中，
如发现有任何项目未生效，则将出现警报，设备不会启动。
完成初始检查程序后，控制器将显示“READY TO START（启动准备就
绪）”。该过程必须在 10 秒钟内完成。
 启动顺序
操作人员按下压缩机的启动按钮或当压缩机接收到远程开机命令时，压缩
机将初始启动。压缩机将开始载荷运行并将电机速度逐渐降到其最低速
度。达到最低速度后，压缩机将使用其速度调节系统来控制压力。当系统
压力达到目标压力时，压缩机将开始降低转速。如果系统压力上升至立即
停机压力设定点，则压缩机将停机。如果系统压力上升至自动停机设定点
并且压缩机以最低速度运行，而此时放气模式设置为关，则压缩机将停
机。但是，如果放气模式设置为开，则压缩机在停机前将打开放气阀长达
10 秒，或直到分离槽中的压力降至 2.4bar (35psi)。系统压力降至目标压
力之下后，压缩机将重启。
⌞ᝅ
在空压机首次启动时，应检查干燥器冷凝器风扇的旋转方向是否正确。
如果风扇没有按照旋转箭头标牌所指的方向旋转，则应调换主电源线或
启动箱接触器上的两条电线。 在调换电线之前，应执行正确的停机顺
序并锁定/标示主电源。
ZH-12
 停机顺序
可以通过本机或远程停止来停止空压机，也可通过故障停机或紧急停止来
关闭压缩机。以上所有情况都会导致压缩机立即停机，本机或远程停止除
外。本机或远程停止将打开放气阀，压缩机将在停机前将运行长达 10 秒
钟或一直运行到分离槽中的压力降至 2.4 bar (35psi)。如果系统压力达到
自动停机或立即停机压力设定点，则压缩机将停机。但是，如果压缩机因
为该原因而停机，它会在系统压力低于目标压力后自动重启。
⌞ᝅ
如设备必须紧急停止，请按下仪表板下的紧急停止按钮。
 预热模式
当压缩机空气端排放温度未达到两个连续操作循环所要求的预热温度
(82°C/180°F) 时，将会执行预热循环。在进行预热循环时，压缩机不会
停机，而是继续运行且放气阀处于打开状态。压缩机将以最低速度在恒速
模式下运行。风扇将以最低速度运行。压缩机将像这样运行大约五分钟。
在进行预热循环时，控制器将显示信息“Warm Up Mode（预热模式）”。
如果压力在这一时段降低，则压缩机将返回正常操作状态。
 离心风扇控制
风扇转速在某些条件下会发生变化，以辅助控制后冷却器的进气温度和冷
却剂的注入温度。离心风扇电机具有自己的可变速驱动器，可在压缩机启
动和停止时逐渐提高或降低转速。
 紧急停止
如设备必须紧急停机，请按下仪表板下的紧急停止按钮。
这将忽略正常的卸荷/停机按钮的作用，并立即停机。
⌞ᝅ
驱动器冷却风扇在驱动器停止时继续运行是一种常见情形。 风扇甚至
能在紧急停止 (E-Stop) 状态下运行。
 在紧急停止之后重启
如果因机器故障而关闭了机组，请在尝试重启前找到并排除故障。
如果因安全原因而关闭了机组，请在重启前确保机器是可以安全操作的。
重启设备前，请参阅本节前面的启动前和启动顺序说明。
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

ZH

操作说明 (XE-90M 控制器)

 用户界面 图标 名称 功能
控制器的标准用户界面配置包含膜和 LCD 显示屏。膜包含五个命令键（
Start [启动]、Stop [停止]、Load [载荷]、Unload [卸荷] 和 Reset [重置]）、
启动 启动压缩机。
四个导航键（Up [上]、Right [右]、Left [左] 和 Down [下]）以及编辑模式
选择键（Enter [确认]）。这些键与彩色图形显示屏和 LED 图标共同组成了
压缩机的用户界面。

图 7 : Xe-90M 停止压缩机。应按下此按钮来正常停止工作而
停止
非急停。

回车 使屏幕在导航模式和编辑模式间切换。

⌞ᝅ
变速压缩机上不使用“LOAD”（载荷）或“UNLOAD”（卸荷）键。

 导航键
有四个导航键“（UP [上]”、“RIGHT [右]”、“DOWN [下]”和“LEFT
[左]）”。未考虑“ENTER（确认）”键作为导航键时，其将用于结合导
航键进行选择或确认选择。

图 8：导航键
 LED 状态图标
三个 LED 图标用于从远处表示控制系统的当前状态，并且位于用户界面
的左上方。

表 4: LED 状态图标

图标 名称 功能
在未感应到警告或警报时亮起。可以处
确定 于“Ready（就绪）”或“Not Ready（未就
绪）”状态。 按下其中一个导航键将让用户沿导航路径移动。每次按下该键时，将执行
路径中的其他步骤。一旦到达导航路径的终点，按下该键多次会将用户返
在感应到警告（闪烁）或警报（常亮）时亮起。 回路径开头。按下相反的键，将让用户以相反的方向沿导航路径移动。到
警报 可以处于“Ready（就绪）”（警告）或“Not 达开头后，按下相反的键会让用户移至路径终点。
Ready（未就绪）”（警报）状态。  显示布局
图 9：显示布局
自动 当压缩机在自动重启模式下停机时亮起。

 命令键
这些键可命令控制器执行操作，如下表中所指定。按下任何这些键时，将
启动以下操作并记录在事件日志中

表 5：命令键

图标 名称 功能

--- 无

将压缩机置于选定操作模式。如果压力状况正
载荷 表 6 : 显示布局
确，装置将载荷。
图例 名称 说明
A 文件夹栏 使用选项卡以图形方式标示每个文件夹。
将压缩机置于卸荷状态。装置将以卸荷状态运
卸荷 B 标题栏 标示当前文件夹和页面（带下划线）。
行。
C 页面内容 当前页面的内容。
D 仪表盘 显示系统状态。

复位 更正警告和警报条件后，会清除警告和警报。

80447204 Rev B ZH-13

93014.15.07

ZH

 文件夹导航和图标 图 10：数字条目窗口
要在 LCD 显示屏上显示的选项卡文件夹之间移动，请按“RIGHT（向
右）”和“LEFT（向左）”键。导航从最后一个文件夹滚动至第一个文件
夹，反之亦可。

表 7: 文件夹栏图标
文件夹名称 图标 说明
系统性能和状态主要信息。控制器第一次通
Home（主页）
电时，此文件夹的第一个页面是默认页面。
Operator ⌞ᝅ
Settings（操 作 系统选项和配置设置。
人员设置） 并非所有页面上都有可调整的参数。某些页面只有只读信息。

Events（事
系统事件日志。  仪表盘图标
件）
Trip History（ 仪表盘旨在快速查看系统状态。下表列出了标准仪表盘图标和这些图标的
有关最新警报的详细信息。 定义。请注意，这些图标的颜色根据运行时应用设置的状态更改。
警报历史记 录
Graphing（图 表 9: 仪表盘图标
板上图解系统数据。（某些控制器选装）
解）
名称 图标 说明
Maintenance（
用于压缩机保养项目的状态和通知设置。
维护） 网络控制 启用网络控制。
General
Settings（常 规 常规设置，例如语言、时间和计量单位。 需要进行的 维修提醒将近或已过期
设置） 维修 （即：需要更换空气过滤器或滤油器）。
Integral
Sequencing（ 模块间通信状态和配置。 压缩机处于卸荷状态。
卸荷 或
次序联控）
载荷
Status（状 压缩机处于载荷状态。
所有模拟和数字 I/O 的测量或状态
态）

出厂设置 压缩机调节参数。还显示硬件和软件版本。  文件夹选项（恒速）

 主文件夹
 页面导航
页码 1：系统概览
选择所需文件夹之后，按下“DOWN（向下）”键后会移至页面选择区
域，然后使用“RIGHT（向右）”和“LEFT（向左）”键，来选择所需页 图 11：主文件夹
面。使用“UP（向上）”键，返回文件夹选项卡。

表 8: 标题栏页面图标

图标 说明
启动页面选择区域。

表示向右导航可显示更多页面。

表示向左导航可显示更多页面。

 访问参数
选择所需页面后，可以使用“DOWN（向下）”键选择页面的参数。
每 次按下“DOWN（向下）”键，光标将移至下一参数。使用“UP（向
上）”键，返回上一参数。
光标移动，因此在选择最后一个参数后，按下“DOWN（向下）”键会将
光标导航至文件夹栏。如果选择第一个参数，则按下“UP（向上）”键会
将光标移至页面选择区域。
选择后，可通过按下“ENTER（确认）”键，访问参数。使用导航键进行
更改，然后通过再次按“ENTER（确认）”键确认设置。访问参数后，按
下“ENTER（确认）”键可将当前设置输入控制体系，并将光标导航回在
页面上选择的参数。
当光标处于具有启用/禁用框的参数上时，按下“ENTER（确认）”键将
转 换设置。
“X”图标显示在数字条目窗口上，如下所示。将光标放在图标上，然后
按下“ENTER（确认）”键将取消条目以及所做的所有更改。
这是系统通电后的出厂默认显示。
• Online Pressure Setpoint（加载压力设定点）在白色框中以白色箭头表
示，始终在测量计中心点左侧。
• Offline Pressure Setpoint（卸载压力设定点）在白色框中以白色箭头表
示，始终在测量计中心点右侧。
• “Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）”以测量计中心下的大
数字并以红色箭头表示。
• “Pressure Unit of Measure（压力计量单位）”在机组排放压力下指
示。可从“General Settings（常规设置）”文件夹选择。
• “Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）”由显示屏左下部 中
的数字表示。
• “Temperature Unit of Measure（温度计量单位）”在空气端排放温度右
侧指示。可从“General Settings（常规设置）”文件夹选择。
• “Run Hours（运行时间）” 指示压缩机已运行的小时数。

ZH-14 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

装置）
⌞ᝅ • Remote Pressure（远程压力）（可选）
可在此页面中选择联机与脱机设定点并进行修改。此页面上的所有其他
信息均为只读。
 “OPERATOR SETTINGS（操作人员设置）”文件夹

页码 2：计数器 第 1-2 页：Operator Settings（操作人员设置）

图 12：计数器 图 14：Operator Settings（操作人员设置）

• “Hour Meters（小时表）”指示：控制器已通电、压缩机已运行、压 表 10: Operator Settings（操作人员设置）

缩机以载荷状态运行的小时数。
Operator 选择 最低 最大 默认 步长 单
• “Starts（启动数）”指示压缩机上尝试启动的次数。 Settings（ 位
• Date & Time（日期和时间）在“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文 操作人员设
件夹中可调整且可配置。 置）

第 3-4 页：模拟输入 脱机压力 --- 75 额定+10 额定+10 1 psi

联机压力 --- 65 脱机-10 脱机-10 1 psi
图 13：模拟输入
超前/滞后 超前/滞 --- --- 超前 --- ---
后
滞后偏移 --- 0 45 0 1 psi
操作模式 模式 --- --- 联机/脱机 --- ---
冷凝液排放 --- 2 20 5 1 秒
冷凝液间隔 --- 90 270 180 1 秒
停机延迟 --- 10 30 10 1 秒
时间
Star-Delta 时 --- 5 30 10 1 秒
间/启动时间

第 3-5 页：操作人员选项
图 15：操作人员选项

图标 含义
压力

温度

⌞ᝅ
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。

以下输入显示在该部分：
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）
• Injected Coolant Temperature（注入冷却剂温度）
• Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（后冷却器排放温度）
• Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降）
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop（冷却剂过滤器压降）
• Inlet Vacuum（进口真空度）
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限集成干燥器

80447204 Rev B ZH-15

93014.15.07

ZH

表 11: 操作人员选项

操作人员选项 选择 最低 最大 偏移 步长 单位 是否需要安装选件？
Enable Auto Restart（启动自动重 启） 开/关 --- --- 关闭 --- --- 否
Auto Restart Time（自动重启时间） --- 2 60 10 1 最低 否
Auto Restart Delay（自动重启延迟） --- 0 60 0 1 秒 否
Comm Control（命令控制） 开/关 --- --- 关闭 --- --- 否
Remote Start/Stop（远程启动/停止） 开/关 --- --- 关闭 --- --- 否
Power Out Restart（电源中断重启） 开/关 --- --- 关闭 --- --- 是
Power Out Restart Time（电源中断重 启 --- 10 600 10 1 秒 是
时间）
Low Ambient Temp（低环境温度）* --- 30 60 35 1 华氏度 否
数
Lead/Lag Cycle Time（超前/滞后循环 时 --- 0 750 0 1 小时 否
间）**
Scheduled Start - Day（计划启动 - 日 期） --- 日 日 周日 1 日 是
Scheduled Start（计划启动） --- 00:00 23:59 00:00 1 时间 是
Scheduled Stop - Day（计划停机 - 日 期） --- 日 日 周日 1 日 是
Scheduled Stop（计划停机） --- 00:00 23:59 00:00 1 时间 是
High Dust Filter（高尘过滤器） 开/关 --- --- 关闭 --- --- 是
Remote Sensor（远程传感器） 开/关 --- --- 关闭 --- --- 是
* 如果低环境出厂设定点打开，则低环境温度只可调整。
** 值为 0 将禁用超前/延迟循环时间功能。
第 6-7 页：传感器校准
图 16：传感器校准  “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
第 1-42 页（最大）
图 17：“Events（事件）”文件夹

只有停机后才能进行传感器校准。进行校准时，传感器上应没有压力。校
准仅需要在更换传感器、控制器后或操作人员怀疑传感器读数有错误时进
行。通过选择传感器名称旁边的复选框可对其进行校准。
事件文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经历的最后 250 个事件，以及每个
以下列出的每个传感器均可以进行校准：
事件的时间戳记。这些事件按顺序记录，编号 1 为最新，编号 250 为最
• Inlet Vacuum（进口真空度）(1AVPT) 老。新事件发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他事件的编号均加 1。
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）(3APT) 标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。第一页显示事件
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）(4APT) 一至六，第二页显示事件七至十二，依此类推。

• Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器进口压力）(5CPT) 以下项目将生成事件：

• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器出口压力）(6CPT) • 开机

• Remote Pressure（远程压力）(10APT) - 仅在具有远程传感器选件的装 • 关机

置上 • 按下“Start（启动）”键
• Interstage Pressure（中间级压力）(2APT) - 仅在 2 级装置上 • 按下“Stop（停止）”键
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）(7APT) - 仅在具有 • 按下“Load（载荷）”键
集成干燥器的装置上
• 按下“Unload（卸荷）”键
请注意，如果传感器当前读取的值与零相差其范围的 +/- 10%，则传感器 • 警告
将无法进行校准。请确保传感器在尝试校准之前暴露于空气中。
• TRIP（警报）
• 启动禁止

ZH-16 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
活动警告将以琥珀色高亮显示，而清除的警告文本为琥珀色。
活动警报将以红色高亮显示，而清除的警报文本为红色。
活动的启动禁止将列在事件日志中，但不高亮显示。如果启动禁止处于活
动状态，则显示屏将指示压缩机未准备好启动。
请参阅下表，了解有关每种事件中信息的详细信息。
警告事件列表
Change Inlet Filter（更换进口过滤器）
如果 1AVPT 大于 0.7 psi 真空度（或在高尘过滤器选项启用时大于 1.3 psi
真空度）、装置已至少载荷 8 秒，将会出现此信息。这一状况必须持续 3
秒，才会发布警告。
Change Coolant Filter（更换冷却剂过滤器）
如果装置已至少载荷运行 8 秒、已预热、冷却剂过滤器压降 (5CPT
- 6CPT) 大于 25 psi，将会出现此信息。这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发
布警告。
Sensor Failure（传感器故障）
只要传感器 4ATT、5DTT、6DTT 和 7APT 被视为缺少或损坏，就将出现
此信息。传感器故障信息应遵循以下格式：SENSOR FAILURE 4ATT（传 感
器故障 4ATT）。仅在安装了集成干燥器（在出厂设置菜单中进行访 问）
时才会显示 5DTT、6DTT 和 7APT 传感器故障。这一状况必须持续 3 秒，
才会发布警告。
Change Separator Element（更换分离器元件）
如果装置已载荷、预热（注入的冷却剂温度至少为 120 °F）、机组排放
压力至少为 90 psi、分离器压降大于 12 psi，将会出现此信息。这一状况
必须持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。
High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
如果装置正在运行、2ATT 大于 221 °F（228 的 97%），将会出现此信
息。这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
如果装置载荷运行、已至少载荷 8 秒、分离筒压力比压缩机的额定压力
高 25 psi 以上，将会出现此信息。如果出现此警告，联机与脱机压力将
减 少。例如，100 psi 的额定压力的最大脱机压力为 110 psi。如果在本例
中 油槽压超过 125 psi，将会出现此警告。这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会
发 布警告。
Auxiliary 1（辅助 1）
如果辅助输入 1 关闭，将会出现此信息。触点必须至少闭合 3 秒，然后
才会出现警告信息。
Auxiliary 2（辅助 2）
如果辅助输入 2 关闭，将会出现此信息。触点必须至少闭合 3 秒，然后
才会出现警告信息。
Service（维修）
依据总运行时间，当设备运行了一定时间后，将会出现维修警告。维修
警 告可有多个级别，具体取决于维修级别的选择。选择维修级别 0 将禁
用 维修警告。
Service Level 1（维修级别 1）
如果为装置选择了维修级别 1，“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告
将以等于维修时段设定点的时间间隔进行发布。与任何其他警告一样，此
警告可以重置。
Service Level 2（维修级别 2）
如果为装置选择了维修级别 2，则维修完成出厂设定点将用于清除级别 2
维修警告及重设维修时间或日期。在维修警告出现之前，可以先重设维
修完成。
首次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告将在总时间间隔等于维修
时段设定点时出现。然而，在此之前的 100 个小时，将出现“100 HOURS
TO SERVICE（100 小时后需要维修）”警告。与任何其他警告一样，此警
告可以重置。一百小时之后将出现“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警
告。此警告可以像任何其他警告一样重置，然而，如果未设置维修完成出
厂设定点，此警告将在 24 小时后返回。如果未设置维修完成，100 小时
后，将发布“ALARM - SERVICE REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警告。此
警告只能由维修完成出厂设定点清除。设置维修完成出厂设定点即表明维
修已完成之后，下次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告的时间将通
80447204 Rev B
ZH
过将维修时段添加到总小时数值来计算，并且“100 HOURS TO SERVICE（
100 小时后需要维修）”警告在 100 个小时前出现且“ALARM - SERVICE
REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警告在此之后 100 个小时出现。
Communication Failure（通讯故障）
如果装置为联控中的主装置、无法与其它装置通讯，将会出 现此信息。
Sensor Failure 10APT - Remote Sensor（传感器故障 10APT - 远程传感器）
如果远程传感器选项处于打开状态、远程传感器被视为缺少或损坏，将会
出现此信息。如果出现此信息，装置将使用 4APT 自动启动以载荷与卸荷
压缩机。装有集成干燥器的装置无法具有远程压力传感器。这一状况必须
持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。
High Discharge Pressure（高排放压力）
如果装置使用远程传感器或者由外部设备（例如 8XI）控制、已载荷、排
放压力 (4APT) 大于最大脱机压力，将会出现此信息。这一状况必须持续
3 秒，才会发布警告。如果出现此状况，压缩机将自动卸荷。排放压力降
至额定压力值后，此装置将可以重载。
Condensate Drain Error（冷凝液排放错误）
如果压缩机正在运行、机组排放压力超过 50 psi、冷凝液排放错误触点闭
合至少 240 秒，将会出现此信息。此警告将在启动后被忽略 4.5 分钟。
Freeze Warning（冷冻警告）
如果在带集成干燥器的装置上干燥器运行时蒸发器传感器的值为 687（大
约 0.5 C）或以下（低温），将会出现此信息。这是干燥器故障。如果出
现这种情况，压缩机将继续运行，但干燥器将停止。条件必须至少存在
180 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。注意：如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重
置此警告，干燥器可以重启。如果蒸发器值升高到 709（大约 5 C），干
燥器也会重启。而警告仍会显示。
Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）
在带集成干燥器的装置上，这将在干燥器高压开关打开而干燥器正在运行
时出现。这是干燥器故障。如果出现这种情况，压缩机将继续运行，但干
燥器将停止。触点必须至少打开 3 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。如果运
行 干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，干燥器可以重启。然而，此开关是
锁定 式开关。必须先重置开关，然后干燥器才能运行。重置显示屏上的
警告不 会重置开关。
Condenser Temperature High（冷凝器温度高）
如果在带集成干燥器的装置上干燥器运行时冷凝器传感器的值高于高温阈
值，将会出现此信息。这不是干燥器故障。如果发生这种状况，压缩机与
干燥器将继续运行。条件必须至少存在 180 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。
Condenser Temperature Low（冷凝器温度低）
如果在带集成干燥器的装置上干燥器运行时冷凝器传感器的值低于低温阈
值，将会出现此信息。这不是干燥器故障。如果发生这种状况，压缩机与
干燥器将继续运行。条件必须至少存在 180 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。
Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤器）
HE 过滤器位于后冷却器排放管与干燥器进口之间并且仅存在于带集成干
燥器的装置上。HE 过滤器上的压差通过从后冷却器排放压力中减去机组
排放压力来进行计量。如果压缩机正在运行、HE 过滤器上测量的压差大
于或等于 10 psi (0.7 bar)、装置已热（注入冷却剂温度高于 120 °F）、
机组排放压力 (4APT) 高于 90 psi，将会出现此警告。条件必须至少存在
3 秒，然后才会出现警告。这不是干燥器故障。如果出现这种情况，将显
示警告，但干燥器将继续运行。
警报事件列表
Low Sump Pressure（低分离筒压力）
如果装置卸荷或载荷运行、3APT 小于 13 psi 的状况持续了 15 秒，将会
出现此信息。
High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
如果 2ATT 大于 228 °F、装置正在运行，将会出现此信息。
检查电机旋转
如果在启动 3 秒后某装置上 3APT 小于 1 psi（在装置装有软启动器或空
气端排放温度低于 50 °F 时 6 秒），将会出现此信息。此状况可能由电
机反向运行导致。形成正确的电机旋转后，此警报将不再被检查，除非拔
下控制器电源。
ZH-17
93014.15.07

ZH

Main Motor Overload（主电机过载）

如果电机过载继电器触点打开，将会出现此信息。触点必须至少打开 3  TRIP HISTORY（警报历史记录）
秒，然后才会出现警报。
第 1-4 页（最大）
Fan Motor Overload（风扇电机过载）
图 18：TRIP HISTORY（警报历史记录）
如果风扇电机过载继电器触点打开，将会出现此信息。触点必须至少打开
3 秒，然后才会出现警报。
REMOTE STOP FAILURE（远程停止失败）
如果远程启动/停止选项启用、远程停止按钮保持打开状态、任一启动按
钮按下，将会出现此消息。
REMOTE START FAILURE（远程启动失败）
如果远程启动/停止选项启用、装置由远程启动按钮启动、装置启动后按
钮保持闭合 7 秒，将会出现此信息。
Sensor Failure（传感器故障）
当传感器被认为缺少或损坏时，将会显示此信息。受此警报影响的传感
器有 1AVPT、3APT、4APT、5CPT、6CPT、2APT（如果为 2 级装置）、
2CTT 和 2ATT。显示的传感器应带有传感器故障消息。传感器故障信息应
遵循以下格式：SENSOR FAILURE 1AVPT（传感器故障 1AVPT）。
“Trip History（警报历史记录）”文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经历的
EMERGENCY STOP（紧急停止） 最后 15 个警报，以及每个警报的时间戳记。这些警报按顺序记录，编号
当按下紧急停止按钮时，将会出现此信息。 1 为最新，编号 15 为最老。新警报发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他
警报的编号均加 1。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。第一页显示事件
如果压缩机至少载荷运行 8 秒、存在以下 3 个条件中的任何一个，将会 一至五，第二页显示事件六至十，依此类推。
出现此信息。(1) 分离筒压力比额定压力高 35 psi。(2) 测量的分离器压降
高 于 25 psi，且机组排放压力至少等于最低联机设定点值。(3) 额定压力 以下项目将生成事件。
低 于 190 psi 时分离筒压力高于 165 psi，或者额定压力为 190 psi 时分离 • 开机
筒压力 高于 220。
• 关机
High Coolant Filter Pressure Drop（高冷却剂过滤器压降） • 按下“Start（启动）”键
如果装置已至少载荷运行 8 秒、已预热、已出现更改冷却剂过滤器警告、 • 按下“Stop（停止）”键
冷却剂过滤器压降 (5CPT - 6CPT) 大于 35 psi，将会出现此信息。
• 按下“Load（载荷）”键
High Inlet Vacuum（高进口真空度）
• 按下“Unload（卸荷）”键
如果装置载荷运行、进、口真空度大于 1.8 psi，将会出现此信息。如果装
• 警告
置具有高尘过滤器，进口真空度的警报阈值为 2.4 psi。
• TRIP（警报）
Unit Too Cold To Start（装置太冷无法启动）
• 启动禁止
如果装置没有低环境选项、空气端排放温度 (2ATT) 小于 35°F、操作人
员尝试启动压缩机，将会出现此信息。此故障每天只能发生一次。此故障 活动警报将以红色高亮显示，而清除的警报文本为红色。
发生后，操作人员可以进行重设并启动压缩机。此故障将记录到警报历史
警报历史记录还记录警报发生时的压缩机数据以协助诊断与故障排除。导
记录，表明装置要在低环境条件下启动。
航到警报条目并点击输入按钮将弹出警报历史记录对话框。
High Interstage Pressure（高级间压力）
图 19：警报历史记录对话框
如果装置运行、中间级压力 (2APT) 高于 75 psi，将会出现此信息。此故
障仅在 2 级装置中出现。
Invalid Calibration（校准无效）
如果传感器零值是其刻度范围的 +/- 10%，将会出现此信息。此信息仅会
在校准传感器时出现。
启动禁止列表
High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
如果 2ATT 高于 228 °F 的 95%，将会出现此信息。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
如果分离筒压力 (3APT) 为 25 psi 或高于压缩机额定压力，将会出现此
信 息。

对话框处于活动状态时，请按左右键以滚动查看显示的数据。警报的名
称 将始终显示在对话框的标题栏中。数据查看完毕时按输入可返回警报
历史 记录屏幕。

ZH-18 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

 “MAINTENANCE（维护）”文件夹
 “GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹
页码 1：过滤器状态
图 20：过滤器状态 ⌞ᝅ
此文件夹中的所有参数均可以调整。

页码 1：语言选择
图 23：语言选择

此页面将显示以下各项：
• Coolant Filter Status（冷却剂过滤器状态）
• Separator Element Status（分离器元件状态）
• Inlet Filter Status（进口过滤器状态）

页码 2：维护状态 语言可以从以下 30 个选项中进行选择：

图 21：维护状态
• 英语（默认） • 韩语
• 保加利亚语 • 拉脱维亚语
• 简体中文 • 立陶宛语
• 克罗地亚语 • 马耳他语
• 捷克语 • 挪威语
• 丹麦语 • 波兰语
• 荷兰语 • 葡萄牙语
• 爱沙尼亚语 • 罗马尼亚语
• 芬兰语 • 俄语
• 法语 • 斯洛伐克语
• 德语 • 斯洛文尼亚语
• 希腊语 • 西班牙语
• 匈牙利语 • 瑞典语
此页面将显示距离应进行维修的时间。
• 意大利语 • 泰国语
页码 3：维护配置 • 印度尼西亚语 • 土耳其语
图 22：维护配置 控制器将以选择的语言显示所有屏幕，并且一次只能选择一个语言。
每个语言均以本地翻译显示。
页码 1：衡量单位设置
图 24：衡量单位设置

通过此页面，用户可以设置维修间隔及在执行维修之后重置计数器。

以下衡量单位设置显示在此部分中。

80447204 Rev B ZH-19

93014.15.07

ZH

表 12: 衡量单位设置 以下设置显示在该部分中：

显示文本 说明 表 14: 时间与日期设置

温度 可在 oF 和 oC 之间选择。 显示文本 说明
压力 可在 psi、kpa、bar、kg/cm2 之间选 择。 Hours（小时） 可以设置当前小时。小时格式固定为 24 小时。
功率 可在 kW 和 HP 之间选择。 Minutes（分 钟） 可以设置当前分钟。
页码 3：主页选项 Seconds（秒） 可以设置当前秒钟。
图 25：主页选项 Year（年） 可以设置当前年份。
Month（月） 可以设置当前月份。
日 可以设置当前日期。
Date Format（ 日 可在 dd/mm/yyyy（默认）与 mm/dd/yyyy 之间选择。
期格式）
Confirm New Time 用于验证是否需要更改选择。复选框中必须显
and Date（确认新 示“x”，然后更改才会生效。
时间与日期）

控制器将继续显示所有更改，即使尚未确认选择，而且用户退出页面，然
后返回也是如此。电源循环会将所有选项返回至其当前设置。

⌞ᝅ
控制器不支持夏令时。

表 13: 主页选项
页码 6：背景灯设置
显示文本 说明 图 27：背景灯设置
Auto Return to 在对于显示的延迟时间没有用户活动时，使控制器返
Home（自动返 回选定主页。这只能在复选框中显示“x”时启用。
回主页）
Delay Time（延 确定在控制器返回主页之前处于不活动状态的秒数。
迟时间）
Select Home 用于选择主文件夹。
Folder（选择主
文件夹）
Select Home 用于选择选定主文件夹中的主页。
Page（选择主
页）

第 4-5 页：时间与日期设置
图 26：时间与日期设置
以下设置显示在该部分中：
表 15: 背景灯设置

显示文本 说明
Backlight 调整显示屏的亮度。
Brightness（背景灯
亮度）
Enable Backlight 使控制器在对于显示的延迟时间没有用户活动时
Auto-Off（启用背 关闭背景灯。
景灯自动关闭）
Backlight Auto-Off 确定在控制器关闭背景灯之前处于不活动状态的
Delay Time（背景 秒数。
灯自动关闭延迟
时间）

所有项目均可调整。
⌞ᝅ
按下控制器的任何键都会打开背景灯。
背景灯关闭后，控制器上的“Start（启动）”、“Stop（停
止）”、“Load（载荷）”、“Unload（卸荷）”、“Reset（重
置）”和“Acknowledge（确认）”键仍有效。建议按确认键或导航键
之一，以打开背景灯。

ZH-20 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

第 7-8 页：以太网设置 以下输入显示在该部分：

图 28：以太网设置 • Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）
• Injected Coolant Temperature（注入冷却剂温度）
• Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（后冷却器排放温度）
• Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降）
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop（冷却剂过滤器压降）
• Inlet Vacuum（进口真空度）
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限集成干燥器
装置）
• Remote Pressure（远程压力）（可选）
• Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器进口压力）
• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器出口压力）
表 16: 以太网设置 • Interstage Pressure（中间级压力）（仅限 2 级装置）

显示文本 说明 • Evaporator（蒸发器）
Enable Ethernet（启用以 使用户连接可以利用控制器的网络启用功 • Condenser（冷凝器）
太网） 能。
页码 4：压缩机数据
Enable DHCP（启用 使控制器可以自动接收来自局域网 (LAN) 的
DHCP） IP 地址 图 30：压缩机数据
IP Address Setting（IP 如果 DHCP 未启用，则此设定点会设置控制器
地址设置） 的 IP 地址。
IP Address Actual（实际 在未启用 DHCP 时，这将与 IP 地址设置相匹
IP 地址） 配。如果启用了 DHCP，则这将显示由 DHCP
服务器分配给控制器的地址。
MAC 地址 这是控制器唯一的硬件 MAC 地址。这无法
更改。
Subnet Mask Setting（子 子网掩码的设定点
网掩码设置）
Subnet Mask Actual（实 子网掩码的当前读数/设置
际子网掩码）
Default Gateway 默认网关的设定点。
Setting（默认网关设
置）
Default Gateway Actual（ 默认网关的当前读数/设置。
以下数据将显示在该部分中：
实际默认网 关）
• Power On Hours（开机时数）
Accept（接受） 在编辑所需设定点后，导航到接受设置并
按 输入，以使设置变量中的值得到控制器的 • Running Hours（运行时数）
确 认。 • Loaded Hours（载荷时数）
Cancel（取消） 丢弃对以太网设置所做的任何更改。
• Real Time Clock（实时时钟）

第 5-6 页：数字输入
 “STATUS（状态）”文件夹 图 31：数字输入

⌞ᝅ
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。

第 1-3 页：模拟输入
图 29：模拟输入

数字输入旁边的已标记复选框表明输入处于“TRUE（真）”状态。例如，
启动器反馈在输入处于较高状态时为“TRUE（真）”，而紧急停止在输入
为 0V 直流电压时为“TRUE（真）”。

80447204 Rev B ZH-21

93014.15.07

ZH

• EMERGENCY STOP（紧急停止） 页码 9：模拟输出

• Main Motor Overload（主电机过载） 图 33：模拟输出
• Fan Motor Overload（风扇电机过载）
• Condensate Drain Error（冷凝液排放错误）
• Remote Stop（远程停止）
• Remote Start（远程启动）
• Remote Lead/Lag（远程超前/滞后）
• Remote Load Enable（远程载荷启用）
• Remote Load/Unload（远程载荷/卸荷）
• Auxiliary Input 1（辅助输入 1）
• Auxiliary Input 2（辅助输入 2）
• Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）

第 7-8 页：数字输出
模拟输出的值将以 mA 为单位。
图 32：数字输出
• VSD 风扇输出
• 模拟输出 2

⌞ᝅ
(RO) 表示只读值。

 “FACTORY SETTINGS（出厂设置）”文件夹
此文件夹供工厂与维修人员使用。必须在第一页输入密码以便调整此文
件 夹中的值。此文件夹用于设置特定于该压缩机的参数及显示控制器的
软 件信息。
页码 1：密码
图 34：密码
数字输出旁边的已标记复选框表明其已通电。

• Starter Contact 1（启动器触 • PORO Horn（PORO 警报器）

点 1）
• Starter Contact 2（启动器触 • Trip Relay（警报继电器）
点 2）
• Fan Starter Contact（风扇启动 • Warning Relay（警告继电器）
器触点）
• Blowdown Solenoid（放气电磁 • Low Voltage Output 1（低电压
阀） 输出 1）
• Modulation Solenoid（调制电磁 • Low Voltage Output 2（低电压
阀） 输出 2）
• Condensate Drain（冷凝液排放 • Low Voltage Output 3（低电压
管） 输出 3）
• Dryer Run / Fan Run（干燥器运 • Low Voltage Output 4（低电压
行/风扇运行） 输出 4） 表 17: 密码

显示文本 说明
⌞ᝅ
Password（密 提供访问权，以输入有效密码，从而获取对受密码保
(RO) 表示只读值。 码） 护参数的访问。可通过向下滚动至密码值并按回车键
来输入密码。
Password 此复选框表示有效密码已输入。如果此复选框为空，
entered（输入 则可能尚未输入有效密码或密码已超时。这为只读。
的密码）
Password 勾选此复选框将启用密码时间功能。
timeout
enable（密码
超时启用）
Password 此超时可与密码超时启用一起让用户设置重新输入有
timeout（密码 效密码所需的可调整时间段。达到此超时后，需要重
超时） 新输入有效密码。

ZH-22 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

第 2-3 页：出厂设置  文件夹选项（变速）

图 35：出厂设置
 主文件夹
页码 1：系统概览
图 37：系统概览

这些页面用于设置特定于压缩机的参数。下面列出了可调整的所有出厂设
置。这些页面中的所有设置均受密码保护。
• Rated Pressure（额定压力）（psi - 100、115、135、190）
• Enable Two Stage（启用两级）（开/关）
• Starter Type（启动器类型）（Star-delta、远程启动器、软启动器）
• Service Level（维修级别）（0、1 或 2）
• Service Time Period（维修时段）（1000 - 8000，增量为 1000 小时）
• Enable Modulation（启用调制）（开/关）
• Enable PAC（启用 PAC）（开/关）
• Enable Dryer（启用干燥器）（开/关）
• Running Hours（运行时数）（可调整）
• Loaded Hours（载荷时数）（可调整）
这是系统通电后的出厂默认显示。
• “Target Pressure Setpoint（目标压力设定点）”在白色框中以白色箭头
表示，始终在测量计中心。这是压缩机尝试维护的压力。
• “Automatic Stop Setpoint（自动停止设定点）”在白色框中以白色箭
头表示，始终在测量计中心点右侧。当压缩机到达此设定点时，压缩
机将卸荷并停机。
• “Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）”以测量计中心下的大
数字并以红色箭头表示。这是压缩机的输出压力。
• “Pressure Unit of Measure（压力计量单位）”在机组排放压力下指
示。可从“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹选择。

• VSD Blower（VSD 风扇）（开/关） • “Percent Capacity（容量百分比）” 在屏幕左下部以数字和条形图形

式显示。这是压缩机产生的空气量（其最大容量的百分比）。
• Enable Low Ambient（启用低环境）（开/关）
• “Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）”由显示屏右下部 的
第 4-5 页：出厂设置 数字表示。

图 36：出厂设置 • “Temperature Unit of Measure（温度计量单位）”在空气端排放温度右

侧指示。可从“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹选择。
• “Run Hours（运行时间）” 指示压缩机已运行的小时数。

⌞ᝅ
可在此页面中选择和修改目标压力与自动停止设定点。此页面上的所有
其他信息均为只读。

页码 2：计数器
图 38：计数器

这些页面用于显示控制器的软件信息。所有项目均为只读。

• “Hour Meters（小时表）”指示：控制器已通电且压缩机已运行的小
时数。
• “Starts（启动数）”指示压缩机上尝试启动的次数。
• Date & Time（日期和时间）在“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文
件夹中可调整且可配置。

80447204 Rev B ZH-23

93014.15.07

ZH

⌞ᝅ  “OPERATOR SETTINGS（操作人员设置）”文件夹
此页面上的所有信息均为只读。 第 1-2 页：Operator Settings（操作人员设置）
图 40：Operator Settings（操作人员设置）
第 3-5 页：模拟输入与压缩机信息
图 39：模拟输入与压缩机信息

下面的参数随时可以调整：
表 18: Operator Settings（操作人员设置）
图标 含义
Pressure Operator 默认 最低 最大 步长 单位
Settings（操作
Temperature 人员设置）
目标压力 100 65 145 1 psi
自动停机压力 110 目标+1 目标+10 1 psi
⌞ᝅ
立即停机压力 120 自动 自动+10 1 psi
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。 对比的节能百 调制 --- --- --- ---
分比
以下模拟输入将显示在该部分中： 能耗比 0.000 0.000 9999.999 --- ---
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力） 复位平均值 --/--/-- - - - 日期
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度） 第 3-5 页：操作人员选项

• Injected Coolant Temperature（注入冷却剂温度） 图 41：操作人员选项

• Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（后冷却器排放温度）
• Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降）
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop（冷却剂过滤器压降）
• Inlet Vacuum（进口真空度）
• Remote Pressure（远程压力）（可选）
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限集成干燥器
装置）

此外，以下压缩机状态读数将包括在此部分中：
• Motor Speed（电机速度）
• PACKAGE KW（机组功率 [千瓦]）
• Average Package kW-hr（平均机组千瓦小时）
• AVERAGE % CAPACITY（平均气量百分比） 正下方的参数仅在压缩机停止时才可调整。
• AVERAGE CAPACITY（平均气量） 选项设定点类似于操作人员设定点，除了这些设定点无法在装置运行时更
• ENERGY COST（能源成本） 改这一点不同。

• Energy Saving（节能）
• LIFETIME ENERGY SAVINGS（使用期节能）

ZH-24 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

表 19: 操作人员选项 • Inlet Vacuum（进口真空度）(1AVPT)

• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）(3APT)
选项项目 选择 最低 最大 步长 单 是否需要 安
位 装选 件？ • Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）(4APT)
Remote 开/关 --- --- --- --- 否 • Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器进口压力）(5CPT)
Sensor（远程
• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器出口压力）(6CPT)
传感器）
Comm 开/关 --- --- --- --- 否 • Remote Pressure（远程压力）(10APT) - 仅在具有远程传感器选件的装
置上
Control（命令
控制） • Interstage Pressure（中间级压力）(2APT) - 仅在 2 级装置上
Remote Start- 开/关 --- --- --- --- 否 • Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）(7APT) - 仅在具有
Stop（远程启 集成干燥器的装置上
动/停止）
请注意，如果传感器当前读取的值与零相差其范围的 +/- 10%，则传感器
Enable 开/关 --- --- --- --- 是
将无法进行校准。请确保传感器在尝试校准之前暴露于空气中。
PORO（启用
PORO）
PORO 时间 --- 10 600 1 秒 是  “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
Scheduled --- 日 日 1 日 是 第 1-42 页（最大）
Start Day（计
图 43：“Events（事件）”文件夹
划的启动日
期）
Scheduled --- 00:00 23:59 1 时间 是
Start Hour（
计划的启动
小时）
Scheduled --- 日 日 1 日 是
Stop Day（计
划的停机日
期）
Scheduled --- 00:00 23:59 1 时间 是
Stop Hour（
计划的停止
小时）
Modbus 开/关/ --- --- --- --- 否
Protocol（ ICU 事件文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经历的最后 250 个事件，以及每个
Modbus 协 事件的时间戳记。这些事件按顺序记录，编号 1 为最新，编号 250 为最
议） 老。新事件发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他事件的编号均加 1。
Modbus --- 1 247 1 --- 否 标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。第一页显示事件
Address（ 一至六，第二页显示事件七至十二，依此类推。
Modbus 地
址） 以下操作将生成事件：
• 开机
如果未购买、未在装置中安装某选件，则选择显示屏上将显示消息“Not
Installed（未安装）”。将使用 Ingersoll Rand 维修工具安装选件。 • 关机

* 如果低环境出厂设定点打开，则低环境温度只可调整。 • 按下“Start（启动）”键

** 值为 0 将禁用超前/延迟循环时间功能。 • 按下“Stop（停止）”键
• 按下“Load（载荷）”键
第 6-7 页：传感器校准
• 按下“Unload（卸荷）”键
图 42：传感器校准
• 警告
• TRIP（警报）
• 启动禁止

活动警告将以琥珀色高亮显示，而清除的警告文本为琥珀色。
活动警报将以红色高亮显示，而清除的警报文本为红色。
活动的启动禁止将列在事件日志中，但不高亮显示。如果启动禁止处于活
动状态，则显示屏将指示压缩机未准备好启动。
请参阅下表，了解有关每种事件中信息的详细信息。
警告事件列表
Change Inlet Filter（更改进口过滤器）
如果装置已至少运行 7 秒、电机速度等于或大于最低速度、进口真空度大
于 0.7 psi，将会出现此信息。
只有停机后才能进行传感器校准。进行校准时，传感器上应没有压力。校
准仅需要在更换传感器、控制器后或操作人员怀疑传感器读数有错误时进
行。通过选择传感器名称旁边的复选框可对其进行校准。
以下列出的每个传感器均可以进行校准。

80447204 Rev B ZH-25

93014.15.07
ZH
Change Coolant Filter（更换冷却剂过滤器）
如果装置已至少运行 7 秒、注入冷却剂温度至少为 140 华氏度、电机速
度至少等于最低速度、冷却剂过滤器压降 (5CPT - 6CPT) 大于 25 psi，将
会出现此信息。
Sensor Failure（传感器故障）（不带集成干燥器的装置）
只要传感器被视为缺少或损坏，就会出现此信息。受此警告影响的传感
器为 1ATT、2ATT、4ATT 和 3CTT。传感器故障信息应遵循以下格式：
SENSOR FAILURE 4ATT（传感器故障 4ATT）。
Sensor Failure（传感器故障）（带集成干燥器的装置）
只要传感器被视为缺少或损坏、装置具有集成干燥器 (3.3.1.6)，将会出现
此信息。受此警告影响的传感器为 7APT、5DTT 和 6DTT。传感器故障信
息应遵循以下格式：SENSOR FAILURE 7APT（传感器故障 7APT）。
Change Separator Element（更换分离器元件）
如果装置已至少运行 7 秒、注入冷却剂温度至少为 120 °F、机组排放压
力至少为 65 psi、分离器压降至少为 12 psi，将会出现此信息。如果目标
压力小于 90 psi，则目标压力每降低 5 psi 警告值将增加 1 psi。例如，如
果目标压力介于 89 与 85 psi 之间，则警告值将为 13 psi。
High Airend Disch Temp（高主机排气温度）
如果装置正在运行、2ATT 大于 221 °F（228 的 97%）或装置处于闲置
模式 (3.3.7.1)、2ATT 大于 184 °F，将会出现此信息。此警告通常会有 5
秒的延迟，然而，如果热端热阀 (3.3.1.5) 设置为打开，则此警告会有 90
秒的延迟。
High Discharge Press（高排放压力）
当设备由 X 系列型号等外部装置控制且排放压力大于立即停机压力时，
将会出现该警告信息。
Auxiliary Warning 1（辅助警告 1）(2)
如果辅助警告输入关闭，将会出现此信息。
Service（维修）
确定预测性维护警告后，维修警告会发生显著变化。
依据总运行时间，当设备运行了一定时间后，将会出现维修警告。维修
警 告可有多个级别，具体取决于维修级别的选择。选择维修级别 0 将禁
用 维修警告。
Service Level 1（维修级别 1）
如果为装置选择了维修级别 1 (3.3.1.9)，“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维
修）”警告将以维修时段设定点 (3.3.1.10) 中的操作时间为间隔进行发
布。与任何其他警告一样，此警告可以重置。
Service Level 2（维修级别 2）
如果为装置选择了维修级别 2，则维修完成出厂设定点 (3.3.1.11) 将用于
清除级别 2 维修警告及重设维修时间或日期。在维修警告出现之前，可以
先重设维修完成。
首次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告将在总小时数值为维修
时段设定点 (3.3.1.10) 时出现。然而，在此之前的 100 个小时，将出
现“100 HOURS TO SERVICE（100 小时后需要维修）”警告。与任何其 他
警告一样，此警告可以重置。一百小时之后，在总小时数值为维修时 段
时，“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告将出现。此警告可以像 任
何其他警告一样重置，然而，如果未设置维修完成出厂设定点，此警 告
将在 24 小时后返回。如果未设置维修完成，100 小时后（维修时间段 +
100），将发布“ALARM - SERVICE REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警
告。此警告只能由维修完成出厂设定点清除。设置维修完成出厂设定点即
表明维修已完成之后，下次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告的时
间将通过将维修时间段添加到总小时数值来计算，并且“100 HOURS TO
SERVICE（100 小时后需要维修）”警告在 100 个小时前出现且“ALARM
- SERVICE REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警告在此之后 100 个小时出
现。
Condensate Drain Error（冷凝液排放错误）
如果压缩机正在运行、机组排放压力超过 50 psi、冷凝液排放错误触点闭
合至少 240 秒，将会出现此信息。此警告将在启动后被忽略 4.5 分钟。
High VSD Ambient Temperature（高 VSD 环境温度）
当 VSD 环境温度在停机值 (133 °F) 的 5% 以内时，将会出现该警告。
ZH-26
Freeze Warning（冷冻警告）
如果在带集成干燥器的装置上干燥器运行时蒸发器传感器的值为 687（大
约 0.5 C）或以下（低温），将会出现此信息。这是干燥器故障。如果出
现这种情况，压缩机将继续运行，但干燥器将停止。条件必须至少存在
180 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。注意：如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重
置此警告，干燥器可以重启。如果蒸发器值升高到 709（大约 5 C），干
燥器也会重启。而警告仍会显示。
Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）
在带集成干燥器的装置上，这将在干燥器高压开关打开而干燥器正在运行
时出现。这是干燥器故障。如果出现这种情况，压缩机将继续运行，但干
燥器将停止。触点必须至少打开三秒，然后才会出现警告信息。如果运行
干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，干燥器可以重启。然而，此开关是锁定
式开关。必须先重置开关，然后干燥器才能运行。重置显示屏上的警告不
会重置开关。
Sensor Failure Remote（传感器故障远程）
只要传感器被认为缺少或损坏，就将显示此信息。传感器故障信息应遵循
以下格式：SENSOR FAILURE REMOTE（传感器故障远程）。如果出现此警
告，则装置将自动切换到机组排放压力传感器以进行控制。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
如果压缩机正在运行、机组排放压力至少为 65 psi、分离筒压力比目标压
力 大 15 psi 时，将会出现此信息。出现该警告将使控制器判断是否需要
降 低最大速度（请参阅 4.11）。
Condenser Temperature High（冷凝器温度高）
如果在带集成干燥器的装置上干燥器运行时冷凝器传感器的值为 1019（
大约 65 C）或以上（高温），将会出现此信息。这不是干燥器故障。如
果发生这种状况，压缩机与干燥器将继续运行。条件必须至少存在 180
秒，然后才会出现警告信息。
Condenser Temperature Low（冷凝器温度低）
如果在带集成干燥器的装置上干燥器运行时冷凝器传感器的值为 887（大
约 40 C）或以下（低温），将会出现此信息。这不是干燥器故障。如果
发生这种状况，压缩机与干燥器将继续运行。条件必须至少存在 180 秒，
然后才会出现警告信息。
Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤器）
HE 过滤器位于后冷却器排放管与干燥器进口之间并且仅存在于带集成干
燥器的装置上。HE 过滤器上的压差通过从后冷却器排放压力中减去机组
排放压力来进行计量。如果压缩机正在以最大速度为能力的 75% 的速度
运行、HE 过滤器上测量的压差大于或等于 10 psi (0.7 bar)、装置已热（注
入冷却剂温度高于 120 °F）、机组排放压力 (4APT) 高于 90 psi，会出现
此警告。条件必须至少存在 3 秒，然后才会出现警告。这不是干燥器故
障。如果出现这种情况，将显示警告，但干燥器将继续运行。
警报事件列表
High Airend Disch Temp（高主机排气温度）
如果在正常运行期间 2ATT 大于 228 °F，将会出现此信息。如果装置处
于闲置模式，此警告将在 200 °F 时出现。
Blower Fault（风扇故障）
如果风扇 VSD 上故障触点打开 3 秒，将会出现此信息。
REMOTE STOP FAILURE（远程停止失败）
如果远程启动/停止选项启用、远程停止按钮保持打开状态、任一启动按
钮按下，将会出现此消息。
REMOTE START FAILURE（远程启动失败）
如果装置由远程启动按钮启动、装置启动后按钮保持闭合 7 秒，将会出
现此信息。
Sensor Failure（传感器故障）
当传感器被认为缺少或损坏时，将会显示此信息。受此故障停机影响的
传感器有4APT、3APT、2APT、1AVPT、5CPT、6CPT 和 2ATT。显示的传
感器应带有传感器故障消息。传感器故障信息应遵循以下格式：SENSOR
FAILURE 4APT（传感器故障 4APT）。传感器 4APT 具有以下更多逻辑。
如果分离筒压力高于 100 psi、机组排放压力 (4APT) 比分离筒压力小 50
psi， 将发布传感器故障 4APT。
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07
EMERGENCY STOP（紧急停止）
当按下紧急停止按钮时，将会出现此信息。
VSD Fault（VSD 故障）
VSD 故障从驱动器读取。控制器将读取变速驱动器的状态菜单。如果故
障状况以状态信息的形式返回，则微控制器将发出“VSD FAULT（VSD 故
障）”警报并显示故障状况的编号。VSD 故障 39 - 42 和 44 无法通过按
压重置按钮清除。所有其他 VSD 故障均可通过按压重置按钮清除。清除
VSD 故障 39 - 42 或 44 的唯一方法是循环压缩机上的电源。循环电源会
使 VSD 执行电源模块测试。必须先通过电源模块测试，然后压缩机才能
在 VSD 故障 39 - 42 或 44 之后重启。VSD 故障 39、40 和 41（IGBT 故
障）有其他逻辑与其关联。由于错误的警报，逻辑已修改为允许自动重
启。如果发生 VSD 故障 39、40 或 41，控制器将发出警报并显示故障信
息。两分钟后，控制器将向 VSD 发布命令以运行电源模块测试。在 VSD
运行电源模块测试时，控制器将强制自身重置。完成重置后，控制器将监
控 VSD 以完成电源模块测试。如果电源模块测试已完成、所有条件均已
通过，控制器将自动重启压缩机。如果电源模块测试失败，控制器将显示
电源模块测试失败信息与故障代码。控制器不允许在 24 小时内有超过五
次的 VSD 故障 39 - 41 自动重启。同时控制器不允许在 10 分钟内有超过
两次的 VSD 故障 39 - 41 自动重启。如果发生 VSD 故障 39 - 41、违反时
间期限，控制器将不发布电源模块测试与重启。它将显示故障但不允许控
制器重置。操作人员必须循环电源。所有驱动器的另一例外是 VSD 故障
10、12 - 14 和 16。如果由于其中一种故障压缩机发出警报，而不在 VSD
故障时关闭，控制器将重置，然后重启压缩机。如果压缩机配备了断电重
启选项 (PORO)，控制器将执行 PORO 重启。如果装置没有 PORO，控制器
将在重置后 10 秒启动压缩机。在一个小时之内，一个装置最多可以执行
此操作五次。如果一个小时之内装置执行此操作的次数超过五次，第六次
操作将视为常规 VSD 故障。
Low Sump Pressure（低分离筒压力）
如果压缩机正在运行、油槽压降低于 13 psi 15 秒，将会出现此信息。
检查电机旋转
如果控制器在 VSD 启动后读出负速度，则会出现这种情况。
VSD通讯故障
如果控制器在请求信息时未从 VSD 收到响应，将会出现此信息。警报需
要 8 秒才会出现。
VSD Initialization Fault（VSD 初始化故障）
如果通电后，控制器无法与 VSD 建立通讯，将会出现此信息。
Replace Coolant Filter（更换冷却剂过滤器）
如果闲置模式设置为开，将会出现此信息。如果已安装新的冷却剂过滤
器，此警报用于提醒 IR 服务只使用闲置模式。
Incorrect VSD Type（不正确的 VSD 类型）
如果 VSD 类型与压缩机型号不匹配，通电后将会出现此信息。控制器将
通过比较压缩机类型与驱动器 ID 板确定这一点。
80447204 Rev B
ZH
CONTROL POWER LOSS（控制电源断电）
如果压缩机应当运行、VSD 显示的交流输入电压降至 100 V 交流电压以
下时，将会出现此信息。一旦迅速恢复通电，此警报将延迟 2 秒。相位监
视器也会导致此警报。
Stop Failure（停机故障）
如果压缩应停机但电机速度未降至最低电机速度设定点以下，将会出现此
信息。控制器将在发布警报之前等待 4 秒以使压缩机停机。
High Interstage Pressure（高级间压力）
如果压缩机正在运行、为两级装置、中间级压力高于 75 psi，将会出现
此 信息。
High Coolant Filter Pressure Drop（高冷却剂过滤器压降）
如果装置已至少运行七秒、注入冷却剂温度至少为 140°F、已出现更
换冷却剂过滤器警告、电机速度至少等于最低速度、冷却剂过滤器压降
(5CPT - 6CPT) 大于 35 psi，将会出现此信息。
High Inlet Vacuum（高进口真空度）
如果压缩机载荷运行、电机速度至少为最低速度、进口真空度大于 1.8
psi（真空），将会出现此信息。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
如果压缩机正在运行、存在以下三个条件中的任何一个，将会出现此信
息：(1) 分离筒压力比目标压力高 25 psi。(2) 测量的分离器压降大于 25
psi 且机组排放压力至少为 65 psi。(3) 分离筒压力高于 168 psi。
启动禁止列表
High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
如果 2ATT 高于 228 °F 的 95%，将会出现此信息。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
如果分离筒压力 (3APT) 为 25 psi 或高于压缩机额定压力，将会出现此
信 息。
Waiting for VSD Comms（等待 VSD 命令）
如果压缩机 VSD 未响应控制器的初始通讯，将会出现此信息。
 TRIP HISTORY（警报历史记录）
第 1-4 页（最大）
图 44：Trip History（警报历史记录）
“Trip History（警报历史记录）”文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经历的
最后 15 个警报，以及每个警报的时间戳记。这些警报按顺序记录，编号
1 为最新，编号 15 为最老。新警报发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他
警报的编号均加 1。
标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。第一页显示事件
一至五，第二页显示事件六至十，依此类推。
以下操作将生成事件：
• 开机
• 关机
• 按下“Start（启动）”键
• 按下“Stop（停止）”键
ZH-27
93014.15.07

ZH

• 按下“Load（载荷）”键 页码 2：维护状态
• 按下“Unload（卸荷）”键 图 47：维护状态
• 警告
• 警报
• 启动禁止

活动警报将以红色高亮显示，而清除的警报文本为红色。
警报历史记录还记录警报发生时的压缩机数据以协助诊断与故障排除。导
航到警报条目并按输入按钮将激活警报历史记录对话框。
图 45：警报历史记录对话框

此页面将显示距离应进行维修的时间。
页码 3：维护配置
图 48：维护配置

对话框处于活动状态时，请按左右键以滚动查看显示的数据。警报的名
称 将始终显示在对话框的标题栏中。数据查看完毕时按输入可返回警报
历史 记录屏幕。

 “MAINTENANCE（维护）”文件夹
页码 1：过滤器状态
图 46：过滤器状态

通过此页面，用户可以设置维修间隔及在执行维修之后重置计数器。

 “GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹

⌞ᝅ
此文件夹中的所有参数均可以调整。

页码 1：语言选择
图 49：语言选择

此页面将显示以下各项：
• Coolant Filter Status（冷却剂过滤器状态）
• Separator Element Status（分离器元件状态）
• Inlet Filter Status（进口过滤器状态）

ZH-28 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

语言可以从以下 30 个选项中进行选择： 以下设置显示在该部分中：

• 英语（默认） • 韩语 表 21: 主页选项

• 保加利亚语 • 拉脱维亚语 显示文本 说明

• 简体中文 • 立陶宛语 Auto Return to 在对于显示的延迟时间没有用户活动时，使
• 克罗地亚语 • 马耳他语 Home（自动返回主 控制器返回选定主页。这只能在复选框中显
页） 示“x”时启用。
• 捷克语 • 挪威语
Delay Time（延迟时 确定在控制器返回主页之前处于不活动状态的
• 丹麦语 • 波兰语
间） 秒数。
• 荷兰语 • 葡萄牙语
Select Home Folder（ 用于选择主文件夹。
• 爱沙尼亚语 • 罗马尼亚语 选择主文件夹）
• 芬兰语 • 俄语 Select Home Page（选 用于选择选定主文件夹中的主页。
• 法语 • 斯洛伐克语 择主页）
• 德语 • 斯洛文尼亚语
页码 4-5：时间与日期设置
• 希腊语 • 西班牙语
• 匈牙利语 • 瑞典语 图 73：时间与日期设置
• 意大利语 • 泰国语
• 印度尼西亚语 • 土耳其语
控制器将以选择的语言显示所有屏幕，并且一次只能选择一个语言。
每个语言均以本地翻译显示。
页码 1：衡量单位设置
图 50：衡量单位设置

所有项目均可调整。
以下设置显示在该部分中：
表 26: 时间与日期设置

显示文本 说明
Hours（小时） 可以设置当前小时。小时格式固定为 24 小时。
Minutes（分 可以设置当前分钟。
以下衡量单位设置显示在此部分中： 钟）
表 20: 衡量单位设置 Seconds（秒） 可以设置当前秒钟。
Year（年） 可以设置当前年份。
显示文本 说明 Month（月） 可以设置当前月份。
温度 可在 °F 和 °C 之间选择。 日 可以设置当前日期。
压力 可在 psi、kpa、bar、kg/cm2 之间选 Date Format（日 可在 dd/mm/yyyy（默认）与 mm/dd/yyyy 之间选择。
择。 期格式）
功率 可在 kW 和 HP 之间选择。 Confirm New 用于验证是否需要更改选择。复选框中必须显
页码 3：主页选项 Time and Date（ 示“x”，然后任何更改才会生效。
确认新时间与
图 51：主页选项 日期）
控制器将继续显示所有更改，即使尚未确认选择，而且用户退出页面，然
后返回也是如此。电源循环会将所有选项返回至其当前设置。

⌞ᝅ
控制器不支持夏令时。

80447204 Rev B ZH-29

93014.15.07

ZH

页码 6：背景灯设置 以下设置显示在该部分中：
图 53：背景灯设置 表 24: 以太网设置
显示文本 说明
Enable Ethernet（启用 使用户连接可以利用启用了网络的控制器的功
以太网） 能。
Enable DHCP（启用 使控制器可以自动接收来自局域网 (LAN) 的 IP
DHCP） 地址。
IP Address Setting（ 如果 DHCP 未启用，则此设定点会设置控制器
IP 地址设置） 的 IP 地址。
IP Address Actual（实 在未启用 DHCP 时，这将与 IP 地址设置相匹
际 IP 地址） 配。如果启用了 DHCP，则这将显示由 DHCP 服
务器分配给控制器的地址。
MAC 地址 这是控制器唯一的硬件 MAC 地址。这无法更
改。
Subnet Mask Setting（ 子网掩码的设定点。
子网掩码设置）
以下设置显示在该部分中： Subnet Mask Actual（ 子网掩码的当前读数/设置。
表 23: 背景灯设置 实际子网掩码）
Default Gateway 默认网关的设定点。
显示文本 说明 Setting（默认网关
Backlight 调整显示屏的亮度。 设置）
Brightness（背景 Default Gateway 默认网关的当前读数/设置。
灯亮度） Actual（实际默认网
Enable Backlight 使控制器在对于显示的延迟时间没有用户活动 时 关）
Auto- Off（启用背 关闭背景灯。 Accept（接受） 在编辑所需设定点后，导航到接受设置并按输
景灯自动 关闭） 入，以使设置变量中的值得到控制器的确认。
Backlight Auto-Off 确定在控制器关闭背景灯之前处于不活动状 态的 Cancel（取消） 丢弃对以太网设置所做的任何更改。
Delay Time（背景 秒数。
灯自动关闭 延迟
时间）  “STATUS（状态）”文件夹

⌞ᝅ
⌞ᝅ
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。
按下控制器的任何键都会打开背景灯。
背景灯关闭后，控制器上的“Start（启动）”、“Stop（停 第 1-2 页：模拟输入
止）”、“Load（载荷）”、“Unload（卸荷）”、“Reset（重
置）”和“Acknowledge（确认）”键仍有效。建议按确认键或导航键 图 55：模拟输入
之一，以打开背景灯。

第 7-8 页：以太网设置
图 54：以太网设置

以下输入显示在该部分：
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）
• Injected Coolant Temperature（注入冷却剂温度）
• Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（后冷却器排放温度）
• Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降）
• Coolant Filter Pressure Drop（冷却剂过滤器压降）
• Inlet Vacuum（进口真空度）
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限集成干燥器
• 装置）

ZH-30 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

• Remote Pressure（远程压力）（可选） 数字输入旁边的已标记复选框表明输入处于“TRUE（真）”状态。例如，

启动器反馈在输入处于较高状态时为“TRUE（真）”，而紧急停止在输入
• Coolant Filter Inlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器进口压力）
为 0V 直流电压时为“TRUE（真）”。
• Coolant Filter Outlet Pressure（冷却剂过滤器出口压力）
以下各项显示在该部分中：
• Interstage Pressure（中间级压力）（仅限 2 级装置）
• EMERGENCY STOP（紧急停止）
• Evaporator（蒸发器）
• Main Motor Overload（主电机过载）
• Condenser（冷凝器）
• Fan Motor Overload（风扇电机过载）
页码 4：压缩机数据 • Condensate Drain Error（冷凝液排放错误）
图 56：压缩机数据 • Remote Stop（远程停止）
• Remote Start（远程启动）
• Remote Lead/Lag（远程超前/滞后）
• Remote Load Enable（远程载荷启用）
• Remote Load/Unload（远程载荷/卸荷）
• Auxiliary Input 1（辅助输入 1）
• Auxiliary Input 2（辅助输入 2）
• Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）

第 9-10 页：数字输出
图 58：数字输出

以下各项显示在该部分中：
• % Energy Saving（节能百分比）
• % CAPACITY（功率百分比）
• Package Power（机组功率）
• Power On Hours（开机时数）
• Running Hours（运行时数）
• Motor Speed（电机速度）
• Time（时间）
• Motor Current（电机电流）
• Motor Voltage（电机电压）
数字输出旁边的已标记复选框表明其已通电。
• AC Input Voltage（交流输入电压）
• Starter Contact 1（启动器触点 1）
• DC Bus Voltage（直流总线电压）
• Starter Contact 2（启动器触点 2）
• IGBT U Temperature（IGBT U 温度）
• Fan Starter Contact（风扇启动器触点）
• IGBT V Temperature（IGBT V 温度）
• Blowdown Solenoid（放气电磁阀）
• IGBT W Temperature（IGBT W 温度）
• Modulation Solenoid（调制电磁阀）
• Input Rectifier Temperature（输入整流器温度）
• Condensate Drain（冷凝液排放管）
• VSD Ambient Temperature（VSD 环境温度）
• Dryer Run / Fan Run（干燥器运行/风扇运行）
• Remote Maximum Speed（远程最大速度）
• PORO Horn（PORO 警报器）
• Remote Maximum Pressure（远程最大压力）
• Trip Relay（警报继电器）
• 目标压力
• Warning Relay（警告继电器）
第 7-8 页：数字输入 • Low Voltage Output 1（低电压输出 1）
图 57：数字输入 • Low Voltage Output 2（低电压输出 2）
• Low Voltage Output 3（低电压输出 3）
• Low Voltage Output 4（低电压输出 4）

⌞ᝅ
(RO) 表示只读值。

80447204 Rev B ZH-31

93014.15.07

ZH

页码 11：模拟输出 第 2-3 页：出厂设置

图 59：模拟输出 图 61：出厂设置

模拟输出的值将以 mA 为单位。
这些页面用于设置特定于压缩机的参数。下面列出了可调整的所有出厂设
• VSD 风扇输出 置。这些页面中的所有设置均受密码保护。
• 模拟输出 2 “Compressor Type（压缩机类型）”将在此处选择。选项列出如下：
• 37 kW/50 hp 1-S (46, 47) (38, 39)
 “FACTORY SETTINGS（出厂设置）”文件夹 • 45 kW/60 hp 1-S (47) (39)
此文件夹供 IR 工厂与维修人员使用。必须在第一页输入密码以便调整此 • 55 kW/75 hp 1-S (48, 49) (40, 41)
文件夹中的值。此文件夹用于设置特定于该压缩机的参数及显示控制器
• 75 kW/100 hp 1-S (49) (41)
的 软件信息。
• 90 kW 1-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
页码 1：密码
• 125 hp 1-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
图 60：密码
• 110 kW 1-S (51) (43)
• 150 hp 1-S (51) (43)
• 132 kW 1-S (52, 53) (44, 45)
• 200 hp 1-S (53) (45)
• 160 kW 1-S (53) (45)
• 90 kW 2-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
• 125 hp 2-S (50, 51) (42, 43)
• 110 kW 2-S (51) (43)
• 150 hp 2-S (51) (43)
• 132 kW 2-S (52, 53) (44, 45)
• 200 hp 2-S (53) (45)
• 160 kW 2-S (53) (45)
表 25: 密码
Water Cooled（水冷）（开/关）
Password（ 提供访问权，以输入有效密码，从而获取对受密码保护
密码）: 参数的访问。可通过向下滚动至密码值并按回车键来输 Hot Side Thermal Valve（热端热阀）（开/关）
入密码。 Enable PAC（启用 PAC）（开/关）
Password 此复选框表示有效密码已输入。如果此复选框为空，则可
Enable Dryer（启用干燥器）（开/关）
entered（ 能尚未输入有效密码或密码已超时。这为只读。
输入的密 Constant Running Dryer（持续运行干燥器）（开/关）
码）：
Running Hours（运行时数）（可调整）
Password 勾选此复选框将启用密码时间功能。
timeout Loaded Hours（载荷时数） （可调整）
enable（密
码超时启
用）：
Timeout 此超时可与密码超时启用一起让用户设置重新输入有效
Delay（ 密 码所需的可调整时间段。达到此超时后，需要重新输
超时延 入有 效密码。
迟）：

ZH-32 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

第 4-5 页：软件信息 第 11-12 页：VSD 诊断

图 62：软件信息 图 64：VSD 诊断

这些页面用于显示控制器的软件信息。所有项目均为只读。 VSD 诊断屏幕用于对任何驱动器问题进行故障排除。

第 6-10 页：最大值 ⌞ᝅ
图 84：最大值
这些屏幕必须仅由授权的维修技术人员使用。必须输入密码才能激活
这 些诊断测试。

第 13-16 页：VSD 维修菜单

图 65：VSD 维修菜单

最大值页面用于记录自上次最大值重置以来控制器看到的最高值。每个最
大值条目显示所记录的最高值以及这些最大值出现时的时间与日期戳。
最终最大值页面在页面底部有重置设置，高亮显示此按钮并点击输入将使
控制器清除最大值的所有历史记录并开始再次进行记录。必须输入密码才
能使用此重置功能。
VSD 诊断屏幕用于对任何驱动器问题进行故障排除。

⌞ᝅ
这些屏幕必须仅由授权的维修技术人员使用。必须输入密码才能激活
这 些诊断测试。

80447204 Rev B ZH-33

93014.15.07

ZH

操作说明（XE-70M 控制器）
 用户界面 图例 名称 功能
控制器的标准用户界面配置包含膜和 LCD 显示屏。 膜包含五个命令键（ 确认 使屏幕在导航模式和编辑模式间切换。
Start [启动]、Stop [停止]、Load [载荷]、Unload [卸荷] 和 Reset [重置]）、
四个导航键（Up [向上]、Right [向右]、Left [向左] 和 Down [向下]）以及
编辑模式选择键（Enter [确认]）。 这些键与图形显示屏和 LED 图标共同
组成了压缩机的用户界面。

图 66: Xe-70M ⌞ᝅ
变速压缩机上不使用“Load（载荷）”或“Unload（卸荷）”键。

 导航键
有四个导航键（“UP [向上]”、“RIGHT [向右]”、“DOWN [向
下]”和“LEFT [向左]）”。 未考虑“ENTER（确认）”键作为导航键
时，其将用于结合导航键进行选择或确认选择。
图 67 : 导航键

 LED 状态图标
三个 LED 图标用于从远处表示控制系统的当前状态，并且位于用户界面
的左上方

表 26: Xe-70M LED 状态图标

图标 名称 功能 滚动导航键。 按下其中一个导航键将让用户沿导航路径移动。 每次按下

确定 在未感应到警告或故障停机时亮起。 可以 该键时，将执行路径中的其他步骤。 一旦到达导航路径的终点，按下该
处于“Ready（就绪）”或“Not Ready（未就 键多次会将用户返回路径开头。 按下相反的键，将让用户以相反的方向
绪）”状态。 当设备为“Running Unloaded（卸 沿导航路径移动。 到达开头后，按下相反的键会让用户移至路径终点。
荷运行）”时此图标将闪烁  显示布局
警报 在感应到警告（闪烁）或故障停机（常亮）时
图 68 : 显示布局
亮起。 可以处于“Ready（就绪）”（警告）
或“Tripped（故障停机）”状态。
A
自动 当压缩机在自动重启模式下停机时亮起。 B

 命令键 C
这些键可命令控制器执行操作，如下表中所指定。 按下任何这些键时，
将启动以下操作并记录在事件日志中。

表 27: Xe-70M 命令键

D
图例 名称 功能
载荷 将压缩机置于选定操作模式。 如果压力状况正 表 28 : 显示布局
确，装置将载荷。
图例 名称 说明
A 文件夹栏 使用选项卡以图形方式标示每个文件夹。

卸荷 将压缩机置于卸荷状态。 装置将无限期地以卸 B 标题栏 标示当前文件夹和页面（带下划线）。

荷状态运行 C 页面内容 当前页面的内容。
D 仪表盘 显示系统状态。

重置 更正故障条件后，会清除警告和故障停机警报。

启动 启动压缩机。

停止 停止压缩机。 应按下此按钮来正常停止工作而
非紧急停止。

ZH-34 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

 文件夹导航和图标 图 69：数字条目窗口
要在 LCD 显示屏上显示的选项卡文件夹之间移动，请按“RIGHT（向
右）”和“LEFT（向左）”键。 导航从最后一个文件夹滚动至第一个文
件夹，反之亦可。
表 29 : 文件夹栏图标
文件夹名称 图标 说明
Home（主页） 系统性能和状态主要信息。 控制器第
一次通电时，此文件夹的第一个页面是
默认页面。 ⌞ᝅ
Operator Settings（操 系统选项和配置设置。
并非所有页面上都有可调整的参数。 某些页面只有只读信息。
作人员设置）
Events（事件） 系统事件日志。  仪表盘图标
仪表盘旨在快速查看系统状态。 下表列出了标准仪表盘图标和这些图标
Trip History（故障停 有关最新故障停机警报的详细信息。 的定义。 请注意，这些图标的颜色根据运行时应用设置的状态更改。
机历史记录）
表 31 : Xe-70M 仪表盘图标
Maintenance（维护） 用于压缩机保养项目的状态和通知设
置。 名称 图标 说明
General Settings（常 常规设置，例如语言、时间和计量单 Remote 远程控制已启用。 该设置可以是 Remote
规设置） 位。 Control（远 Start/Stop（远程启动/停止）、COM Control（
程控制） COM 控制）、Integral Sequencing（次序联控）
Integral Sequencing（ “Integral Sequencing（次序联控）”通 或 Web Control（网络控制）
次序联控） 信状态和配置。
Service 维修提醒将近或已过期
Status（状态） 所有模拟和数字 I/O 的测量或状态 Required（ （即： 需要更换空气过滤器或滤油器）。
需要维修
Factory Settings（出 压缩机调节参数。 还显示硬件和软件 卸荷 或 压缩机处于卸荷状态。
厂设置） 版本。 载荷
压缩机处于载荷状态。
 PAGE NAVIGATION（页面导航）
选择所需文件夹之后，按下“DOWN（向下）”键后会移至页面选择区
域，然后使用“RIGHT（向右）”和“LEFT（向左）”键，来选择所需页  仪表盘状态消息
面。 使用“UP（向上）”键，返回文件夹选项卡。
仪表盘还显示压缩机的当前运行状态。 设备运行期间可能会遇到以下几
表 30 : 标题栏页面图标 种状态：
• Ready to Start（启动准备就绪）- 压缩机当前不存在故障停机或启动禁
图标 止状况。 按下启动按钮可随时启动设备
说明 • Starting（正在启动）- 已向压缩机发出启动命令并且正在执行启动顺
启动页面选择区域。 序。 此状态的持续时间可能随设备的起动机类型而不同。
• Load Delay（载荷延迟）- 压缩机在启动后、允许设备载荷前要等待一
表示向右导航可显示更多页面。 小段时间。 这可以确保设备在载荷前处于运行状态
• Running Loaded（载荷运行）- 压缩机正在运行并产生空气。 进口阀打
表示向左导航可显示更多页面。 开，放气阀关闭。
• Running Unloaded（卸荷运行）- 压缩机正在运行，但不产生空气。 进
口阀关闭，放气阀打开。
 ACCESSING PARAMETERS（访问参数）
• Reload Delay（重载延迟） -压缩机卸荷之后及再次载荷之前的短暂时
选择所需页面后，可以使用“DOWN（向下）”键选择页面的参数。 每 间。 这会让进口与旁通阀有时间到达正确位置。
次按下“DOWN（向下）”键，光标将移至下一参数。 使用“UP（向 • Auto-Restart（自动重启）- 压缩机因压力上升到超过脱机压力或自动停
上）”键，返回上一参数。 机设定点、自动重启功能被启用而停机。 当压力回落到联机压力或目
标压力设定点时，压缩机将自动重启。
光标移动，因此在选择最后一个参数后，按下“DOWN（向下）”键会
将光标导航至“文件夹栏”。 如果选择第一个参数，则按下“UP（向 • Stopping（正在停机）- 压缩机已收到停机命令并且正在执行停机顺序
上）”键会将光标移至页面选择区域。 • Blowdown（放气）- 压缩机在停止电机后、允许再次启动前必须等待
选择后，可通过按下“ENTER（确认）”键，访问参数。 使 一小段时间。 如果在放气期间收到启动命令，压缩机将在放气结束
用“NAVIGATION（导航）”键进行更改，然后通过再次按“ENTER（确 时重新启动。
认）”键确认设置。 访问参数后，按下“ENTER（确认）”键可将当前设 • Not Ready（未就绪）- 压缩机已检测到不允许压缩机启动的状况。 该
置输入控制体系，并将光标导航回在页面上选择的参数。 状况必须清除才允许启动，但不必进行确认。
当光标处于具有启用/禁用框的参数上时，按下“ENTER（确认）”键将转 • Tripped（故障停机）- 压缩机已检测到使设备停机的异常运行状况。
换设置。 必须通过点击复位按钮确认故障停机，压缩机才能启动。
• Processor Unit（处理器初始化）- 控制器正在初始化。
图标 将显示在数字条目窗口中（请参见下方的图 69）。 将光标放在
图标上，然后按下“ENTER（确认）”键将取消条目以及所做的所有更
改。

80447204 Rev B ZH-35

93014.15.07

ZH

 恒速压缩机 页面 3 和 4
图 72 : 模拟输入和压缩机信息
 主文件夹
页面 1 - 系统概览
图 70 : 这是系统通电后的出厂默认显示。

这是系统通电后的出厂默认显示。
• Online Pressure Setpoint（加载压力设定点）- 在黑色框中以白色箭头表
示，始终在测量计中心点左侧。 当机组排放压力回落到该值以下时，
压缩机将会载荷。
• Offline Pressure Setpoint（卸载压力设定点）- 在黑色框中以白色箭头表
示，始终在测量计中心点右侧。 当机组排放压力上升到超过该值时，
压缩机将会卸荷。
任何未安装或正在报告故障的传感器将显示一个[ - - ] 符号。
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）- 以测量计中心下的大数字
并以黑色箭头表示。 这是压缩机向工厂供应的空气压力。 ⌞ᝅ
• Pressure Unit of Measure（压力计量单位）- 在机组排放压力下指示。
可从“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹选择。 这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。

• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）- 由显示屏右下部的数字

表示。 这是压缩模块排放处空气/机油混合物的温度。
• Temperature Unit of Measure（温度计量单位）- 在空气端排放温度右侧
指示。 可从“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹选择。
• Run Hours（运行时间）- 由显示屏左下部中的数字表示。 压缩机电机
已运行的时数。
⌞ᝅ
可在此页面中选择联机与脱机设定点并进行修改。 此页面上的所有其
他信息均为只读。
以下模拟输入将显示在该部分中。
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）- 压缩机提供给工厂的压力
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）- 油槽中压缩机的内部压力。
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）- 压缩模块排放处空
气/机油混合物的温度。
• Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）- 空气通过后冷
却器后的温度。 注意 - 仅在购买和安装“Low Ambient（低环境温
度）”选项时显示。
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）- 压缩机在干燥器
前传递的压力。 注意 - 仅在购买和安装 TAS 选项时显示。

页面 2 - 计数器 • Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降）- 通过分离器元件的压降

• Dryer Run Status（干燥器运行状态）（仅限集成干燥器装置）- 表示干
图 71 : 计数器
燥器目前正在运行（勾选）还是未运行（空白）的复选框
• Time and Date（时间与日期）
• Main Motor Current（主电机电流）- 由已安装的电流传感器测量的通过
主电机的电流

• Hour Meters（小时表）- 指示以下流程的小时数： 控制器已通电、压缩

机已运行、压缩机以载荷状态运行。
• Starts（启动数）- 指示压缩机上尝试启动的次数。
• Date & Time（日期和时间）- 表示当前日期和时间。 该设置
在“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹中可调整且可配置。

⌞ᝅ
此页面上的所有信息均为只读。

ZH-36 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07
 操作人员设置文件夹
页面 1-2 操作人员设置
图 73 : 操作人员设置
以下值均为设定点
Online Pressure（联机压力）- 当机组排放压力回落到该值以下时，压缩机
将会载荷。
范围（单位为 PSI）： 65 至脱机压力 - 10
Offline Pressure（脱机压力）- 当机组排放压力上升到超过该值时，压缩机
将会卸荷。 范围（单位为 PSI）： 75 至额定压力 + 10。 请注意，如果
正在运行 TAS 设备，该范围会降低 7 psi
Lead/Lag（超前/滞后）- 当勾选此框时，压缩机将作为一台超前设备运
行。 取消勾选此框，设备将作为一台滞后设备运行。
Lag Offset（滞后偏移）- 如果设备作为滞后压缩机运行，要将联机和脱机
设定点减去滞后偏移。范围（单位为 PSI）： 0 - 45，取决于联机和脱机
设定点。 滞后偏移不会允许您超过最低或最高联机和脱机设定点值。
Mode of Operation（操作模式）- 选择有联机/脱机、调制/ACS 以及调制
- 选择哪种模式取决于压缩机将如何尝试保持特定压力。
• Online/Offline（联机/脱机）- 压缩机将通过为打开进口阀和关闭放气阀
（当机组排放压力回落到联机压力设定点以下时）的电磁阀提供电压
来为设备添加载荷。 当压力升至脱机压力设定点时，压缩机将通过断
开电磁阀的电源来卸荷设备。
• Modulation（调制）-处于联机/脱机状态时，压缩机仍会载荷及卸荷，
但会为用于调制的不同电磁阀通电。 当机组排放压力介于联机和脱
机压力设定点之间时，压缩机将调整进口阀，以便达到稳定输出压
力。 目标输出压力由技师在进口阀进行设置，以便提供有效的调制控
制。 调制只有在机组排放压力高于 60 psi 时才能工作。 调制是一种
选项，必须在出厂设置选项卡启用。
• Mod/ACS（调制/ACS）- 压缩机将以联机脱机模式初次启动。 如果
压缩机在 3 分钟之内完成了 3 次载荷/卸荷循环，则将切换为调制模
式。 压缩机将保持为调制模式，直到按下停止按钮或者输入卸荷和
载荷指令 3 分钟之后。 Mod/ACS 是一种选项，必须在出厂设置选项
卡启用。
Unloaded Stop Time（卸荷停机时间）- 在收到停机指令之后、允许电机停
机之前，设备必须卸荷运行的时间。
范围（单位为秒）： 10 - 30
Starter Time（起动时间）- 输入启动指令之后压缩机达到运行速度以便能
够产生空气所需的时间。
范围（单位为秒）： 5 - 30
这些页中的参数可以随时调整。
*请注意，只有在已经为压缩机购买调制选项并且开启“Enable
Modulation（启用调制）”时才能调整“Mode of Operation（操作模
式）”。
80447204 Rev B
ZH
页面 3-6 操作人员选项
图 74 : 操作人员选项
以下值均为设定点
Enable Auto-Restart（启用自动重启）- 启用此设定点将允许压缩机在卸荷
运行一段时间以及电机超过其最低运行时间（大多数情况下为 10 分钟）
之后停止运行。
Auto-Restart Time（自动重启时间）- 停止并自动重启之前压缩机必须运行
的时间。 该时间起于机组排放压力升至脱机设定点的那一刻。 必须满
足该时间和最低电机运行时间（10 分钟）才能停止运行压缩机并自动重
启。 范围（单位为秒）2 - 60
Auto-Restart Delay（自动重启延迟）- 机组排放压力回落到联机设定点以
下之后压缩机自动重启之前的时间段 范围（单位为秒）： 0 - 60
COM Control（COM 控制）- 启用此设定点允许压缩机由串行或以太网设备
（例如 X8I）来控制。 这相当于旧 Intellisys 控制器上的“Sequencer（定
序器）”选项。
Remote Start/Stop（远程启动/停止）- 启用此设定点允许在控制器上输入数
字来启动和停止压缩机。
Enable PORO（启用 PORO）- 启用此设定点将允许压缩机在停电恢复之后
自动重启，如果停电时压缩机正在载荷运行的话。 PORO 是一种选项，
必须购买并安装此选项才能打开此功能。
PORO Time（PORO 时间）- 控制器电源恢复并且控制器完成启动，压缩机
将执行一次 PORO 启动之前所需的时间。 在这段时间内，PORO 喇叭会鸣
响。范围（单位为秒）： 10 - 600
Low Ambient Temp（低环境温度）- 低于此温度时，低环境温度选项将发
挥作用。范围（单位为 °F）： 30 - 60
Scheduled Start Day（计划的启动日期）- 一周中将执行计划的启动的某一
天或某几天。 当板载时钟运行到计划的启动设定点日期、小时和分钟
时，压缩机将启动。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此
选项才能打开此功能。
Scheduled Start Hour（计划的启动小时）- 一天中将执行计划的启动的某个
小时。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打开
此功能。
ZH-37
93014.15.07

ZH

Scheduled Start Minute（计划的启动分钟）- 一小时中将执行计划的启动的

某分钟。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打  “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
开此功能。
页面 1 达到最大值 50
Scheduled Stop Day（计划的停止日期）- 一周中将执行计划的停止的某一
天或某几天。 当板载时钟运行到计划的停止设定点日期、小时和分钟 图 76 : “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
时，压缩机将停止运行。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安
装此选项才能打开此功能。
Scheduled Stop Hour（计划的停止小时）- 一天中将执行计划的停止的某个
小时。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打开
此功能。
Scheduled Stop Minute（计划的停止分钟）- 一小时中将执行计划的停止的
分钟。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打开
此功能。
请注意，为了禁用计划的启动/停止，计划的启动和停止日期、小时和分
事件文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经历的最后 250 个事件，以及每个事
钟必须完全匹配。
件的时间和日期。 这些事件按顺序记录，编号 1 为最新，编号 250 为最
* 如果低环境温度出厂设定点打开，则低环境温度只可调整。 老。 新事件发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他事件的编号均加 1。

** 值为 0 将禁用超前/延迟循环时间功能。 标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 5 个事件。 第一页显示事

件一至五，第二页显示事件六至十，依此类推。
页面 7 校准传感器
可以通过导航至事件并按压右箭头导航键来查看事件的时间和日期。 然
图 75 : 校准传感器 后按压“ENTER（确认）”键退出时间和日期窗口。
图 77 : “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹

传感器校准只能在设备停止运行并且传感器上没有压力的情况下才能进 以下项目将生成事件。
行。 校准仅需要在更换传感器和控制器、升级控制器软件后或操作人员
怀疑传感器读数有错误时进行。 通过选择传感器名称旁边的复选框可对 • 开机
其进行校准。 请注意，复选框可能显示太快而无法看到。 可通过验证 • 关机
传感器数值目前是否为零来确认校准。
• 按下“Start（启动）”键
以下列出的每个传感器均可以进行校准。
• 按下“Stop（停止）”键
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）(3APT) - 仅限于“Enable 3APT（启用
3APT）”设定点开启的装置。 R4 - 11 台装置通常不安装 3APT • 按下“Load（载荷）”键

• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）(4APT) • 按下“Unload（卸荷）”键

• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）(7APT) - 仅在具有 • 远程启动压缩机

集成干燥器的装置上 • 远程停止压缩机
请注意，如果传感器当前读取的值与零相差其范围的 +/- 10%，则传感器 • 远程载荷压缩机
将无法进行校准，并且会在事件日志中记录一个警告。 请确保传感器在 • 远程卸荷压缩机
尝试校准之前暴露于空气中。
• 警告
• 故障停机
• 启动禁止

活动警告将显示闪烁的警示图标 而确认警告则显示实心图标。

活动故障停机将显示闪烁的故障停机图标 ，而确认的故障停机则显
示实心图标。
活动的启动禁止将列在事件日志中，但没有图标显示。 如果启动禁止处
于活动状态，则显示屏将指示压缩机未准备好启动。

ZH-38 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

警告事件列表 High Discharge Press（高排放压力）

Sensor Failure（传感器故障） Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Disch Pres（高排放压力）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： 7ATT Failure（7ATT 故障） 如果装置使用远程传感器或者由外部设备（例如 X8I）控制、已载荷、排
放压力 (4APT) 大于最大脱机压力，将会出现此消息。 这一状况必须持
当传感器 7ATT 被认为缺少或损坏时，将会显示此消息。 传感器故障消 续 3 秒，才会发布警告。 如果出现此状况，压缩机将自动卸荷。 一旦
息应遵循以下格式： 7ATT 故障。 仅在安装了集成干燥器（在出厂设置 排放压力回落到额定压力值，此装置将可以重载。
菜单中进行访问）时才会显示 7APT 传感器故障。 这一状况必须持续 3
秒，才会发布警告。 Dryer Temp Warning（干燥器温度警告）
Change Separator Element（更换分离器元件） Xe-70M 屏显文本： Dryer Temp（干燥器温度）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Chg Sep Elem（更换分离器元件） 对于 R-30 - 37 kW 压缩机而言，如果干燥器冷凝器或蒸发器温度开关关
闭，将会出现此消息。 冷凝器开关正在锁定，并且必须在通过控制器进
如果装置载荷、机组排放压力 (4APT) 至少 90 psi 以及分离器压降大于 12 行重置之前手动重置。 蒸发器开关无法锁闭，只要信号一开启就会重
psi，将会出现此消息。 这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。 置。 如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，干燥器可以重启。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点 请注意，对于配备 TAS 的 R4 - 11 kW 压缩机而言，干燥器温度警告会在
High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度） 设定点温度超过 14.5 degC 达 6 分钟或更长时间时触发。 该警告也会在
干燥器中的温度探针发生故障时触发。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High A/E Disch T（高主机排气温度）
Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）
如果装置正在运行、2ATT 大于 221 °F（228 的 97%），将会出现此消
息。 这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。 Xe-70M 屏显文本： Dryer High Pres（干燥器高压）

High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力） 在带集成干燥器的装置上，这将在干燥器高压开关打开而干燥器正在运行

时出现。 这是干燥器故障。 如果出现这种情况，压缩机将继续运行，
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Sump Pres（高分离筒压力） 但干燥器将停止。 触点必须至少打开 3 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。
如果装置载荷运行、已至少载荷 8 秒、分离筒压力比压缩机的额定压力 然而，此开关是锁定式开关。 干燥器高压开关必须在此警告可以重置之
高 25 psi 以上，将会出现此信息。 如果出现此警告，联机与脱机压力将 前进行重置（触点闭合）。 如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，
减少。 例如，100 psi 的额定压力的最大脱机压力为 110 psi。 如果在本 干燥器可以重启。
例中油槽压超过 125 psi，将会出现此警告。 这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才 Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤器）
会发布警告。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Change HE Filt（更换 HE 过滤器）
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点。
HE 过滤器位于后冷却器排放管与干燥器进口之间并且仅存在于带集成干
维修 燥器的装置上。 HE 过滤器上的压差通过从后冷却器排放压力中减去机组
依据总运行时间，当设备运行了一定时间后，将会出现维修警告。 维修 排放压力来进行计量。 如果压缩机正在运行、HE 过滤器上测量的压差大
警告可有多个级别，具体取决于维修级别的选择。 选择维修级别 0 将禁 于或等于 14 psi (0.7 bar)、机组排放压力 (4APT) 高于 90 psi，将会出现此
用维修警告。 警告。 条件必须至少存在 3 秒，然后才会出现警告。 这不是干燥器故
障。 如果出现这种情况，将显示警告，但干燥器将继续运行。
Service Level 1（维修级别 1）
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 7APT（启用 7APT）”设定点
Xe-70M 屏显文本： SVC Required（需要维修）
Invalid Calibration
如果为装置选择了维修级别 1，“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告
将以等于维修时段设定点的时间间隔进行发布。 与任何其他警告一样， Xe-70M On-Screen Text: Invalid Cal
此警告可以重置。 Will occur if the sensor zero value is ± 10% of its scale. See Sensor Calibration.
Service Level 2（维修级别 2） 故障停机事件列表
Xe-70M 屏显文本： 100 hours to Svc, SVC Required, Service Alarm（100 小 Low Sump Pressure（低分离筒压力）
时后需要维修，需要维修，维修警报）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Low Sump Press（低分离筒压力）
如果为装置选择了维修级别 2，则维修完成出厂设定点将用于清除级别 2
维修警告及重置维修时间或日期。 在维修警告出现之前，可以先重置维 如果装置卸荷或载荷运行、3APT 小于 13 psi 的状况持续了 15 秒，将会
修完成。 出现此信息。

首次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告将在总时间间隔等于维修时 请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点

段设定点时出现。 然而，在此之前的 100 个小时，将出现“100 HOURS High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
TO SERVICE（100 小时后需要维修）”警告。 与任何其他警告一样，
此警告可以重置。 一百小时之后将出现“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维 Xe-70M 屏显文本： High A/E Disch T（高主机排气温度）
修）”警告。 此警告可以像任何其他警告一样重置，然而，如果未设
置维修完成出厂设定点，此警告将在 24 小时后返回。 如果未设置维修 如果 2ATT 大于 228 °F、装置正在运行，将会出现此消息。
完成，100 小时后，将发布“ALARM - SERVICE REQUIRED（警报 - 需要 Check Motor Rotation（检查电机旋转）
维修）”警告。 此警告只能由维修完成出厂设定点清除。 设置维修完
成出厂设定点即表明维修已完成之后，下次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要 Xe-70M 屏显文本： Ck Motor Rot（检查电机旋转）
维修）”警告的时间将通过将维修时间段添加到总小时数值来计算，并 如果在启动 3 秒后某装置上 3APT 小于 1 psi（在装置装有软启动器或空
且“100 HOURS TO SERVICE（100 小时后需要维修）”警告在 100 个小时 气端排放温度低于 50 °F 时 6 秒），将会出现此信息。 此状况可能由
前出现且“ALARM - SERVICE REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警告在此之 电机反向运行导致。 形成正确的电机旋转后，此故障停机警报将不再被
后 100 个小时出现。 检查，除非拔下控制器电源。 但是，如果未建立正确的电机旋转，每次
启动之后都将检查此故障，直到建立正确的电机旋转为止。 当控制器在
启动后 3 秒之内读取到分离筒压力为 1 psi 或者更高时，将建立正确的电
机旋转。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点

80447204 Rev B ZH-39

93014.15.07

ZH

Overload（过载）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Overload（过载）  TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录）

如果风扇或电机过载继电器打开，将会出现此消息。 触点必须至少打开 页面 1 达到最大值 3

3 秒，然后才会出现故障停机警报。 图 78 : TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Main Motor OL（主电机过载）
如果电流传感器指明电机电流过度，将会显示此消息。 该过载相当于
10A 类故障停机级别。
Remote Stop Failure（远程停止失败）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Rem Stop Fail（远程停止失败）
如果远程启动/停止选项启用、远程停止按钮保持打开状态、任一启动按
钮按下，将会出现此消息。
Remote Start Failure（远程启动失败）
“Trip History（故障停机历史记录）”文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Rem Start Fail（远程启动失败） 历的最后 15 个故障停机警报，以及每个故障停机警报的时间戳记。 这
些故障停机警报按顺序记录，编号 1 为最新，编号 15 为最老。 新故障停
如果远程启动/停止选项启用、装置由远程启动按钮启动、装置启动后按
机发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他故障停机的编号均加 1。
钮保持闭合 7 秒，将会出现此消息。
标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。 第一页显示事
Sensor Failure（传感器故障）
件一至五，第二页显示事件六至十，依此类推。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： 3APT Failure, 4APT Failure, 7APT Failure, 2ATT Failure,
以下项目将在故障停机历史记录中生成条目。
Main Motor CT Failure（3APT 故障、4APT 故障、7APT 故障、2ATT 故障、
主电机 CT 故障） • 故障停机

当传感器被认为缺少或损坏时，将会显示此消息。 受此故障停机影响的 活动故障停机将显示闪烁的故障停机图标 ，而确认的故障停机则显

传感器有 CT1、CT2、CT3、3APT、4APT、7APT 和 2ATT。 显示的传感 示实心图标。
器应带有传感器故障消息。 传感器故障消息应遵循以下格式： 3APT 故
障。 故障停机历史记录还记录故障停机发生时的压缩机数据以协助诊断与故障
排除。导航到故障停机条目并点击右侧导航按钮将弹出故障停机历史记录
Emergency Stop（紧急停止） 对话框。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Emergency Stop（紧急停止） 图 79 : TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录）
当按下紧急停止按钮时，将会出现此消息。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Sump Pres（高分离筒压力）
如果压缩机至少载荷运行 8 秒、存在以下 3 个条件中的任何一个，将会
出现此信息。 (1) 分离筒压力比额定压力高 35 psi。 (2) 测量的分离器压
降高于 25 psi，且机组排放压力至少等于最低联机设定点值。 (3) 额定压
力低于 190 psi 时分离筒压力高于 165 psi，或者额定压力为 190 psi 时分
离筒压力高于 220。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点 对话框处于活动状态时，请按左右键以滚动查看显示的数据。 故障停机
警报的名称将始终显示在对话框的标题栏中。 数据查看完毕时按输入可
Unit Too Cold To Start（装置太冷无法启动） 返回故障停机历史记录屏幕。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Unit Too Cold（装置太冷）
如果装置没有低环境温度选项、空气端排放温度 (2ATT) 小于 35°F、操  维护文件夹
作人员尝试启动压缩机，将会出现此信息。 此故障每天只能发生一次。
此故障发生后，操作人员可以进行重置并启动压缩机。 此故障将记录到 页面 1 - 过滤器状态
故障停机历史记录，表明装置要在低环境温度条件下启动。
图 80 : 过滤器状态
启动禁止列表
High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High A/E Disch T（高主机排气温度）
如果 2ATT 高于 228 °F 的 95%，将会出现此消息。
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Sump Pres（高分离筒压力）
如果分离筒压力 (3APT) 为 25 psi 或高于压缩机额定压力，将会出现此信
息。 此页显示过滤器的状态。 过滤器的状态可以是“OK（正
常）”或“Change（更换）”，这取决于压缩机的诊断读数。 如果过滤
器达到“更换”状态，将发出一条警告，维修指示灯将亮起，以通知用
户。 请注意，若要检查这些保养项目，压缩机必须处于“载荷运行”状
态。 如果压缩机未处于运行状态 - 此状态将显示“Load（载荷）”，直
到设备正在运行并且尚未重置时发出保养指示为止。
将显示以下过滤器
• 分离器芯

ZH-40 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

页面 2 维护配置 页面 2 - 时间和日期设置
图 81 : 维护配置 图 83 : 时间和日期设置

通过此页面，用户可以设置维修间隔及在执行维修之后重置计数器。 维
所有项目均可调整。
修间隔可以设置成 1000 和 8000 小时之间的任何值，但是必须根据工厂
保养计划进行设置。 执行保养之后，用户可以通过导航到“Reset（重 时间允许将当前时间设置为 24 小时格式
置）”按钮并按下确认键重置计数器。 请注意，更改维修间隔后，必须
进行重置以便将“Hours Until Service（维修前时间）”设置为正确值。 日期支持设置当前月、日、年
日期格式可在 dd/mm/yyyy（默认）、mm/dd/yyyy 和 YYYY/MM/DD 之间选择
 常规设置文件夹 确认新时间和日期用于确认需要对选项进行的更改。 复选框中必须显
常规设置文件夹中的所有参数均可以调整。 示“x”，然后更改才会生效。

页面 1 - 语言和单位选择 控制器将继续显示所有更改，即使尚未确认选择，而且用户退出页面，然
后返回也是如此。 电源循环会将所有选项返回至其当前设置。
图 82 : 语言和单位选择
⌞ᝅ
控制器不支持夏令时。

页面 3 - 背景灯设置
图 84 : 背景灯设置

语言可以从以下 30 个选项中进行选择：

• 英语（默认） • 韩语
• 保加利亚语 • 拉脱维亚语
• 简体中文 • 立陶宛语
• 克罗地亚语 • 马耳他语
• 捷克语 • 挪威语 背景灯亮度可调整显示屏的亮度。
• 丹麦语 • 波兰语
⌞ᝅ
• 荷兰语 • 葡萄牙语
• 爱沙尼亚语 • 罗马尼亚语 按下控制器的任何键都会打开背景灯。
• 芬兰语 • 俄语
• 法语 • 斯洛伐克语 䆜઀
• 德语 • 斯洛文尼亚语 背景灯关闭后，控制器上的“START（启动）”、“STOP（停
• 希腊语 • 西班牙语 止）”、“LOAD（载荷）”、“UNLOAD（卸荷）”、“RESET（重
置）”和“ACKNOWLEDGE（确认）”键仍有效。 建议按回车键或任一
• 匈牙利语 • 瑞典语
导航键来打开背景灯。
• 意大利语 • 泰国语
• 印度尼西亚语 • 土耳其语 页面 4 - 串行端口地址设置

控制器将以选择的语言显示所有屏幕，并且一次只能选择一个语言。 图 85 : 串行端口地址设置

每个语言均以本地翻译显示。
温度可在 oF 和 oC 之间选择。
压力可在 psi、kpa、bar、kg/cm2 之间选择。

此页允许用户为控制器能够与之通信的 RS-485 网络设置网络地址。

Active Protocol（有效协议）- 允许串行端口配置为 Airbus（用于 X 系
列系统控制器和次序联控）或 Modbus 协议。 可用选择： Airbus485 和
Modbus Slave

80447204 Rev B ZH-41

93014.15.07
ZH
MODBUS Address（MODBUS 地址）- 为控制器设置 Modbus 节点 ID，以便
与 Modbus 设备通信，此 ID 可以是 1 和 254 之间的任何值。
RS-485 Address（RS-485 地址）- 设置能让控制器通过 Integral Sequencing（
次序联控）或 X 系列系统控制器网络进行通信的 Airbus 地址。
页面 5 和 6 - 以太网设置（仅限 ECO 模块）
请注意，这些页面没有效果，除非已经购买 ECO 模块选项。
图 86 : 以太网设置（仅限 ECO 模块）
IP Address Setting（IP 地址设置）- 如果 DHCP 未启用，则此设定点会设置
控制器的 IP 地址。
IP Address Actual（实际 IP 地址）- 在未启用 DHCP 时，这将与 IP 地址设
置相匹配。 如果启用了 DHCP，则这将显示由 DHCP 服务器分配给控制
器的地址。
Default Gateway Setting（默认网关设置）- 默认网关的设定点。
Default Gateway Actual（实际默认网关）- 默认网关的当前读数/设置。
Subnet Mask Setting（子网掩码设置）- 子网掩码的设定点
Subnet Mask Actual（实际子网掩码）- 子网掩码的当前读数/设置。
MAC Address（MAC 地址）- 这是控制器唯一的硬件 MAC 地址。 这无法
更改。
Enable DHCP（启用 DHCP）- 使控制器可以自动接收来自局域网 (LAN) 的
IP 地址
Apply（应用）- 在编辑所需设定点后，导航到接受设置并按输入，以使设
置变量中的值得到控制器的确认。
Cancel（取消）- 丢弃对以太网设置所做的任何更改。
 次序联控文件夹
图 87 : 次序联控文件夹
ZH-42
机组次序联控功能最多能有4台空压机之间联控（定频或变频空压机），
主机监控系统压力并根据需要发出加载、卸载命令。机组次序联控功能不
需要增加其他附加的硬件，它仅需要双绞通讯线将各联控的控制器端口（
X04）相连接。
对次序联控的空压机，必须激活操作人员设定键中的控制设定点COM，且
空压机必须被本地启动。另外，推荐激活自动启动功能，因为联控系统不
会启动和停止机器，仅仅是加载和卸载机器。不用气时自动启动功能停止
空压机主电机。
请注意，需要在GENERAL 菜单中设置 RS-485的通讯地址，它也就是次序
联控空压机的地址。另外注意，压力信号来源于主空压机机组压力值，该
值确定何时加载或卸载其它空压机。最后请注意，常规设置选项的Active
Protocol（有效协议）必须设为AirBus485，以便联控能够正常运作。
特定功能可能会干扰压缩机载荷及卸荷：
• 验证“Remote Load Enable（远程载荷启用）”是否处于正确位置。 关
闭此选项会让远程载荷/卸荷开关定义载荷命令。
• 主控器必须启动柄按顺序运行。 否则，压缩机将恢复为本地设定点。
• 如果主控器正在指示从属控制器载荷并且从属控制器的本地压力高于
最大脱机设定点或其即时停止设定点，从属控制器将在本地卸荷并保
持卸荷状态直至压力下降至低于联机或目标设定点。
Integral Sequencing（次序联控）- “Enabling Integral Sequencing（启用次序
联控）”选择此压缩机成为定序主控器。 主控器的机组排放压力传感器
是用于系统的压力信号。 默认状态为禁用。 请确保所有压缩机在启用该
功能之前针对次序联控进行设置。 系统中只能有一台压缩机启用该设定
点，否则系统行为可能会受影响。 该设定点还应在压缩机停止时进行更
改。 请注意，次序联控主控器不必是分配给压缩机的 RS-485 地址 1。
Unload Pressure（卸荷压力）- 确定系统卸荷压缩机时的压力。 系统卸荷
压力应始终低于系统中压缩机的本地脱机设定点。 请注意，在处于系统
控制时，压缩机将忽略除保护功能之外的本地压力设定点。
Load Pressure（载荷压力）- 确定系统载荷压缩机时的压力。 . 系统卸荷
压力应始终低于系统中压缩机的本地脱机设定点。 系统卸荷压力应始终
低于系统中压缩机的本地脱机设定点。 请注意，在处于系统控制时，压
缩机将忽略除保护功能之外的本地压力设定点。
Start Delay Interval（启动延迟间隔）- 确定载荷压缩机之间的时间数量。
可以防止所有压缩机同时载荷。 该设定点应重置为系统中任意压缩机的
最长启动时间。 通常而言，这相当于恒速设备的 Star/Delta 过渡时间或者
VSD 设备的 ramp 时间。
Damping（缓冲）- 用来调节系统响应压力偏差速度的压力控
制“Damping（缓冲）”设置。 默认值为 10，一般不应进行更改。
Tolerance（容差）- 用来通知系统如何响应高于和低于载荷/卸荷压力的压
力更改的压力控制“Tolerance（容差）”设置。 默认值为 3.0 psi，一般
不应进行更改。
80447204 Rev B
93014.15.07

ZH

Number of Compressors（压缩机数量）- 定义系统中有多少台压缩机。 最 页面 2 - 压缩机数据

大数量为 4。
图 89 : Compressor data
Priority（优先）- 每台压缩机都可以分配一个优先级别。 为压缩机设置
优先级会影响旋转的方式。 优先级 1 的压缩机将始终处于超前位置，然
后是优先级 2 压缩机，以此类推。 压缩机只会和其他具有相同优先级别
的压缩机交换位置。
Sequence（序列）- 显示系统目前的载荷/卸荷顺序。 系统中的每台压缩机
都将分配到一个字母。 字母表示分配了 Airbus 地址的设备是否为超前设
备（首先载荷，最后卸荷）或者其中一台调节设备。 字母 A 分配给超前
设备，B 分配给下一台载荷的设备，C 分配给第三台载荷的设备，D 分配
给最后载荷的设备。 设备将以相反顺序卸荷，A 将是最后运行的设备。
第 3 页的“Integral Sequencing（次序联控）”选项卡上的 - - - - 顺序中
的第一个位置始终表示分配了 Airbus 地址 1 的压缩机。 第二个位置标 压缩机数据：
示 Airbus 地址 2，以此类推。 请注意，字母顺序可能由于旋转而发生变 • Power On Hours（开机时数）- 控制器开机的时数。
化。
• Running Hours（运行时数）- 压缩机电机已运行的时数。
请注意，顺序仅显示在主控器中。
• Loaded Hours（载荷时数）- 压缩机已生产空气的时数。
Rotate Now（立即旋转）- 选择此设定点将根据优先次序来确定转换次 • Real Time Clock（实时时钟）- 当前时间
序，无论旋转间隔设定点如何。
页面 3 和 4 - 数字输入
Rotation Interval（旋转间隔）- 确定自动次序旋转之间的时间间隔。
图 90 : 数字输入
Time Left（剩余时间）- 倒数时间，直到次序旋转发生为止。
System Pressure（系统压力）- 显示系统用于控制的当前压力读数。 这仅
显示在序列主控器上。

 状态文件夹

⌞ᝅ
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。

⌞ᝅ
当输入工厂设置密码时，可能只能看见某些值。

页面 1 - 模拟输入
图 88 : 模拟输入

数字输入：
每个数字输入都会指明该输入处于“开启”或“关闭”状态。 这是输入
的物理状态，未必同逻辑条件相匹配。 正常状态显示在下表。
• Emergency Stop（紧急停止）- 正常关闭
• Main/Fan Motor Overload（主/风扇电机过载）- 正常关闭
• Remote Load Enable（远程载荷启用）- 正常开启
• Remote Load/Unload（远程载荷/卸荷）- 正常开启
模拟输入：
• Remote Start（远程启动）- 正常开启
以下模拟输入将显示在该部分中。
• Remote Stop（远程停止）- 正常关闭
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）- 压缩机提供给工厂的压力
• Dryer Temperature Fault（干燥器温度故障）- 正常开启
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）- 油槽中压缩机的内部压力。
• Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）- 正常关闭
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）- 压缩模块排放处空
气/机油混合物的温度。
• Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（后冷却器排放温度）- 空气通过后冷
却器后的温度。 请注意，此内容仅在购买和安装“Low Ambient（低
环境温度）”选项时显示。
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限集成干燥器
装置）- 压缩机在干燥器前传递的压力

80447204 Rev B ZH-43

93014.15.07

ZH

页面 5 和 6 - 数字输出 • CT1
图 91 : 数字输出 • CT2
• CT3

 出厂设置文件夹
此文件夹供 IR 工厂与维修人员使用。 必须在第一页输入密码以便调整
此文件夹中的值。 此文件夹用于设置特定于该压缩机的参数及显示控制
器的软件信息。
页面 1 - 密码
图 84 : 密码

数字输出：
密码：
每个数字输出都会指明该输出处于“开启”或“关闭”状态。 这是输入
的物理状态，未必同逻辑条件相匹配。 正常状态显示在下表。 提供访问权，以输入有效密码，从而获取对受密码保护参数的访问。 可
• Starter Contact KM1, KM2（启动器触点 KM1、KM2）- 正常开启 通过向下滚动至密码值并按回车键来输入密码。

• Starter Contact KM3（启动器触点 KM3）- 正常开启 Password entered（已输入密码）：

• Starter Contact KM4（启动器触点 KM4）- 正常开启 此复选框表示有效密码已输入。 如果此复选框为空，则可能尚未输入有

效密码或密码已超时。 这为只读。
• Load Solenoid 1SV（载荷电磁阀 1SV）- 正常开启
Password timeout enable（密码超时启用）：
• Modulation Solenoid 3SV（调制电磁阀 3SV）- 正常开启
• Dryer Run / Fan Run（干燥器运行/风扇运行）- 正常开启 勾选此复选框将启用密码时间功能。

• PORO Horn（PORO 喇叭）- 正常开启 Password timeout（密码超时）：

• Trip Indication（故障停机指示）- 正常开启 此超时可与密码超时启用一起让用户设置重新输入有效密码所需的可调整

时间段。 达到此超时后，需要重新输入有效密码。 按下任意按钮可重置
页面 7 - 模拟输出 超时计数器。
图 92 : 模拟输出 页面 2 至 6 - 出厂设置

图 95 : 出厂设置

模拟输出：
模拟输出的值将以 mA 为单位。
• VSD Blower Output（VSD 风扇输出）- VSD 风扇的当前速度（若安装
的话）

页面 8 - CT 输入

图 93 : CT 输入

CT 输入
显示安装于电机输入电源每一支上的变流器的 mA 值

ZH-44 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

Enable Low Ambient（启用低环境温度）（开/关）- 启用此设定点可激活

低环境温度控制。 低环境温度控制使用温度读数来确定风扇的速度，从
而让压缩机达到最佳工作温度。 当启用低环境温度时，压缩机将始终启
动，但是只会卸荷运行，直到空气端排放温度达到低环境温度设定点为
止。
Running Hours（运行时数）（可调整）- 用来在压缩机上调整运行时数计
数器
Loaded Hours（载荷时数）（可调整）- 用来在压缩机上调整载荷时数。
Power On Hours（开机时数）（只读）
页面 7 和 8 - 出厂设置

图 96 : 出厂设置

这些页面用于设置特定于压缩机的参数。 下面列出了可调整的所有出厂
设置。 这些页面中的所有设置均受密码保护。
Rated Pressure（额定压力） (psi - 100, 115, 135, 190) - 这是压缩机可以提
供的公称压力。 这些页面用于显示控制器的软件信息。 所有项目均为只读。

Starter Type（启动器类型）（Star-delta、远程启动器、软启动器）- 选择  变速压缩机

安装在压缩机中的启动器类型。 如果未正确设置，压缩机将不会启动。
Service Level（维修级别）（0、1 或 2）- 设置压缩机的维修级别提醒。  主文件夹
• Service Level 0（维修级别 0）- 禁用所有维修提醒
页面 1 - 系统概览
• Service Level 1（维修级别 1）- 当维修时间过期时，将发出一个维修
警告。 此警告可由任何用户重置。 图 97 : 系统概览
• Service Level 2（维修级别 2）- 将在维修时间过期前 100 个小时发出
警告。 此 100 小时警告可由任何用户重置。 维修时间间隔过期日，
此维修警告将再次出现。 此警告可由任何用户重置，但是每 24 小时
重新出现一次，直到设置完维修完成工厂设定点（需要密码）为止。

Motor Protection（电机保护）- 用于启用基于变流器的过载和锁闭转子保

护。 这必须设置为“开启”，除非热过载安装在压缩机启动器面板。
Nominal Current（标称电流）- 用于设置电机过载保护。 该数值为出厂设
置，不得更改。
Main Motor CT Range（主电机 CT 范围）- 必须匹配已安装变流器的范围。
所有变流器必须具备同一范围。 这是系统通电后的出厂默认显示。
CT Windings（CT 绕组）- 必须匹配已安装变流器的绕组数量。 所有变流 “Target Pressure Setpoint（目标压力设定点）”以黑色框表示，始终在测
器必须具备相同绕组数量。 量计中心。 这是压缩机尝试通过调整电机速度来保持的压力。
Enable Modulation（启用调制）（开/关）- 该选项可启用控制器中的调制选 “Automatic Stop Setpoint（自动停止设定点）” 以黑色框表示，始终在测
项，允许操作人员从操作人员设置选择操作的调制或 Mod/ACS 模式。 调 量计中心点右侧。 如果压缩机达到该设定点，一旦电机达到最低速度并
制选项必须安装在压缩机以便该功能正常工作。
且压缩机电机已运行至少 2 分钟，压缩机将卸荷并停止。
Enable PAC（启用 PAC）（开/关）- Enables Progressive Adaptive Control（
“Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）”以测量计中心下的大数字
启用渐进式自适应控制）- 这会在出现“Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤
器）”警告或“High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）”警告时降低工作压 并以红色箭头表示。 这是压缩机的输出压力。
力，以便保护压缩机。 “Pressure Unit of Measure（压力计量单位）”在机组排放压力下指示。 可
Enable Dryer（启用干燥器）（开/关）- 启用控制器的干燥器控制功能。 从“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹选择。
干燥器选项必须安装在压缩机以便该功能正常工作。 “Percent Capacity（容量百分比）”在屏幕左下部以数字和条形图形式显
Constant Run Dryer（恒定运行干燥器）（开/关）- 启用该功能会导致干燥 示。 这是压缩机产生的空气量（其最大容量的百分比）。
器在压缩机处于运行状态的任意时间运行，包括自动重启。 禁用该功能
会让干燥器在满足特定条件时停止，比如满足最低运行时间。 无论该设 “Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）”由显示屏右下部的数字
定点是什么，特定干燥器警告都会停止干燥器。 如果干燥器因任何原因 表示。 这是压缩模块排放处空气/机油混合物的温度。
停止，不会在 90 秒内重新启动。 如果压缩机由外源控制，恒定运行干 “Temperature Unit of Measure（温度计量单位）”在空气端排放温度右侧
燥器将被启用，而无论该设定点状态为何。 指示。 可从“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件夹选择。
Enable VSD Blower（启用 VSD 风扇）（开/关）- 如果 VSD 风扇选项安装
“Run Hours（运行时间）”指示压缩机已运行的小时数。
于压缩机，将会启用该功能。
Limit Blower VSD（限制风扇 VSD）（开/关）- 启用该设定点会将风扇最 ⌞ᝅ
大速度限制在 39 Hz。
Blower Override（风扇重载）- 在配备 VSD 风扇的装置上设置风扇，使之 可在此页面中选择和修改目标压力与自动停止设定点。 此页面上的所
以设定的全速百分比运行。 将之设为 101% 会启用自动控制 。 有其他信息均为只读。

80447204 Rev B ZH-45

93014.15.07

ZH

页面 2 - 计数器

图 98 : 计数器  操作人员设置文件夹
页面 1 和 2 操作人员设置
图 100 : 操作人员设置

“Hour Meters（小时表）”指示： 控制器已通电且压缩机已运行的小时

数。
“Starts（启动数）”指示压缩机上尝试启动的次数。 Target Pressure（目标压力）- 压缩机会改变速度，以便使机组排放压力尽
Date & Time（日期和时间）在“GENERAL SETTINGS（常规设置）”文件 可能接近该数值。
夹中可调整且可配置。 范围（单位为 PSI）： 65 - 145（非 TAS 压缩机）
: 65 - 138（配备 TAS 的压缩机）
⌞ᝅ
Automatic Stop Pressure（自动停机压力）- 如果机组排放压力达到该值并
此页面上的所有信息均为只读。 且压缩机以最低速度运行，压缩机将停止。
范围（单位为 PSI）： 目标 +1 至目标 +10
页面 3 和 4 - 模拟输入和压缩机信息
Immediate Stop Pressure（立即停机压力）- 无论速度如何，如果机组排放
图 99 : 模拟输入和压缩机信息 压力达到该值，压缩机将停止。
范围（单位为 PSI）： 自动停机压力至自动停机压力 +10
页面 2 至 4 操作人员选项
图 101 : 操作人员选项

任何未安装或正在报告故障的传感器将显示一个[ - - ] 符号。

⌞ᝅ
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。

以下模拟输入将显示在该部分中。
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）- 压缩机提供给工厂的压力
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）- 油槽中压缩机的内部压力。
• Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）- 压缩模块排放处空
气/机油混合物的温度。
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限集成干燥器
装置）- 压缩机在干燥器上游传递的压力
选项设定点类似于操作人员设定点，除了这些设定点无法在装置运行时更
• Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降）- 通过分离器元件的压降 改这一点不同。
• Dryer Run Status（干燥器运行状态）（仅限集成干燥器装置）- 表示干 COM Control（COM 控制）- 启用此设定点允许压缩机由串行或以太网设备
燥器目前正在运行（勾选）还是未运行（空白）的复选框 （例如 X8I）来控制。 这相当于旧 Intellisys 控制器上的“Sequencer（定
序器）”选项。
此外，以下压缩机状态读数将包括在此部分中：
• Motor Speed（电机速度）- 电机当前速度 (rpm) Remote Start/Stop（远程启动/停止）- 启用此设定点允许在控制器上输入数
字来启动和停止压缩机。
• Package kW（机组功耗）- 机组当前功耗，包括电源和风扇 VSD

ZH-46 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

Enable PORO（启用 PORO）- 启用此设定点将允许压缩机在停电恢复之后

自动重启，如果停电时压缩机正在载荷运行的话。 PORO 是一种选项，  “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
必须购买并安装此选项才能打开此功能。
页面 1 达到最大值 50
PORO Time（PORO 时间）- 控制器电源恢复并且控制器完成启动，压缩机
将执行一次 PORO 启动之前所需的时间。 在此期间 图 103 : “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
Scheduled Start Day（计划的启动日期）- 一周中将执行计划的启动的某一
天或某几天。 当板载时钟运行到计划的启动设定点日期、小时和分钟
时，压缩机将启动。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此
选项才能打开此功能。
Scheduled Start Hour（计划的启动小时）- 一天中将执行计划的启动的某个
小时。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打开
此功能。
Scheduled Start Minute（计划的启动分钟）- 一小时中将执行计划的启动的
某分钟。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打
开此功能。 事件文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经历的最后 200 个事件，以及每个事
Scheduled Stop Day（计划的停止日期）- 一周中将执行计划的停止的某一 件的时间和日期。 这些事件按顺序记录，编号 1 为最新，编号 200 为最
天或某几天。 当板载时钟运行到计划的停止设定点日期、小时和分钟 老。 新事件发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他事件的编号均加 1。
时，压缩机将停止运行。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安 标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。 第一页显示事
装此选项才能打开此功能。 件一至五，第二页显示事件六至十，依此类推。
Scheduled Stop Hour（计划的停止小时）- 一天中将执行计划的停止的某个 可以通过导航至事件并按压右箭头导航键来查看事件的时间和日期。 然
小时。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打开 后按压“ENTER（确认）”键退出时间和日期窗口。
此功能。
Scheduled Stop Minute（计划的停止分钟）- 一小时中将执行计划的停止的 图 104 : “EVENTS（事件）”文件夹
分钟。 计划的启动/停止是一种可选项，必须购买并安装此选项才能打开
此功能。
请注意，为了禁用计划的启动/停止，计划的启动和停止日期、小时和分
钟必须完全匹配。
页面 5 校准传感器
图 102 : 校准传感器

以下项目将生成事件。
• 开机
• 关机
• 按下“Start（启动）”键
• 按下“Stop（停止）”键
• 按下“Load（载荷）”键
传感器校准只能在设备停止运行并且传感器上没有压力的情况下才能进
• 按下“Unload（卸荷）”键
行。 校准仅需要在更换传感器和控制器、升级控制器软件后或操作人员
怀疑传感器读数有错误时进行。 通过选择传感器名称旁边的复选框可对 • 远程启动压缩机
其进行校准。 请注意，复选框可能显示太快而无法看到。 可通过验证
• 远程停止压缩机
传感器数值目前是否为零来确认校准。
• 远程载荷压缩机
以下列出的每个传感器均可以进行校准。
• 远程卸荷压缩机
• Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）(4APT)
• 警告
• Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）(3APT) - 仅限于“Enable 3APT（启用
3APT）”设定点开启的装置。 R4 - 11 台装置通常不安装 3APT • 故障停机
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）(7APT) - 仅在具有 • 启动禁止
集成干燥器的装置上 (TAS)
活动警告将显示闪烁的警示图标 ，而确认警告则显示实心图标。
请注意，如果传感器当前读取的值与零相差其范围的 +/- 10%，则传感器
将无法进行校准，并且会在事件日志中记录一个警告。 请确保传感器在
尝试校准之前暴露于空气中。 活动故障停机将显示闪烁的故障停机图标 ，而确认的故障停机则显
示实心图标。
活动的启动禁止将列在事件日志中，但不高亮显示。 如果启动禁止处于
活动状态，则显示屏将指示压缩机未准备好启动。

80447204 Rev B ZH-47

93014.15.07

ZH

警告事件列表 Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）

Change Separator Element（更换分离器元件） Xe-70M 屏显文本： Dryer High Pres（干燥器高压）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Chg Sep Elem（更换分离器元件） 在带集成干燥器的装置上，这将在干燥器高压开关打开而干燥器正在运行
时出现。 这是干燥器故障。 如果出现这种情况，压缩机将继续运行，
如果装置已运行至少 15 秒、机组排放压力至少为 65 psi 以及分离器压
但干燥器将停止。 触点必须至少打开 3 秒，然后才会出现警告信息。
降至少为 12 psi，将会出现此消息。 如果目标压力小于 90 psi，则目标
如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，干燥器可以重启。 然而，此
压力每降低 5 psi 警告值将增加 1 psi。 例如，如果目标压力介于 89 与
开关是锁定式开关。 干燥器高压开关必须在此警告可以重置之前进行重
85 psi 之间，则警告值将为 13 psi。 这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发布
置（触点闭合）。 如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，干燥器可
警告。
以重启。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点
High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
High Airend Disch Temp（高主机排气温度）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Sump Pres（高分离筒压力）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High A/E Disch T（高主机排气温度）
如果压缩机正在运行、机组排放压力至少为 65 psi、分离筒压力比目标压
如果装置正在运行、2ATT 大于 221 degF（228 的 97%）或装置处于闲置 力大 15 psi 时，将会出现此信息。 出现该警告将使控制器判断是否需要
模式 (3.3.7.1)、2ATT 大于 184 degF，将会出现此信息。 该警告存在 90 降低最大速度。 这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。
秒的延迟。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点
High Discharge Press（高排放压力）
Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤器）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Disch Press（高排放压力）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Change HE Filt（更换 HE 过滤器）
当设备由 X 系列系统控制器等外部装置控制且排放压力大于立即停机压
HE 过滤器位于后冷却器排放管与干燥器进口之间并且仅存在于带集成干
力达到 3 秒时，将会出现该警告信息。 控制器将在此时卸荷压缩机，直
燥器的装置上。 HE 过滤器上的压差通过从后冷却器排放压力中减去机
至机组排放压力回落至目标压力设定点以下。
组排放压力来进行计量。 如果压缩机正在以 75% 的容量运行、HE 过
维修 滤器上测量的压差大于或等于 14 psi (1.0 bar)、机组排放压力 (4APT) 高
于 90 psi，将会出现此警告。 条件必须至少存在 3 秒，然后才会出现警
依据总运行时间，当设备运行了一定时间后，将会出现维修警告。 维修 告。 这不是干燥器故障。 如果出现这种情况，将显示警告，但干燥器
警告可有多个级别，具体取决于维修级别的选择。 选择维修级别 0 将禁 将继续运行。
用维修警告。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 7APT（启用 7APT）”设定点
Service Level 1（维修级别 1）
Replace Coolant Filter（更换冷却剂过滤器）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Svc Required（需要维修）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Rplc Cool Filt（更换冷却剂过滤器）
如果为装置选择了维修级别 1，“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告
将以维修时段设定点中的操作时间为间隔进行发布。 与任何其他警告一 如果闲置模式设置为开，将会出现此信息。 如果已安装新的冷却剂过滤
样，此警告可以重置。 器，此故障停机警报用于提醒 IR 服务只使用闲置模式。

Service Level 2（维修级别 2） Invalid Calibration（校准无效）

Xe-70M 屏显文本： 100 Hrs to Svc, Svc Required, Service Alarm（100 小时 Xe-70M 屏显文本： Invalid Cal（校准无效）
后需要维修，需要维修，维修警报）
如果传感器零值是其刻度范围的 +/- 10%，将会出现此消息。
如果为装置选择了维修级别 2，则维修完成出厂设定点将用于清除级别 2
故障停机事件列表
维修警告及重置维修时间或日期。 在维修警告出现之前，可以先重置维
修完成。 High Airend Disch Temp（高主机排气温度）
首次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告将在总小时数值为维修时 Xe-70M 屏显文本： High A/E Disch T（高主机排气温度）
段设定点时出现。 然而，在此之前的 100 个小时，将出现“100 HOURS
TO SERVICE（100 小时后需要维修）”警告。 与任何其他警告一样，此 如果在正常运行期间 2ATT 大于 228 degF，将会出现此信息。 如果装置
警告可以重置。 一百小时之后，在总小时数值为维修时段时，“SERVICE 处于闲置模式，此故障停机警报将在 200 degF 时出现。
REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告将出现。 此警告可以像任何其他警告一样 Overload（过载）
重置，然而，如果未设置维修完成出厂设定点，此警告将在 24 小时后
返回。 如果未设置维修完成，100 小时后（维修时间段 + 100），将发 Xe-70M 屏显文本： Overload（过载）
布“ALARM - SERVICE REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警告。 此警告只 如果风扇过载继电器打开，将会出现此消息。 触点必须至少打开 3 秒，
能由维修完成出厂设定点清除。 设置维修完成出厂设定点即表明维修已 然后才会出现故障停机警报。
完成之后，下次“SERVICE REQUIRED（需要维修）”警告的时间将通过将
维修时间段添加到总小时数值来计算，并且“100 HOURS TO SERVICE（ Remote Stop Failure（远程停止失败）
100 小时后需要维修）”警告在 100 个小时前出现且“ALARM - SERVICE
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Rem Stop Fail（远程停止失败）
REQUIRED（警报 - 需要维修）”警告在此之后 100 个小时出现。
如果远程启动/停止选项启用、远程停止按钮保持打开状态、任一启动按
High VSD Ambient Temperature（高 VSD 环境温度）
钮按下，将会出现此消息。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： High VSD Amb T（高 VSD 环境温度）
Remote Start Failure（远程启动失败）
当 VSD 环境温度在停机值 (133 degF) 的 5% 以内时，将会出现该警告。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Rem Start Fail（远程启动失败）
这一状况必须持续 3 秒，才会发布警告。
如果装置由远程启动按钮启动、装置启动后按钮保持闭合 7 秒，将会出
Dryer Temp Warning（干燥器温度警告）
现此信息。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Dryer Temp（干燥器温度）
对于 R-30 - 37 kW 压缩机而言，如果干燥器冷凝器或蒸发器温度开关关
闭，将会出现此消息。 冷凝器开关正在锁定，并且必须在通过控制器进
行重置之前手动重置。 蒸发器开关无法锁闭，只要信号一开启就会重
置。 如果运行干燥器的条件存在时重置此警告，干燥器可以重启。
请注意，对于配备 TAS 的 R4 - 11 kW 压缩机而言，干燥器温度警告会在
设定点温度超过 14.5 degC 达 6 分钟或更长时间时触发。 该警告也会在
干燥器中的温度探针发生故障时触发。

ZH-48 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

Sensor Failure（传感器故障） High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）

Xe-70M 屏显文本： 3APT Failure, 4APT Failure, 7APT Failure, 2ATT Failure, Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Sump Pres（高分离筒压力）
Main Motor CT Fail（3APT 故障、4APT 故障、7APT 故障、2ATT 故障、主
电机 CT 故障） 如果压缩机正在运行、存在以下 3 个条件中的任何一个，将会出现此信
息： (1) 分离筒压力比目标压力高 25 psi（如果干燥器启用，则为 32
当传感器被认为缺少或损坏时，将会显示此消息。 受此故障停机影响的 PSI）。 (2) 测量的分离器压降大于 25 psi 且机组排放压力至少为 65
传感器有 CT1、CT2、CT3、3APT、4APT、7APT 和 2ATT。 显示的传感 psi。 (3) 对于额定压力达到 145 psi 的设备而言，分离筒压力高于 168
器应带有传感器故障消息。 传感器故障消息应遵循以下格式： 3APT 故 psi。
障。
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点
Emergency Stop（紧急停止）
VSD Initialization Fault（VSD 初始化故障）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Emergency Stop（紧急停止）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Drive Init Error（驱动器初始化错误）
当按下紧急停止按钮时，将会出现此消息。
如果控制器无法在启动后或重置后正确设置，将出现该错误。 控制器将
VSD 故障 X 尝试向驱动器写入 10 次参数，10 次尝试失败后，故障停机将被注册。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Xe-70M 屏显文本： VSD Comm Except（VSD 通讯除外）
压缩机变速驱动器正在报告故障。 请参阅故障排除指南，了解详细信 如果控制器从 VSD 收到无效通信，将出现该内容。 请参阅故障排除指
息。 南，了解详细信息。
Low Sump Pressure（低分离筒压力） 启动禁止列表
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Low Sump Press（低分离筒压力） High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
如果压缩机正在运行、油槽压降低于 13 psi 15 秒，将会出现此信息。 Xe-70M 屏显文本： High A/E Disch T（高主机排气温度）
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点 如果 2ATT 高于 228 °F 的 95%，将会出现此消息。
Check Motor Rotation（检查电机旋转） High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Ck Motor Rot（检查电机旋转） Xe-70M 屏显文本： High Sump Pres（高分离筒压力）
如果控制器在 VSD 启动后读出负速度，将会出现此消息。 如果分离筒压力 (3APT) 为 25 psi 或高于压缩机额定压力，将会出现此信
息。
VSD Communication Failure（VSD 通讯故障）
请注意，必须针对该警告启用“Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）”设定点
Xe-70M 屏显文本： VSD Comm Fail（VSD 通讯故障）
VSD Intialization（VSD 初始化）
如果控制器在请求信息时未从 VSD 收到响应，将会出现此消息。 故障停
机警报需要 8 秒才会出现。 Xe-70M 屏显文本： VSD Initializing（VSD 初始化）
Incorrect VSD Type（不正确的 VSD 类型） 如果压缩机 VSD 未响应控制器的初始通讯，将会出现此信息。
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Wrong VSD Type（不正确的 VSD 类型）
如果 VSD 类型与压缩机型号不匹配，通电后将会出现此消息。 控制器将
通过比较压缩机类型与驱动器 ID 来确定这一点。
Stop Failure（停机故障）
Xe-70M 屏显文本： Stop Failure（停机故障）
如果压缩应停机但电机速度未降至最低电机速度设定点以下，将会出现
此消息。 控制器将在发布故障停机警报之前等待 4 秒以使压缩机停机。
这通常表示运行继电器 (K1) 在断电时未开启。 由于此原因，应在出现
该故障时开启隔离触点。 如果装置并未水冷，隔离触点会在此故障被清
除后关闭。

80447204 Rev B ZH-49

93014.15.07

ZH

将显示以下过滤器：
 TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录） • 分离器芯
页面 1 达到最大值 3 页面 2 维护配置
图 105 : TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录） 图 108 : 维护配置

“Trip History（故障停机历史记录）”文件夹中的页面最多记录控制器经 通过此页面，用户可以设置维修间隔及在执行维修之后重置计数器。 维

历的最后 15 个故障停机警报，以及每个故障停机警报的时间戳记。 这
些故障停机警报按顺序记录，编号 1 为最新，编号 15 为最老。 新故障停
机发生时，则会成为编号 1，所有其他故障停机的编号均加 1。
标题栏中的页码用于翻阅事件，每页最多显示 7 个事件。 第一页显示事
件一至五，第二页显示事件六至十，依此类推。
以下项目将在故障停机历史记录中生成条目。
• 故障停机
修间隔可以设置成 1000 和 8000 小时之间的任何值，但是必须根据工厂
保养计划进行设置。 执行保养之后，用户可以通过导航到“Reset（重
置）”按钮并按下确认键重置计数器。 请注意，更改维修间隔后，必须
进行重置以便将“Hours Until Service（维修前时间）”设置为正确值。
 常规设置文件夹
常规设置文件夹中的所有参数均可以调整。

活动故障停机将显示闪烁的故障停机图标 ，而确认的故障停机则显 页面 1 - 语言和单位选择

示实心图标。 图 109 : 语言和单位选择
故障停机历史记录还记录故障停机发生时的压缩机数据以协助诊断与故
障排除。 导航到故障停机条目并点击输入按钮将弹出故障停机历史记录
对话框。
图 106 : TRIP HISTORY（故障停机历史记录）

语言可以从以下 30 个选项中进行选择：

• 英语（默认） • 韩语
• 保加利亚语 • 拉脱维亚语
对话框处于活动状态时，请按左右键以滚动查看显示的数据。 故障停机 • 简体中文 • 立陶宛语
警报的名称将始终显示在对话框的标题栏中。 数据查看完毕时按输入可 • 克罗地亚语 • 马耳他语
返回故障停机历史记录屏幕。 • 捷克语 • 挪威语
• 丹麦语 • 波兰语
 维护文件夹
• 荷兰语 • 葡萄牙语
页面 1 - 过滤器状态 • 爱沙尼亚语 • 罗马尼亚语
图 107 : 过滤器状态 • 芬兰语 • 俄语
• 法语 • 斯洛伐克语
• 德语 • 斯洛文尼亚语
• 希腊语 • 西班牙语
• 匈牙利语 • 瑞典语
• 意大利语 • 泰国语
• 印度尼西亚语 • 土耳其语

控制器将以选择的语言显示所有屏幕，并且一次只能选择一个语言。

此页显示过滤器的状态。 过滤器的状态可以是“OK（正 每个语言均以本地翻译显示。

常）”或“Change（更换）”，这取决于压缩机的诊断读数。 如果过滤 温度可在 oF 和 oC 之间选择。
器达到“更换”状态，将发出一条警告，维修指示灯将亮起，以通知用
户。 请注意，若要检查这些保养项目，压缩机必须处于“载荷运行”状 压力可在 psi、kpa、bar、kg/cm2 之间选择。
态。 如果压缩机未处于运行状态 - 此状态将显示“Load（载荷）”，直
到设备正在运行并且尚未重置时发出保养指示为止。

ZH-50 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

页面 2 - 时间和日期设置 此页允许用户为控制器能够与之通信的 RS-485 网络设置网络地址。

图 110 : 时间和日期设置 Active Protocol（有效协议）- 允许串行端口配置为 Airbus（用于 X 系

列系统控制器和次序联控）或 Modbus 协议。 可用选择： Airbus485 和
Modbus Slave
MODBUS Address（MODBUS 地址）- 为控制器设置 Modbus 节点 ID，以便
与 Modbus 设备通信，此 ID 可以是 1 和 254 之间的任何值。
RS-485 Address（RS-485 地址）- 设置能让控制器通过 Integral Sequencing（
次序联控）或 X 系列系统控制器网络进行通信的 Airbus 地址。
页面 5 和 6 - 以太网设置（仅限 ECO 模块）
请注意，这些页面没有效果，除非已经购买 ECO 模块选项。
所有项目均可调整。 图 113 : 以太网设置（仅限 ECO 模块）
时间允许将当前时间设置为 24 小时格式
日期支持设置当前月、日、年
日期格式可在 dd/mm/yyyy（默认）、mm/dd/yyyy 和 YYYY/MM/DD 之间选择
确认新时间和日期用于确认需要对选项进行的更改。 复选框中必须显
示“x”，然后更改才会生效。
控制器将继续显示所有更改，即使尚未确认选择，而且用户退出页面，然
后返回也是如此。 电源循环会将所有选项返回至其当前设置。

⌞ᝅ IP Address Setting（IP 地址设置）- 如果 DHCP 未启用，则此设定点会设置

控制器的 IP 地址。
控制器不支持夏令时。
IP Address Actual（实际 IP 地址）- 在未启用 DHCP 时，这将与 IP 地址设
置相匹配。 如果启用了 DHCP，则这将显示由 DHCP 服务器分配给控制
页面 3 - 背景灯设置 器的地址。

图 111 : 背景灯设置 Default Gateway Setting（默认网关设置）- 默认网关的设定点。

Default Gateway Actual（实际默认网关）- 默认网关的当前读数/设置。
Subnet Mask Setting（子网掩码设置）- 子网掩码的设定点
Subnet Mask Actual（实际子网掩码）- 子网掩码的当前读数/设置。
MAC Address（MAC 地址）- 这是控制器唯一的硬件 MAC 地址。 这无法
更改。
Enable DHCP（启用 DHCP）- 使控制器可以自动接收来自局域网 (LAN) 的
IP 地址
Apply（应用）- 在编辑所需设定点后，导航到接受设置并按输入，以使设
背景灯亮度可调整显示屏的亮度。 置变量中的值得到控制器的确认。
Cancel（取消）- 丢弃对以太网设置所做的任何更改。
⌞ᝅ
按下控制器的任何键都会打开背景灯。
 次序联控文件夹
䆜઀ 图 114 : 次序联控文件夹
背景灯关闭后，控制器上的“START（启动）”、“STOP（停
止）”、“LOAD（载荷）”、“UNLOAD（卸荷）”、“RESET（重
置）”和“ACKNOWLEDGE（确认）”键仍有效。 建议按回车键或任一
导航键来打开背景灯。

页面 4 - 串行端口地址设置

图 112 : 串行端口地址设置

80447204 Rev B ZH-51

93014.15.07

ZH

机组次序联控功能最多能有4台空压机之间联控（定频或变频空压机），
主机监控系统压力并根据需要发出加载、卸载命令。机组次序联控功能不
需要增加其他附加的硬件，它仅需要双绞通讯线将各联控的控制器端口（
X04）相连接。
对次序联控的空压机，必须激活操作人员设定键中的控制设定点COM，且
空压机必须被本地启动。另外，推荐激活自动启动功能，因为联控系统不
会启动和停止机器，仅仅是加载和卸载机器。不用气时自动启动功能停止
空压机主电机。
请注意，需要在GENERAL 菜单中设置 RS-485的通讯地址，它也就是次序
联控空压机的地址。另外注意，压力信号来源于主空压机机组压力值，该
值确定何时加载或卸载其它空压机。最后请注意，常规设置选项的Active
Protocol（有效协议）必须设为AirBus485，以便联控能够正常运作。
特定功能可能会干扰压缩机载荷及卸荷：
• 验证“Remote Load Enable（远程载荷启用）”是否处于正确位置。 关
闭此选项会让远程载荷/卸荷开关定义载荷命令。
• 主控器必须启动柄按顺序运行。 否则，压缩机将恢复为本地设定点。
• 如果主控器正在指示从属控制器载荷并且从属控制器的本地压力高于
最大脱机设定点或其即时停止设定点，从属控制器将在本地卸荷并保
持卸荷状态直至压力下降至低于联机或目标设定点。
Priority（优先）- 每台压缩机都可以分配一个优先级别。为压缩机设置优
先级会影响旋转的方式。优先级 1 的压缩机将始终处于超前位置，然后是
优先级 2 压缩机，以此类推。压缩机只会和其他具有相同优先级别的压缩
机交换位置。
Sequence（序列）- 显示系统目前的载荷/卸荷顺序。 系统中的每台压缩机
都将分配到一个字母。 字母表示分配了 Airbus 地址的设备是否为超前设
备（首先载荷，最后卸荷）或者其中一台调节设备。 字母 A 分配给超前
设备，B 分配给下一台载荷的设备，C 分配给第三台载荷的设备，D 分配
给最后载荷的设备。 设备将以相反顺序卸荷，A 将是最后运行的设备。
第 3 页的“Integral Sequencing（次序联控）”选项卡上的 - - - - 顺序中
的第一个位置始终表示分配了 Airbus 地址 1 的压缩机。 第二个位置标
示 Airbus 地址 2，以此类推。 请注意，字母顺序可能由于旋转而发生变
化。
请注意，顺序仅显示在主控器中。
Rotate Now（立即旋转）- 选择此设定点将根据优先次序来确定转换次
序，无论旋转间隔设定点如何。
Rotation Interval（旋转间隔）- 确定自动次序旋转之间的时间间隔。
Time Left（剩余时间）- 倒数时间，直到次序旋转发生为止。
System Pressure（系统压力）- 显示系统用于控制的当前压力读数。 这仅
显示在序列主控器上。
 状态文件夹
⌞ᝅ
这些页面上的所有信息均为只读。 输入密码时，页码有效。 未输入
密码时，页面安排可能有轻微不同。
页面 1 - 模拟输入
图 115 : 模拟输入

Integral Sequencing（次序联控）- “Enabling Integral Sequencing（启用次序

联控）”选择此压缩机成为定序主控器。主控器的机组排放压力传感器是
用于系统的压力信号。默认状态为禁用。请确保所有压缩机在启用该功能 模拟输入：
之前针对次序联控进行设置。系统中只能有一台压缩机启用该设定点，否
则系统行为可能会受影响。该设定点还应在压缩机停止时进行更改。请注 以下模拟输入将显示在该部分中。
意，次序联控主控器不必是分配给压缩机的 RS-485 地址 1。 • Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力）- 压缩机提供给工厂的压力
Unload Pressure（卸荷压力）- 确定系统卸荷压缩机时的压力。 系统卸荷 • Sump Pressure（分离筒压力）- 油槽中压缩机的内部压力。
压力应始终低于系统中压缩机的本地脱机设定点。 请注意，在处于系统
控制时，压缩机将忽略除保护功能之外的本地压力设定点。 • Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度）- 压缩模块排放处空
气/机油混合物的温度。
Load Pressure（载荷压力）- 确定系统载荷压缩机时的压力。 . 系统卸荷
• Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力）（仅限 TAS 装
压力应始终低于系统中压缩机的本地脱机设定点。 系统卸荷压力应始终
置）- 压缩机在干燥器前传递的压力
低于系统中压缩机的本地脱机设定点。 请注意，在处于系统控制时，压
缩机将忽略除保护功能之外的本地压力设定点。 页面 2 至 4 - 压缩机数据
Start Delay Interval（启动延迟间隔）- 确定载荷压缩机之间的时间数量。 图 116 : 压缩机数据
可以防止所有压缩机同时载荷。 该设定点应重置为系统中任意压缩机的
最长启动时间。 通常而言，这相当于恒速设备的 Star/Delta 过渡时间或者
VSD 设备的 ramp 时间。
Damping（缓冲）- 用来调节系统响应压力偏差速度的压力控
制“Damping（缓冲）”设置。 默认值为 10，一般不应进行更改。
Tolerance（容差）- 用来通知系统如何响应高于和低于载荷/卸荷压力的压
力更改的压力控制“Tolerance（容差）”设置。 默认值为 3.0 psi，一般
不应进行更改。
Number of Compressors（压缩机数量）- 定义系统中有多少台压缩机。 最
大数量为 4。

ZH-52 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

数字输入： （需要密码）
每个数字输入都会指明该输入处于“开启”或“关闭”状态。 这是输入
的物理状态，未必同逻辑条件相匹配。 正常状态显示在下表。
• Emergency Stop（紧急停止）- 正常关闭
• Main/Fan Motor Overload（主/风扇电机过载）- 正常关闭
• Remote Start（远程启动）- 正常开启
• Remote Stop（远程停止）- 正常关闭
• Dryer Temperature Fault（干燥器温度故障）- 正常开启
• Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）- 正常关闭

页面 7 和 8 - 数字输出

图 118 : 数字输出

压缩机数据：
• Power On Hours（开机时数）- 控制器开机的时数。
• Running Hours（运行时数）- 压缩机电机已运行的时数。
• Motor Speed（电机速度）- 电机当前速度 (RPM)
• Time（时间）- 当前时间。
• Motor Current（电机电流）- 目前流过电机的电流。
• Motor Voltage（电机电压）- 电机上的电压。
• DC Link Voltage（直流电压）- VSD 上的直流电压
• Package kW（机组功耗）- 压缩机的瞬时功耗
• Heatsink Temperature（散热器温度）- 散热器中 VSD 的温度
• Control Card Temperature（控制卡温度）- 控制卡中 VSD 的温度
数字输出（需要密码）：
页面 5 和 6 - 数字输入
每个数字输出都会指明该输出处于“开启”或“关闭”状态。 这是输入
图 117 : 数字输入 的物理状态，未必同逻辑条件相匹配。 正常状态显示在下表。
• VSD Run K1 Contact（VSD 运行 K1 触点）- 正常开启
• Starter Contact KM4（启动器触点 KM4）- 正常开启
• Blowdown Solenoid 1SV（放气电磁阀 1SV）- 正常开启
• Dryer Run / Fan Run（干燥器运行/风扇运行）- 正常开启
• PORO Horn（PORO 喇叭）- 正常开启
• Trip Indication（故障停机指示）- 正常开启

页面 9 - 模拟输出

图 119 : 模拟输出

模拟输出：
模拟输出的值将以 mA 为单位。
• VSD 输出

80447204 Rev B ZH-53

93014.15.07

ZH

Compressor Type（压缩机类型）- 压缩机类型将在此处选择。 选项列出

 出厂设置文件夹 如下。
• 5.5 kW
此文件夹供 IR 工厂与维修人员使用。 必须在第一页输入密码以便调整
此文件夹中的值。 此文件夹用于设置特定于该压缩机的参数及显示控制 • 7.5 kW
器的软件信息。
• 11 kW
页面 1 - 密码 • 30 kW
图 120 : 密码 • 37 kW
• 7.5 HP
• 10 HP
• 15 HP
• 40 HP
• 50 HP

Rated Pressure（额定压力）(psi - 145, 200) - 这是压缩机可以提供的最大

目标压力。

密码： Enable PAC（启用 PAC）（开/关）- Enables Progressive Adaptive Control（

提供访问权，以输入有效密码，从而获取对受密码保护参数的访问。 可
通过向下滚动至密码值并按回车键来输入密码。
Password entered（已输入密码）：
此复选框表示有效密码已输入。 如果此复选框为空，则可能尚未输入有
效密码或密码已超时。 这为只读。
Password timeout enable（密码超时启用）：
启用渐进式自适应控制）- 这会在出现“Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤
器）”警告或“High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）”警告时降低最大电
机速度，以便保护压缩机。
Enable 3APT（启用 3APT）（开/关）- 启用分离筒压力传感器。 该设置
为出厂设置，不得更改。
Enable 7APT（启用 7APT）（开/关）- 启用后冷却器排放压力传感器。
该设置为出厂设置，不得更改。

勾选此复选框将启用密码时间功能。 Service Level（维修级别）（0、1 或 2）- 设置压缩机的维修级别提醒。

• Service Level 0（维修级别 0）- 禁用所有维修提醒
Password timeout（密码超时）：
• Service Level 1（维修级别 1）- 当维修时间过期时，将发出一个维修
此超时可与密码超时启用一起让用户设置重新输入有效密码所需的可调整 警告。 此警告可由任何用户重置。
时间段。 达到此超时后，需要重新输入有效密码。 按下任意按钮可重置
超时计数器。 • Service Level 2（维修级别 2）- 将在维修时间过期前 100 个小时发出
警告。 此 100 小时警告可由任何用户重置。 维修时间间隔过期日，
页面 2 至 4 - 出厂设置 此维修警告将再次出现。 此警告可由任何用户重置，但是每 24 小时
重新出现一次，直到设置完维修完成工厂设定点（需要密码）为止。
图 121 : 出厂设置
Enable Dryer（启用干燥器）（开/关）- 启用控制器的干燥器控制功能。
干燥器选项必须安装在压缩机以便该功能正常工作。
Constant Run Dryer（恒定运行干燥器）（开/关）- 启用该功能会导致干燥
器在压缩机处于运行状态的任意时间运行，包括自动重启。 禁用该功能
会让干燥器在满足特定条件时停止，比如满足最低运行时间。 无论该设
定点是什么，特定干燥器警告都会停止干燥器。 如果干燥器因任何原因
停止，不会在 90 秒内重新启动。 如果压缩机由外源控制，恒定运行干
燥器将被启用，而无论该设定点状态为何。
Fan Minimum Run Time（风扇最短运行时间）- 设置风扇在压缩机停止时必
须在关闭前保持运行的时间数量。 请注意，这表示风扇会在压缩机主电
机停止后继续运行。
PORO Installed（安装 PORO）（开/关）- 允许开启 PORO 和“Scheduled
Start/Stop（计划启动/停机）”功能。 该功能只能在购买和安装 PORO 套
件时开启
Running Hours（运行时数）（可调整）- 用来在压缩机上调整运行时数计
数器
Power On Hours（开机时数）（只读）- 显示控制器通电的时间数量。
页面 5 至 8 - 最大值
图 122 : 最大值

这些页面用于设置特定于压缩机的参数。 下面列出了可调整的所有出厂
设置。 这些页面中的所有设置由密码保护，只能由经过授权的工厂技师
进行修改。

ZH-54 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

页面 11 至 14 - VSD 维修菜单

图 124 : VSD 维修菜单

VSD 维修菜单包含用于设置压缩机以获得最佳操作的参数。 默认选择经

过设置适用于大部分压缩机。 这些屏幕必须仅由授权的维修技师使用。
必须输入密码才能修改这些参数。
页面 13 和 14 - 软件信息
图 125 : 软件信息

最大值页面用于记录自上次最大值重置以来控制器看到的最高值。 每个
最大值条目显示所记录的最高值以及这些最大值出现时的时间与日期戳。
最终最大值页面在页面底部有重置设置，高亮显示此按钮并点击输入将使
控制器清除最大值的所有历史记录并开始再次进行记录。 必须输入密码
才能使用此重置功能。
页面 9 和 10 - VSD 诊断

图 123 : VSD 诊断
这些页面用于显示控制器的软件信息。所有项目均为只读。

VSD 诊断屏幕用于对任何驱动器问题进行故障排除。 这些屏幕必须仅由

授权的维修技师使用。 必须输入密码才能激活这些诊断测试。

80447204 Rev B ZH-55

93014.15.07

ZH

Modbus 连接和控制
 连接 MODBUS 网络  MODBUS 地址选择
Xe-70M 控制器通过 Belden 9841 或等效的 RS-485 电缆连接至 Modbus RTU 每台连接至 MODBUS 网络的压缩机均具备独一无二的分配地址，从压缩机
主设备。为了连接至网络，电缆必须连接至控制器上的端口 X04，如下 1 开始连续增加至连接 MODBUS 网络的最大压缩机数量。
图所示。
每台压缩机的 Modbus 地址在第 4 页的“General Settings（常规设置）”选
图 126 项卡进行设置。 控制器的默认 Modbus 地址设置是 1，
X e7 0M P h o e n ix 2 P in
此外，有效协议必须设置为 Modbus Slave。
C o n n e cto r
L2
2 图 128
1
L1

2 1
X 04

L2
L1  MODBUS MASTER 设置
为了与 Xe-M 控制器正确通信，Modbus Master 必须设置为能与以下配置
 RS-485 网络 通信：
波特率 - 9600
RS-485 数据通信和其他低压信号会受到电气干扰。 这种可能性会 数据位 - 8
导致间歇性故障或难以诊断的异常情况。 为了避免这一可能性的发生，
务必使用接地屏蔽电缆，一端牢固良好地接地。 此外，请在安装期间对 停止位 - 1
布线加以周详考虑。
奇偶性 - 无
1. 切勿在高压 3 相电源线旁边布设 RS-485 数据通信或低压信号线。
建议使用以下轮询参数以实现最佳系统运行：
如果必须与电源线交叉，务必以直角交叉。
报告率： 不少于 500 ms
2. 如果必须短距离沿着电源线的路线进行布设（例如： 沿悬挂式电缆
架从压缩机装置通向墙壁），请将 RS-485 或信号线绑缚在接地电缆 超时： 500 ms
架的外部，以便电缆架形成一种接地的电气干扰屏蔽。
重试： 2
3. 如有可能，请勿在设备附近布设 RS-485 或信号线，因为这可能形成
电气干扰源（例如： 3 相电源变压器、高压开关装置、变频驱动模
块、无线电通信天线）。

图 127

ZH-56 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

 R4 至 37 KW 恒速 MODBUS 表
表 32: R4 至 37 KW 恒速 MODBUS 表

寄存器 变量 读/写 (Read/ 范围 备注

(40XXX) Write)
001 状态/控制 R/W 参见图 1
003 Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力） R
004 Sump Pressure（分离筒压力） R
007 Airend Discharge Temperature（主机排气温度） R
008 Aftercooler Discharge Temperature（后冷却器排放温度） R 仅限低环境温度装置
010 Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降） R
016 Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力） R 仅限干燥器装置
065 运行时数 MSB R
066 运行时数 LSB R
067 载荷时数 MSB R
068 载荷时数 LSB R
098 额定压力 R
100 启动器类型 R 1-3 参见图 2
101 调制启用 R 0=禁用
102 服务级别 R 0-2 0=级别 0，1=级别 1，2=级别 2
103 维修时段 R 1000 - 8000 增量 1000
104 干燥器已安装 R 0=关
112 脱机压力 R/W 75 -（额定+10） 额定 = 额定压力
113 联机压力 R/W 65-（脱机-10） 脱机 = 脱机压力
114 操作模式 R/W 0-2 参见图 2
115 启动器时间（秒钟） R/W 5 - 30
116 （自动重启时间）（秒钟） R/W 120 - 3600
117 自动重启开/关 R 0=关
118 通信控制开/关 R 0=关
119 远程启动/停止启用 R 0=关
121 电源中断重启选项 (PORO) 启用 R 0=关
122 PORO 时间（秒钟） R/W 10 - 600
123 Auto Start/Stop Delay Time（自动启动/停机延迟时间）（秒） R/W 0 - 60
124 低环境温度 R/W 30 - 60 华氏度
125 卸荷停机时间 R/W 10 - 30
128 超前/滞后 R/W 0=滞后
129 滞后偏移 R/W 0 - 45 psi
131 Lead/Lag Cycle Length（超前/滞后循环时间）（小时） R/W 0 - 750
132 Scheduled Start（计划启动）（天） R/W 0-9 参见图 2
133 Scheduled Start（计划的启动）（小时） R/W 0 - 23
134 Scheduled Start（计划的启动）（分钟） R/W 0 - 59
135 Scheduled Stop（计划停机）（天） R/W 0-9 参见图 2
136 Scheduled Stop（计划的停止）（小时） R/W 0 - 23
137 Scheduled Stop（计划的停止分钟）（分钟） R/W 0 - 59
255 警告代码 R 参见图 4
256 故障停机代码 R 参见图 4
400 重置网络登录 R/W 0-1 写入 1 值会将网络登录重置为默认出厂
设置。 重置之后，该数值应设置回 0

80447204 Rev B ZH-57

93014.15.07

ZH

图 129 : MANHATTAN 恒速控制器寄存器 01-状态/控制

位　０：　主机／本机　（Ｒ／Ｗ） 　 　 　 位　６：　警报　（Ｒ）
　 　
０　＝ 　本　　机 　 　 　 ０　＝ 　无 警 　报
１　＝ 　主　　机 　 　 　 １　＝ 　警 报 　
位　１：　运行／停止　（Ｒ／Ｗ） 　 　 　 位　７：　警告　（Ｒ）
　 　
０　＝ 　停　　止 　 　 　 ０　＝ 　无 警 　告
１　＝ 　运　　行 　 　 　 １　＝
　 　警 告 　
位　２：　载荷／卸荷　（Ｒ／Ｗ） 　 　 　 位　８：　联机／脱机模式　（Ｒ） 　
０　＝ 　卸　　荷 　 　 　 ０　＝
　 　未 处 于 联 机 ／脱 机 模 式
１　＝ 　载　　荷 　 　 　 １　＝ 　联 机 ／脱 机 　 模 式
位　３：　调制　（Ｒ） 　 　 　 　 位　９：　仅限　Ｍｏｄ／ＡＣＳ　或　Ｍｏｄ　（Ｒ）　
０　＝ 　未 调　 制 　 　 　 ０　＝ 　未 处 于 　Ｍ ｏｄ／Ａ Ｓ Ｃ　　模 式
１　＝ 　调　　制 　 　 　 １　＝ 　Ｍ ｏｄ／Ａ Ｓ Ｃ　模 式　
位　４：　未使用 　 　 　 　 　
位　１０　－１２：　未使用 　
位　５：　自动重启中停止　（Ｒ） 　 　 位　１３　－１５：　装置类型　（Ｒ）：　未使用
　
０　＝ 　未 在 自 动 重 　 启　 中 停 　止 　
１　＝ 　自 动 重 停 启
　止 中

图 130 : MANHATTAN 恒速控制器寄存器代码

Register 100: Starter Type Register 114: Mode of Operation

1 = Star-Delta 0 = On/Off Line
2 = Remote Starter 1 = MOD/ACS
3 = Soft Starter 2 = Modulation Only

Registers 132, 135: Day

0 = Sunday 4 = Thursday 7 = Daily
1 = Monday 5 = Friday 8 = Weekdays
2 = Tuesday 6 = Saturday 9 = Weekends
3 = Wednesday

图 131 : MANHATTAN 恒速控制器故障停机警报和警告代码

代码 说明
02 Sensor Failure 3APT（传感器故障 3APT）
03 Sensor Failure 4APT（传感器故障 4APT）
08 Sensor Failure 7APT（传感器故障 7APT）
10 Sensor Failure 2ATT（传感器故障 2ATT）
11 Sensor Failure 4ATT（传感器故障 4ATT）
18 电机过载（主）- 由于 CT
19 过载 - 由于热过载
22 Check Motor Rotation（检查电机旋转）
25 Remote Stop Failure（远程停止失败）
26 Remote Start Failure（远程启动失败）
28 Low Sump Pressure（低分离筒压力）
29 High Air Pressure（高空气压力）
31 High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度）
32 Emergency Stop（紧急停止）
34 Change Separator Element（更换分离器元件）
36 传感器错误（校准）
38 100 Hours To Service（100 小时后需要维修）
39 Service Required（需要维修）
40 Alarm - Service Required（警报 - 需要维修）
48 Unit Too Cold To Start（装置太冷无法启动）
49 High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力）
51 Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压）
52 Dryer Temperature Warning（干燥器温度警告）
55 Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤器）（干燥器）
56 传感器故障 - 主电机 CT 输入

ZH-58 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

 R5.5 至 37 KW 变速 MODBUS 表
表 33 : R5.5 至 37 KW 变速 MODBUS 表

寄存器 变量 读/写 范围 备注
(40XXX)
001 状态/控制 R/W 参见图 1
003 Package Discharge Pressure（机组排气压力） R
004 Sump Pressure（分离筒压力） R
010 Aftercooler Discharge Pressure（后冷却器排放压力） R
012 Airend Temperature（主机排气温度） R
019 Separator Pressure Drop（分离器压降） R
020 Percent Capacity（容量百分比） R
025 Motor Speed（电机速度） R
026 Motor Current（电机电流） R
028 DC Link Voltage（直流电压） R
030 Motor Voltage（电机电压） R
031 Package kW（机组功耗） R
032 千瓦小时 R 0 - 999 添加至（兆瓦小时 * 1000）
065 总时数 MSB R
066 总时数 LSB R
098 压缩机类型 R 参见图 2
099 服务级别 R 0-2 0=级别 0，1=级别 1，2=级别 2
100 维修时段 R 1000 - 8000 增量 1000
103 干燥器已安装 R 0 = 无干燥器
112 目标压力 R/W 65 - 145
113 自动停机压力 R/W (T+1)-(T+10) T = 目标压力
114 立即停机压力 R/W ASP-(ASP+10) ASP = 自动停机压力
117 节省比较 R/W 0-2 0=Geo，1=Mod，2=开/关
121 通信控制开/关 R 0=关
122 远程启动/停止开/关 R 0=关
123 电源中断重启选项 (PORO) 开/关 R 0=关
124 PORO 时间（秒钟） R/W 10 - 600
127 Scheduled Start - Day（计划启动 - 日期） R/W 0-9 参见图 2
128 Scheduled Stop - Day（计划停机 - 日期） R/W 0-9 参见图 2
129 Scheduled Start（计划的启动）（小时） R/W 0 - 23
130 Scheduled Start（计划的启动）（分钟） R/W 0 - 59
131 Scheduled Stop（计划的停止）（小时） R/W 0 - 23
132 Scheduled Stop（计划的停止分钟）（分钟） R/W 0 - 59
133 额定压力 R
251 VSD 软件版本号 R 除以 100
255 警告代码 R 参见图 2
256 警报代码历史 R 参见图 2
400 重置网络登录 R/W 0-1 写入 1 值会将网络登录重置为默认出厂设
置。 重置之后，该数值应设置回 0

80447204 Rev B ZH-59

93014.15.07

ZH

图 132 : MANHATTAN 变速控制器寄存器 01-状态/控制

Bit 0: Host/Local (R/W) Bit 6: Alarm (R)

0 = Local
1 = Host
Bit 1: Run/Stop (R/W)
0 = Stop
1 = Run
Bit 2: Load/Unload (R/W)
0 = No Loaded Operation
1 = Loaded Operatoin
Bit 3: Operating at Minimum Speed (R)
0 = Operating above Minimum Speed
1 = Operating at Minimum Speed
Bit 4: Operating at Maximum Speed (R)
0 = Operating below Maximum Speed
1 = Operating at Maximum Speed
Bit 5: Stopped in Auto Restart (R)
0 = Not Stopped in Auto Restart
1 = Stopped in Auto Restart
0 = No Alarms
1 = Alarms
Bit 7: Warning (R)
0 = No Warnings
1 = Warnings
Bits 8 - 9: Normal/Unload Operate (R)
00 = Unloaded Operation
11 = Normal Operation
Bits 10 – 11: Unused
Bit 12: Fixed/Variable Speed Compressor (R)
0 = Fixed Speed
1 = Variable Speed
Bits 13-15: Unit Type (R): Unused

图 133 : MANHATTAN 变速控制器寄存器代码

寄存器　９８：　压缩机类型

５５　＝ 　５．５　ｋＷ
７５　＝ 　７．５　ｋＷ
８０　＝ 　７．５　ｈＰ
１００　＝ 　１０　Ｈ Ｐ
１１０　＝ 　１１　ｋＷ 　
１５０　＝ 　１５　ｋＷ
２００　＝ 　２０　Ｈ Ｐ
２２０　＝ 　２２　ｋＷ
２９０　＝ 　３０　Ｈ Ｐ
３００　＝ 　３０　ｋＷ
４００　＝ 　４０Ｈ Ｐ
３７０　＝ 　３７ｋＷ
５００　＝ 　５０Ｈ Ｐ

寄存器　１２７　和　１２８：　　Ｄａｙ（日）
０　＝ 　星 期 日 ４　＝ 　星 期 四 ７　＝ 　日 常
１　＝ 　星 期 一 ５　＝ 　星 期 五 ８　＝ 　工 作 日
２　＝ 　星 期 二 ６　＝ 　星 期 六 ９　＝ 　工 作 日
３　＝ 　星 期 三

ZH-60 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

图 134 : MANHATTAN 变速控制器警报和警告代码

代码 说明 代码 说明
01 Sensor Failure 4APT（传感器故障 4APT） 126 VSD 故障 26
02 Sensor Failure 3APT（传感器故障 3APT） 127 VSD 故障 27
08 Sensor Failure 7APT（传感器故障 7APT）（干燥器） 128 VSD 故障 28
10 Sensor Failure 2ATT（传感器故障 2ATT） 129 VSD 故障 29
18 High VSD Temperature（高 VSD 温度） 130 VSD 故障 30
19 Blower Fault（风扇故障） 131 VSD 故障 31
20 VSD Communication Failure（VSD 通讯故障） 132 VSD 故障 32
22 Check Motor Rotation（检查电机旋转） 133 VSD 故障 33
23 Stop Failure（停机故障） 134 VSD 故障 34
25 Remote Stop Failure（远程停止失败） 135 未使用
26 Remote Start Failure（远程启动失败） 136 VSD 故障 36
27 Incorrect VSD Type（不正确的 VSD 类型） 137 未使用
28 Replace Coolant Filter（更换冷却剂过滤器）（闲置模式） 138 VSD 故障 38
29 High Air Pressure（高空气压力） 139 未使用
30 Low Sump Air Pressure（低分离筒压力） 140 VSD 故障 40
31 High Airend Discharge Temperature（高主机排气温度） 141 VSD 故障 41
32 Emergency Stop（紧急停止） 142 VSD 故障 42
34 Change Separator Element（更换分离器元件） … 未使用
36 Invalid Calibration（校准无效） 147 VSD 故障 47
37 Check Set Points（检查设定点）（参数重置为默认） 148 VSD 故障 48
38 100 Hours To Service（100 小时后需要维修） 149 VSD 故障 49
39 Service Required（需要维修） 150 AMA 不正常
40 Alarm - Service Required（警报 - 需要维修） … 未使用
48 High Sump Pressure（高分离筒压力） 159 VSD 故障 59
51 Dryer High Pressure（干燥器高压） 160 未使用
52 Dryer Temperature Warning（干燥器温度警告） 161 VSD 故障 61
55 Change HE Filter（更换 HE 过滤器） 162 VSD 故障 62
100 VSD 故障（一般） 163 VSD 故障 63
101 VSD 故障 1 164 VSD 故障 64
102 VSD 故障 2 165 VSD 故障 65
103 VSD 故障 3 166 VSD 故障 66
104 VSD 故障 4 167 VSD 故障 67
105 VSD 故障 5 168 VSD 故障 68
106 VSD 故障 6 169 未使用
107 VSD 故障 7 170 VSD 故障 70
108 VSD 故障 8 171 VSD 故障 71
109 VSD 故障 9 172 VSD 故障 72
110 VSD 故障 10 … 未使用
111 VSD 故障 11 180 VSD 故障 80
112 VSD 故障 12 … 未使用
113 VSD 故障 13 190 VSD 故障 90
114 VSD 故障 14 191 VSD 故障 91
115 VSD 故障 15 … 未使用
116 VSD 故障 16 210 KTY 错误（VSD 故障）
117 VSD 故障 17 211 风扇错误（VSD 故障）
… 未使用 212 ECB 错误（VSD 故障）
123 VSD 故障 23 213 皮带断裂（VSD 故障）
124 VSD 故障 24 214 时钟故障（VSD 故障）
125 VSD 故障 25 215 曲线端点（VSD 故障）

80447204 Rev B ZH-61

93014.15.07

ZH

X 系列系统控制连接
Xe-70M 控制器通过 Belden 9841 或等效的 RS-485 电缆连接至 Ingersoll 图 137
Rand X 系列系统控制器。 为了连接至网络，电缆必须连接至控制器上的
端口 X04，如下图所示。 请注意，最多 8 (X8I) 或 12 (X12I) 台设备可一
起串连在 X 系列网络：

图 135

X e7 0M P h o e n ix 2 P in
C o n n e cto r
L2
2

1
L1

 正在启用系统控制功能
为了与 X 系列系统控制器正确通信，Xe-70M 必须采用正确设置的如下设
2 1
定点。
X 04 在第 3 页（恒速）或第 2 页（变速）的“Operator Settings（操作人员设
置）”选项卡（恒速）
L2
L1 验证 COM 控制设定点是否已如下所示启用（勾选复选框）。 如果未选
择该设定点，系统控制器无法对设备进行载荷或卸荷。

 RS-485 网络 此外，对于恒速设备，请确保启用“Enable Auto-Restart（启用自动重

启）”（勾选复选框），否则压缩机在被系统控制器卸荷时会继续运转。

RS-485 数据通信和其他低压信号会受到电气干扰。 这种可能性会 图 138

导致间歇性故障或难以诊断的异常情况。 为了避免这一可能性的发生，
务必使用接地屏蔽电缆，一端牢固良好地接地。 此外，请在安装期间对
布线加以周详考虑。
1. 切勿在高压 3 相电源线旁边布设 RS-485 数据通信或低压信号线。
如果必须与电源线交叉，务必以直角交叉。
2. 如果必须短距离沿着电源线的路线进行布设（例如： 沿悬挂式电缆
架从压缩机装置通向墙壁），请将 RS-485 或信号线绑缚在接地电缆
架的外部，以便电缆架形成一种接地的电气干扰屏蔽。
3. 如有可能，请勿在设备附近布设 RS-485 或信号线，因为这可能形成
电气干扰源（例如： 3 相电源变压器、高压开关装置、变频驱动模 在设置地址和 COM 控制项之后，确保通过导航至第 1 页的“Integral
块、无线电通信天线）。 Sequencing（次序联控）”并验证“Integral Sequencing（次序联控）”是否
如下所示被禁用（勾选复选框），借此来禁用“Integral Sequencing（次序
图 136
联控）”：

图 139

一旦这些设定点已正确设置并且设备已在本地启动，系统控制器应当能收
 RS-485 地址选择 到来自压缩机的状态信息并且能进行控制。

每台连接至网络的压缩机均具备独一无二的分配地址，从压缩机 1 开始连
续增加至连接网络的最大压缩机数量。
每台压缩机的 RS-485 地址在第 7 页的“General Settings（常规设置）”选
项卡进行设置。 控制器的默认 RS-485 地址设置是 1，
此外，有效协议必须设置为 Airbus485。

ZH-62 80447204 Rev B

93014.15.07

ZH

公告与声明
本手册中描述的机型可在全球各地使用。售入和运入欧盟国家/地区内的机器上应显示 EC 标志，并应符合各项规定。因而，本机器的设计规格已被鉴
定为符合 EC 指令。严禁对任何零件作任何更改；如有更改，将被取消 CE 认可证书，并使标记失效。
本手册内容被视为是 Ingersoll Rand 的财产和机密，在未得到 Ingersoll Rand 书面许可的情况下不得复制。
本文档中的任何内容均无意明示地或暗含地扩大文件中关于 Ingersoll Rand 产品的承诺、担保和说明。任何此类担保或产品销售的其他条款及条件均
应遵循此类产品销售的标准条款和条件，索取可得。
Ingersoll Rand 公司有权未经通告即改变及改进产品，也没有义务对已售产品补加改进措施。
认可设备的详细信息可从 Ingersoll Rand 维修部门获取。
Ingersoll Rand Company 对本手册从英语原版翻译成其他语言时出现的错误概不负责。
此压缩机组的设计和压缩机的某些功能受 Ingersoll Rand 所持有专利及未决专利的保护。

保证
本公司担保凡由本公司制造并供货的设备在自该设备运行之日起的 12 个月内或自该设备离厂之日起的 18 个月内（以最早之日为
准）均无材料和工 艺方面的缺陷。买方如发现任何符合本条款的故障，须在此期限内及时以书面方式通知本公司，本公司将酌情处
理，或进行适当修理，或提供替换 部件，但前提是买方必须已经按照适宜的工业标准储存、安装、维护和操作该设备，并已落实本
公司的具体建议。凡由本公司供货但由其他厂家制 造的附件或设备将采用该公司对本公司作出的担保，并将此担保转于买方。对于
购买者所做的任何修理、更换或调整设备、出现的人工成本或其他 事先未经本公司书面批准的行为，本公司概不负责。
本担保不包括腐蚀、磨损或正常损耗。性能保证仅限于那些在本公司提案中特别说明的事项。除非负责达到该性能保证受限于指定
测试，本公司有 义务在以上所述时段内进行纠正。
本公司除标题内容以外不作任何其他明示或暗示的担保或表示，也不承诺任何适销性和特殊适用性的暗示担保。
本公司以上述方式及期限对任何明显或潜在的非达标设备的修正，将构成本公司履行对该非达标设备的全部责任，不管该责任的依
据是合同、担保 过失、赔偿还是与该设备有关或由该设备产生的严格责任或其他责任。
如认为设备有故障，除非事先书面通知本公司准备操作，否则购买者均不得操作。对设备的任何此类使用将由购买者完全承担风险
与责任。
注意：这是 Ingersoll Rand 公司的标准担保。任何在购买压缩机之时有效的担保，或作为采购订单的一部分协商达成的担保，都优先
于本担保。

80447204 Rev B ZH-63

93014.15.07

ingersollrandproducts.com
© 2014 Ingersoll-Rand